s *WfUNIVER% ^lOSANCflfj^ 12? C? "^ I ^OFCAIIFO^ ^OFCAUFOfc^ '1 I- 1 <&UIBRARY0yr ^UIBRARYQr u? 1 I/—' $ § 1 If"' S =: I* 2- & I* 2 5 a ^WttUNIVtltt/^ ^lUS-ANLtUju u. ^OFCAUFOftto ^OFCA11FO% ^EUNIVER% ^lOSANGEUj^ i I ^A«vaan# hwwwih^ -n O ^eimver% %HDNVS0V^ ^\\NN!VER% ee ^clOSANCnfJ^ 5 v, ^jlOSANCEU^ ^/flUAINiHtf^ ^M-UBRARYQr, ^QFCAlIFOfy^ ^OFCAllFOfy^ ^AavHan-^ ^Aavaai># ^•UBRARYQr ^UIBRARYtf^ S \WHMVER% ^AOSMfj^ %a3AINn3UV N ^OKAIIFO/?^ i & Y vf7.iHV)ifln.a^v ^OFCAtlFO^ & ■ S \#«NIVER% I" ea %713'WV.Wil^ ^clOSMfj^ s ^lOSANGfltt> / O u. mm ^WEINIVEW^ jo^ ^OFCAUFO^ *&A«vaan-# / £ # %BAINfl4V\^ % avIOSANCEUa> ^•UBRARYO^ ^M-UBRARY^ %oJnvDjo^ ^OF-CAllFOfy* ^Of CALIF(% 9 %»$0l^ ^EUN!\e% i, < m so .S3 I 5 .id? ^OFCAUFOJ?^ JO^ ^OJIIWJO^ *%1»S0V^ ^V\EUN1VH% jftiuwuan.i&r ■^Pjiinuw.cmJ^v ^mmm^ %KamHiF i-- , ^■UBRARYa?. 3 1 ir" £ ^OfCALIFOJ!^ 3 1 v jfo.iiwii. J His eighth book is cited by Pris 15 to p. 31. A large extract from cian, p. 1322. and his fourth by Rufi- thence is published by Henninius, at nus, p. 2711. In quoting, for the fu- the end of his own 'EXA>wy/i*i? 'o^&. ture, the old Latin grammarians, I shall And to the pages of it, as printed there, refer, as I do here, to that edition of I shall refer, whenever I shall have them which Putschius gave, occasion to cite Vossius. , XVlii INTRODUCTION. But whatever judgment the public may form of these my humble labours, I cannot lose the secret satisfaction of having honestly endeavoured, in opposition to a spreading opinion, to vindicate from the imputation of ignorance, absurdity, and barbarism, the characters of those learned Greeks of the lower empire, to whom Eu- rope is greatly indebted for much of that sound know- ledge it now has : whose exile and misfortunes are to be pitied, whose abilities and genius to be honoured, whose industry to be respected, whose labours to be thankfully received, and of whom every true lover of Greek learn- ing should with pleasure and gratitude acknowledge himself a follower, and admirer. E tenebris tantis tarn clarum extollere lumen Qui primi potuistis, et hide affulgere terra, Ismario profugas ducentes More Musas, Vos sequor, o Graia gentis decora, inque verendis Fixa pedum pono pressis vestigia signis. Modern scholars are certainly very glad to enjoy the benefit of the labours of these great men, though at the same time they depreciate and vilify their characters : they themselves disturbing and corrupting the stream of Greek literature, and then imputing this foulness to that channel, through which it continued to flow with its ori- ginal purity. On this head I beg leave of that right honourable and learned person, under the protection of whose name this Essay hath ventured publicly to contradict many received opinions, to transcribe a sensible and spirited passage from a letter, with which he honoured me on the subject : — " I am a great admirer of that contrivance of accentuation ; and look upon it as a remarkable inven- tion, framed by the most ingenious people that ever ap- peared in the world, for adorning their language to the utmost degree of refinement ; and for settling, as far as human wit and wisdom can fix, a lasting standard of tone for pronouncing every word, and almost every syl- INTRODUCTION. xix lable in it. I am a friend to the cause, and think an advocate wanting; since that, which calls itself the learned world, is much inclined to blot out this ancient character from the book of learning, and had rather lose it entirely, than be at the pains of understanding it at all. For my part, I am for preserving what we have got ; and do not think the inventive talents are so re- dundant at present, as to render the diminution of the present stock of human knowledge a matter of indif- ference." The reader is indebted to my good friend Dr. Barnard for a very judicious remark in the 101st page of this treatise, concerning the improbability of Aristophanes' marks referring to quantity ; which he with his usual quickness of discernment readily suggested to me, when I was opening to him my thoughts on the historical part of this subject. On the whole ; if I have detected a single error, have unravelled a single perplexity, and thrown the least light on a subject, that has been hitherto much obscured, I cannot think my pains misemployed. For I have no reason to set such a value on my labour, as not to think it amply repaid, if it be so successful as to illustrate any one truth. " Nee obsit, quod sit in tenui labor : neque enim nisi ex minimis fiunt magna. Et ex judicii con- suetudine in rebus minutis adhibita, pendet ssepissime etiam in maximis vera atque accurata scientia." Eton, Dec. 1761. CONTEN T S OF THE ESSAY ON ACCENT AND QUANTITY. CHAP. I. On accent and quantity in general, their difference marked, their natural dependence on each other, their necessary connexion and consistency. Emphasis, spirit, or aspiration, distinguished from accent. Oratorical accent different from syllabic ----- Page 1 CHAP. II. On the quantity of the English language. The nature of a long time. The long and short times of the Greeks and Romans : the case of doubtful vowels. The coin- cidence of the acute tone and long time on the same syllables in our language. On what foundation and authority quantity is established - - - - - p. 14 CHAP. III. The metre of the English language. The kinds of it. Why no hexameters. Mere metre not sufficient to constitute good verse. In what the pronunciation of the English, Scotch, Welch, and Irish, differs - p 29 CHAP. IV On the accent of the Romans. The agreement of the Latin accent and dialect with the JEolic. Some ac- Xxii I CONTENTS OF ESSAY. count of the JEolism of the Roman language . Homers JEolism. An argument drawn from thence in favour of our present Greek accentuation. The difference between the Roman apex and accentual mark. On the JEolic letter in the ancient Greek and Roman al- phabets ------ ^ ------- p. 41 CHAP. V. On the accent of the old Greeks. Some passages of Dio- nysius of Halicarnassus and Plutarch considered. The tones as well as times regarded by the ancients in their compositions. Importance of accent to harmony. A brief account of those ancient Greek grammarians who have left remarks on accent - -----p. 79 CHAP. VI. On the introduction, use, and accidental abuse of the Greek accentual marks. Vindication of the charac- ter of Aristophanes Byzantinus. Accentual metre of Tzetzes. Character of the learned Greeks of the lower empire : and of some of their scholars. A review of the history of the Greek language to the taking of Constantinople ----------p. 97 CHAP. VII. The popular objection considered against the present ac- centual marks, on account of their inconsistency with true quantity. Some errors of Dr. G. noted. The true nature of the acute tone stated and explained - p. 139 CHAP. VIII. The hypothesis of Isaac Vossius, Henninius, Sarpedonius, and others, erroneous. The Greek accent different in its position from the Roman. Dr. Bentleys and Scali- gers remarks on the Lathi accent , Difference between lite, accent iw I and mcivieaT arsis - - - p.. 140 CONTENTS OF ESSAY. XX111 CHAP. IX. Objections to the irregularity of the present Greek accents considered, and answered. An argument drawn from it in their favour. The doctrine of enclitics and atonies vindicated. The position of the present marks con- formable to the ancient accounts of the tones themselves. The variation of accent in some ivords at different times considered. Accent dependent commonly on the quan- tity of subsequent syllables. The consistency of the acute with a short time demonstrated. The general doctrine of human sounds, from the old Greek writers on music. The three general cases of exception to our present marks considered -------p. 168 CHAP. X. How far ancient quantity is observed by those who dis- regard the accentual marks ------ p. 191 CHAP. XI. That there are no sufficient reasons yet assigned for re- jecting the present system of accentual marks. An ex- postulation with modern editors on suppressing them, p. 198 Remarks of Mr. Mar kland on our present Greek accen- tuation: on the accented Greek inscription lately found at Herculaneum. Remarks of Dr. Taylor on the same p. 206 CONTENTS OF THE FIRST DISSERTATION. Page Introduction - 279 The original use of accents was musical - - - - ib. The most ancient manuscripts and inscriptions have no accents ------------- ib. The modern system of accents is arbitrary and un- certain -------------- 281 Contrary to analogy, reason, and quantity - - - 290 Contradictory to itself --------- 296 A due regard cannot be had at the same time to quantity and accents, as they are now placed - - 304 Accents, though placed, are not read in poetry - - 30b' Great accuracy of the ancients as to the different length and shortness of syllables ------ 307 Accents inconsistent with the rhythm arising from quantity ------------- 308 What rhythm is ------------ 310 Two uses of accents ---------- 3 LI This no argument for a general use of accents - -313 Disadvantages of accents --------314 Accents are of less use in the Greek language, to lead us to the knowledge of quantity, than in any other 315 The placing of accents not arbitrary, when a lan- guage is founded in a natural quantity - - - ib. Men are led to accent their ivords partly by the con- stitution of their language, and partly by their own temper ------------ $l(> CONTENTS OF DISSERT. I, XXV Page Barbarity of accents in the modern Greek language 317 The reason why words of the same form were ac- cented differently ---------- 318 Hence the present manner of accenting probably arose _--- 319 Origin of accents more particularly deduced - - 320 Accents were introduced to preserve the ancient pro- nunciation ------------- 322 An argument to prove the antiquity of accents from Demosthenes not conclusive ------- 324 What Suidas seemeth to say on this subject - - - 327 Corrupt manner of accenting probacy occasioned by Alexanders expedition into Asia ----- 328 System of accents mot formed at once - - - - 332 Cases in which thesame word was accented differently 333 Conclusion ------------- 334 CONTENTS OF THE SECOND DISSERTATION. Page Design of the former Dissertation, and of this- - - 345 Impropriety of the Grct>k accents not an opinion started by Is. Vossius -_--___-- 346 A passage of Dionysius Halicamassensis considered 349 Another passage of Dionysius considered - - - - 352 A third passage of Dionysius considered, and an emendation of it offered --------- 354 A passage of Quinctilian considered, and shewn not to answer Mr. Foster's purpose ------ 357 An essential difference between vocal utterance and singing ------------- - 360 A farther reason arising hence, why the above-men- tioned second passage of Dionysius cannot be taken in Mr. Foster's sense ---------- 361 The ear is the proper judge of quantity, and of the power and force of accents -------- 362 Many degrees of quantity besides short and long - ib. A paradigm, exhibiting a progression of quantity from the shortest to the longest syllable - - - - 363 First observation upon it --------- ib. Second observation ----------- ib. Third observation ----------- 364 Fourth observation ----------- 365 The ancient Greek grammarians, from whom we have received the doctrine of accents, did not think that the acute accent was a mere elevation of the voice ------------- ib. CONTENTS OP DISSERT. II. XXV11 Page The sense in which I had taken a passage ofDiony- sius Thrax, shewn to be agreeable to what those grammarians taught ---------- 368 The hard or rough breathing, as well as the acute accent, has the power of making a short syllable long --------------- 370 In pursuance of this doctrine, some Latin poets, when they made use of Greek words, followed a quantity which was directed by the Greek accents, and not by the nature of the syllables ------- 371 Mr. Foster, in calling this an abuse, does, in reality, say nothing against those who are against pro- nouncing the Greek language according to accents 373 A true state of the debate between those who are against pronouncing the Greek language accord- ing to accents, and those who are for it. Wlience it follows, that, so far as the argument of the former is intended to go, there is no difference be- tween them and Mr. Foster- ------- ib. Mr. Foster's argument founded upon the acute accent taken in a sense different from that in which it was taken by those whom he opposes. His description of the accent which he proposes considered, and shewn to be very obscure, if not contradictory or unintelligible ----------- -^375 Unhandsome expressions made use of by Mr. Foster and other disputants ---------- 377 Grammatical disquisitions not trivial or trifling- - 378 Conclusion -------- 379 Gaudentii Philosopb. in 'App.oviKy daayojyfi. *02 ouSe 66yyov KaraKOvoJV, ovds rriv pa%£i yap rd wra icai irapiov, roj [irj irpoyiviooKUv ravTa alaOijatt, 7rtpt S)V 61 \6yoi. NOTE. — The references in Mr. Foster's Essay to Dr. G.'s Dissertations-relate to the pages of the original editions ; the numbers of which, for the convenience of the reader, have been marked throughout the present one. AN ESSAY ON ACCENT AND QUANTITY, CHAP. I. On accent and quantity in general, their difference marked, their natural de- pendence on each other, their necessary connexion and consistency. Em- phasis, spirit, or aspiration distinguished from accent. Oratorial accent dif- ferent from syllabic. When the distinct natures and principles of those things, which are the subject of any controversy, are clearly denned and explained; and the question is by that means at first properly stated, the dispute is at once half determined. The want of this precision, at first setting out, has drawn many inquiries to an unne- cessary length, and unsatisfactory conclusion. This consequence of discussing a point without ascertaining the terms of it at first, and keeping them distinct after- wards, I will endeavour to avoid : and accordingly, be- fore we consider the application of the voice, in the for- mation and modulation of syllables, to any particular language, it will be proper to consider its power, and use in general. §. First, then, It is evident that nature hath given it a variety of tones, that gradually rise or fall above or be- low each other : this is the first and grand division of it "Z ESSAY ON sounds into high and low. In singing many of these are used ; in common discourse and reading, fewer. This perfectly agrees with what Dionysius of Hali- carnassus observes on the difference between music and ordinary speech : which is said by him to consist, not in the quality, but number only of tones.* And, indeed, if the reader in attending to this subject will but con- sider the tones of his voice as like a few notes of an or- gan or flute, he will, I am persuaded, be thereby ena- bled to form much clearer conceptions, and a much bet- ter judgment on the whole. §. Secondly, It is evident, likewise, that the human * Kai Ovx aXXoTgia. KE^n/xai rov nriky- f/.a,m; elxovi' [/.ovo'im ya% ti; w km h t£v KoXiTixSiv "Koyaii t<7rio-rri[/.n, to) IT02ii~J SiaWaTTovc-a. T»{ Iv wSa?V Kal oeyavoiq, ovyX ra noiI2~( (jrtfi trvvQia-. cap. 11.) A learned author, who in a late treatise hath maintained a system opposite to that, which I shall propose to the reader in the following pages, hatli explained this passage of Dionysius in a different manner, on the supposition that he is not in this place comparing music with oratory or common discourse, but poe- try with prose. The context clearly enough points out the former sense. But even without the context it may be evidently seen that music is meant by Dionysius. Not that I am led to this explanationby the word [xovo-Mri, which I know is used in a very open sense, relating to every thing thai has rhythm, but by T?? Iv wjai? x.a.1 ofyavon;. which words express vocal and instrumental music, as perspicuously and directly as any terms can do, which the Greek language affords, Tlio-o; here hath the sense, not of quantus, but of quotus, i. e. expresses number, or arithmetical quantity; that quantity, which (in the words of H. Stephens) Dialectici dis- cretam appellant. The word iroa-tZ in the passage before us, is, I find, trans- lated by the Latin interpreter quanli- tate; but that I believe was owing to the poverty of the Roman language, not having a substantive quotitas be- longing to quotus, as it has quantitas to quantus. The Greek word nxoa-oc; cer- tainly signifies quantity and number too : which the reader may see con- firmed by passages from the best Greek writers in H. Stephen's Thes. ling. Granc. in the word ireo-os, which " ex- ponilur etiam quotus" with its deriva- tives : as 7roa-o"»~juap signifies not how long a day, but how many days : and many more instances there are to the same purpose. I have therefore the greatest reason to think, as well from the words themselves, as from the con- text, that Dionysius means in this sen- tence to say, " that oratorical or com- mon discourse differs from music not in the quality, but number only of sounds." A person may speak with grace and harmony, and perhaps not exceed, all the time, the compass of four or five notes ; while a strain or air in music may lake in the compass of twelve, or fourteen, or more. Dio- nysius in a few lines immediately fol- lowing this passage fixes the number of them used in common speech at five, &t iyyifTa. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. $ voice, like every wind instrument, has a power of short' ening or lengthening any of those sounds it utters. 1 . On the former division of these sounds is founded what grammarians have called accent, relating merely to the particular elevation or depression of them on cer- tain syllables : the marks * of which are [ ' ] for the ele- vation; [ ] for the depression; and [~or A ] for the ele- vation and depression joined together on the same syl- lable, forming what is called a circumflex; as the two when separate are called the acute and grave. As the word accentus comes from f accino, and the cor- responding Greek word irpotruhia from 5i'tt dicitur, quod TtforaSira.i toa<; Circumllexus uota de acuto et gravi 3-i/XXa£a~j. Idem ibid. facta, vel e dcorsum stans,\ Diomcd. $ Epiloui. Grrec. Palatograph, c. 11. lib. ii. b2 ESSAY ON himself seems not to have had the least thought of their being- ever restrained to singing : in the very beginning Of his Octo Partes, he Says, Trpovydia earl tovoq (Jxdvyiq ky- ypa/jfiarov* And this excellent grammarian's remarks on the Greek language are not to be looked on, as grounded merely on the principles and practice of his own times, but as conformable to the rules of antiquity : for he de- clares in his preface to his third book, that he drew his materials from the ancient grammarians, e£iwv var-a to. \el\pava rtiv iraKaitiv Tpa^uiTiKuv, and then mentions parti- cularly f Apollonius Dyscolus, a Greek writer of great note under Antoninus Pius. 2. On the latter division of sounds is founded, what is termed Quantity, regarding only the quantity of time taken up in expressing any of them. The delay of the Voice in pronouncing them forms the long time % marked * Accentus est intensio vocis Uteris aajunctae. t This author, and his son Herodian are considered by Priscian as " prin- cipatum inter Graecos scriptores artis grammatical possidentes" (Putsch, p. 534.) whom he accordingly professes principally to follow : as Lascaris did afterwards. And what is here said of Lascaris, may be applied likewise to Gaza, Chrysoloras, Moschopulus.Chal- condyles (from whom our late teachers of Greek have compiled their gram- mars) whose observations on their own language agree with those of the best ancients, Aristarchus.Dionysius Thrax, Trypho, Abro, JEUns Dionysius, Am- monius, Mosris, Apollonius, Herodian, and others, as far as can be collected from their remains, either published separately, or scattered up and down in the best scholia, Suidas, Eustathi- us, Thomas Magister, Varinus, the great etymologist, &c. Apollonius tells us himself in his Syntax, p. 135. that he wrote 7T£pi tgvojv, which work of his is probably referred to by the scholiast on the Plat, of Arisloph.v. 103. on the word m6ov. And in the life of Apollonius, prefixed to his works, his son Herodian is said likewise, at the desire of M. Antoninus, to have com- posed tw Mtfixnv Jtai tw Ka.Qo'kix.riv Wgo- o-wSi'av. That work of Herodian is lost. But in parts of his TragSJcSoXai rov /a£- yaKov prifxaros and two other pieces of his in Aldus' Kigctg 'hfji.a.\Bua.;, there are several remarks on the Greek accen- tuation, that agree with our modern practice. X The reason of these marks the cu- rious reader may see in Scaliger de causis ling. Lat. lib. ii. cap. 55. Longus est linea a sinistra in dexte- ram partem ffqualiter ducta, — .Et bre- vis, virgula similiter jacens, sed panda et contractor, quasi c sursum spec- tans 1 '. Sed in tills [accentus notis] tonos : in his tempora dignosci vide- mus. Dionied. The same description of the marks of Accent and Quantity is in Priscian; and in the editio prima of iElius Donatus almost in the very samewords. Putsch, p. 1742. Seealso Maxim. Victor, p. 1913. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 5 thus [-]; the quickness of the voice in hastening over them forms the short one marked thus [•" ]. From hence it appears, that both accent and quan- tity are equally founded in the very nature of the human voice, are necessary and inseparable from it ; that con- sequently no language can, or ever could, be pronounced without them, except you suppose a monotony and equa- bility in the voice, the existence of which it is difficult to conceive. Aristoxenus accordingly says, " There is a kind of music in discourse, arising from the accents in words. For it is natural to raise and sink the tones of voice in ordinary speech."* This Aristoxenus was a scholar of Aristotle, long before the time of Aristophanes Byzan- tinus, who first introduced accentual marks. And I am inclined to lay the greater stress on his authority, since he is considered by Quinctilian as a musician and gram- marian too. That his words tiriretveiv and kydvpu are to be understood as relating to the rise and fall of the voice, will appear by H. Stephen's explanation of eTrtramg and avtaiq. " 'EttItcktiq (says he) est vocis commotio a loco graviore in acutum locum : uvtatg vero contra. Nam ab acuminis culmine in grave quiddam descendit. Est autem soni gravitas, quum ex f intimo quidam spiritus trahitur ; acumen vero ex superficie oris emittitur ."J And indeed Aristoxenus himself explains them in the same manner in another part of his work.§ " The «n- * AtytTat yag Sij xai "Koywlic; ti /weXoj, t When Virgil therefore translates to 0-vyxeifjt.ivov ix. nraiv TrpocrajJiaiv, to Iv Homer's (3ajt/o-T£va^o;y by " graviter ge- Toif oTioy.a.a-1. tpva-mh yap to Ithteiveiv mitus imo de pectore ducens," his de- y.a.1 aviEva-i Iv tj'{ a.wiu$. Harmon, lib. i. lO.j Beutl. Dissert, on Pliat. p. 121, 2. 6 ESSAY ON rafftc is the movement of the voice from a lower pitch to a higher: the avcatc, from a higher to a lower. 'OlvrrjQ then is what is formed by the emraaiQ; fiapWriQ that which is formed by the avetne." There unavoidably must be accent, if the voice has only two notes (and fewer than two or three are hardly ever, I believe, used even in ordinary discourse). There must in short be a comparative * highness and lowness of sound, except the voice has the use of only a single note, like a drum or drone-base. As the rise and fall of sound prevents monotony, which would give a deadness to the human speech, accent is not improperly called in Diomedes, anima vocis. There must be likewise quantity, except you sup- pose the voice to dwell, with a measure of time so ex- actly equal, on all its syllables, as would be exceed- ingly tiresome and offensive to every ear, and contrary to that variety, which nature seems so much pleased with, and the ear constantly requires. And accordingly Quinc- tilian very truly observes, that we cannot avoid speak- ing in long and short time. " Neque enim loqui pos- sumus, nisi e syllabis brevibus ac longis, ex quibus pedes fiunt ." f The consequence of which is, what he remarks in another place, " metrici quidem pedes adeo reperiuntur in oratione, ut in ea frequenter non sen- tientibus nobis omnium generum excidant versus. Et contra nihil est prosa scriptum, quod non redigi pos- sit in qusedam versiculorum genera."j To this division of the measure of sounds may be easily referred that distinction of them, which Cicero || * Ipsa enim natura, quasi modula- t Lib. ix. c. 4. retur homimim orationem, in omni J Idem. p. 'ISO. edit. Gibs. verbo posuit acutam vocem : nee una || Mira est enim nalura vocis : ctijus plus, nee a poslreina syllaba citra ter- quidem e tribus omnino sonis, inflexo, tiam. Cic ad Brut. Orat. 18. acuto, gravi, tanta sit et tain suavis In like manner Qtiinctilian. Est au- varietas pert'ecta in cantibus : est au- tem in omni voce ulique acuta. Inst. tern in dicendo eliam quidain cantus Orat. lib. i. cap. v. obscurior. Cic. Orat. 17. And after them Diomedes. Vt nulla This cantus in dicendo obscurior is the vox sine vocali, ita sine accentu nulla same with XoyuU^ t( fxi'hat; of Aiistox- «sl. lib. ii. eruis, and is cxacllj conformable like- ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 7 has made, and which holds good, not only in the Ro- man language, which he had chiefly in view, but in every language, that is in the human voice itself. It may be remarked, that accent, though closely united with quantity, is not only distinct from it, but in the formation of the voice really antecedent to it. The pitch, or height of the note is taken first, and then the continuance of it is settled : by the former of these the accent is determined, by the latter the quantity. So closely combined and inseparable are these two things, which have sometimes been represented as utterly in- compatible with each other : so distinct likewise are these, which at other times have occasioned much per- plexity by being confounded together. The inconsistence of accents with the harmony aris- ing from quantity, is urged by the learned author of " a " treatise against the Greek accents," lately published : wherein he endeavours to prove this point in the follow- ing manner : " Metre ariseth necessarily from syllables ; but rhythm may arise from mere sounds. Metre there- fore must produce one rhythm, and accents, if they differ from quantity, must produce another. — Take now the first example, which Longinus mentioneth, that of smiths striking their hammers upon their an- vils (from whence music is said to have taken its rise) and suppose now two sets of them (consisting either wise with what iJionysius says above Voces ut chordae sunt intentae, quae on this subject : which will receive yet ad quemque tactum respondeant, acuta, farther light from another remarkable gravis ; cita, tarda ; magna, parva, passage of Aristoxenus, to this pur- quas tamen inter omnes est suoquasque pose ; where he having been freaking in genere mediocris. Atque etiam ilia of men, as JiaXiyo'^ 6 " ' an d |M£>>wXoTEpoij asperum ; contractum, diffusum ; con- toijtoic Is-n'y. Element. Harmonic, lib. tinenti spiritu, intcrmisso; fractum, i. p. 3. So ill-grounded is that opi- soissura, flexo tono ; attennatam, in- nion concerning the old accents or fialura. Cic. cle Ornt. 3. 57. tones, maintained by certain persons, Omnium longitudinum et brevitatnm that they were merely of a musical na- in sonis, sicut acutarum graviumque tttre, and are to be considered by us as vocum judicium natura in auribus nos- not relating to ordinary discourse. tris collocavit. Idem. (hat. 51. 8 ESSAY ON of different numbers, or of the same number, but pro- vided with hammers of different natures) to be strik- ing on their anvils at the same time, and you will clearly see that, though each set will produce a rhythm, yet both sets striking at the same time must produce discords." I have several objections to this illustra- tion drawn from the two sets of different hammers, which I shall not trouble the reader with, observing only this, in answer to it, that the author, as far as I un- derstand the application of his simile to the case of ac- cent and quantity, plainly seems to think, that these two, if used together in uttering the same syllable, do of course, because they are two things, require therefore two exertions, two operations of the voice to express them, which in the same syllable seems impossible: whereas they depend but on one operation, belong but to one sound ; which sound, though a single one, is ca- pable of mensuration two ways, in quality of elevation, and degree of continuance. Height and length, though two relative things, do always subsist together in one subject. These two things in sound are very clearly distin- guished and marked by Plutarch in his miscellaneous works, where he says, " Three very minute things do necessarily strike the ear at once, the tone or sound itself 66yyoQ; the duration of it xjiwWe ; and the third thing, to which they belong, the formation and articu- lation of the letter or syllable." * And, having thus shewn their distinction and connexion, he thon declares those persons to be incompetent judges of sound and speech, who cannot perceive the difference between them.f The word fdoyyog in its proper sense signifies * Aiei yag avayxcuov rgia IXayio-nt X a '^K Btv &x- a < rriyv T "' v elptifxivctjv, ita.%a.x&- llvat Ta ffiTTTOVTa Ei? twv axohv, >pdoyyov Xou&e~v re Suvairdat toi? HaQ' exatrTa, xal TE %ai Xpwov, xdl (TuXXaSw n yoa.fx.fxa. truvopav to &' i.fx,et^Tavofxevov ev s>ca.o-Ta> ifxov Se ffpo?aiyovTft>v afxa. avrZv na.1 to fx.fi. " Sed et hoc constat, tw -r«f aio-QiiiTEai; IwKfo^av avaynaTov quod, nisi possit sensus discernere sin- wotsTo-Sat. Plut. torn. ii. p. 1144. Xy- gula praedictorum, nequit fieri ut corn- land, -prehendat, quod ad singula attinet, ne- t AXXa fx.hv naici"vo av6pov, ok a:V9iid6yyog is used, through all the old Greek writers on music published by Meibomius, as a single independent tone, whether high or low. *$wnjfc ttt&giq iirt play rad6yyoc, says Aristoxenus. Almost the same words are repeated by the other writers in Meibo- mius' collection. The perception of sound arises from a certain im- pulse of air on the drum of the ear ; on the first impres- sion of the air depends the accent : if it be a quick piercing stroke, it forms the d§»e, acutus, sharp or high sound : if it be a duller impression, it forms the fiapvc., gravis, flat or low sound. The physical cause of these different impulses, which experience hath discovered, and philosophy hath now well settled and explained, is not part of our present business. But whatever be the cause, or kind of the impulse, whether it be quick or dull, it certainly may be varied in point of + duration, according to the continuance of the vibration, which it is in the power of our organs of speech either to shorten or lengthen. And on the measure of its duration de- pends prosodical time or quantity. As spirit, or emphasis, hath been sometimes con- founded with accent and quantity, I will endeavour to point out its distinction from the other two ; that these three things may be kept as separate in the mind of the reader, as they are in their own natures. This spirit is in truth another measure of the voice, and is so marked out by Scaliger, and added as a third by him to the foregoing two. Cicero likewise has done it, though *) y^a/xf^ara. are distinguished in like dem sphacrice movetur aer, sicuti unda manner by this author in some other ex lapilli projectu ; quod sentit secun- lines immediately following this pas- do deanima Averrois, et piimo de mu- sage. sica Boethius. Unde et piinceps in * Harmon, lib. i. p. 15. ratione pulsuum, quos cum musica ra- t On the formation and duration of tione simile quitldam habere prodit, sounds Caelius Rhudiginus writes thus: circulos temporum nominavit, sicnt et " Aerem porro sonum deferentem un- casus, Arsin intelligi volens et Thesin." dam vocalera appellat Avicenna, siqui- Lcct. Antiq. II. 27. 10 ESSAY ON not so methodically, in the passage above cited, where he considers the voice as lenis or aspera, attenuata or inflata. This distinction cannot possibly be more clearly stated than in Scaliger's own words. " Cum vocem quantitate metiamur, et syllaba in voce sit ut in sub- jecta materia, et quantitas triplici dimensione consti- tnatur, longa, lata, alta: necessario quoque iisdem rationibus syllaba affecta erit, ut levatio aut pressio in altitndine ; afflatio aut attenuatio in latitudine ; trac- tus in longitudine sit." * The reader will here first ob- serve, that Scaliger uses the word quantitas not as we commonly use it in the limited sense, as relating merely to time or the length of a syllable, but applies it to the height and spirit too : the whole quantity including all three. However, when I shall have occasion in the fol- lowing pages to use the word quantity, I would have it understood in the popular sense, as referring to time only. In regard to the nature of spirit, that, which Scaliger means by the afflatio in latitudine, constitutes what we commonly call emphasis ; a mode of sound requiring a greater profusion of breath, giving either an aspira- tion to a single letter, or marking with peculiar earnest- ness some particular sentence in a discourse, or some single word in a sentence; which yet is very distinct from accent and quantity, though occasionally joined, with them. This may appear by attending to the follow- ing case : two men with different voices, or with dif- ferent exertions of nearly the same voice, may pronounce the words of the same sentence with the same accent and quantity, observing the like proportion in the elevation and prolongation of the same syllables, and yet use a different spirit, the one speaking with emphasis, the * Decausis ling. Lai. lib. ii. cap. 52. syllabara, — qui tripartite dividitur acu- This is Piiscian's doctrine, " Vox to, gravi, circumtlexo. Accentus nam- (says he) dum tangit auuilum, tripar- que acutus ideo insertus est, quod acnat tite dividitur, scilicet altitudine, latitu- sive elevet syllabam ; gravis ideo, quod dine, longitudine: habet quideui litera deprimat aut deponat: circutnllexuseoj altitudinem in tempore." And then he quod deprimat atque aeuat." Priscian, proceeds, " Accentus est certa lex et apud Putschium, p. 1286." rcgula ad elevandaui et depriineiitiain ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 11 other without it. An instance of two persons blowing the same notes on a flute, the one with more, the other with less breath, will perhaps set this distinction in a clearer light. The part of Scaliger's book De Causis, which I have here made use of, was considered by the author himself as a part of his writings, that he had laboured with great subtlety, and finished with particular accuracy. For thus he speaks of it in a subsequent work. " Alter est soni potius modus, de quo in libris de Causis acu- tissime disputatum est. Accentum dixerunt veteres soni moderationem in tollenda premendaque voce." # If however this threefold division of Scaliger should be considered by some persons, as founded rather in the refining imagination of that great modern, than in fact and the nature of things, which may induce them not to admit it on his authority ; it may perhaps have greater weight, when it is shewn to be the very same which Aristotle gives in the 20th chapter of his Poetics where he is treating of the powers and letters of speech. TavTa ce diatyepei aviiuarri re Tu>y CTvaaroc, Kal tuttolq [perhaps it should be read tvttoic] rat cWurjjri Kal \^i\6rr]rt, Kal p'/icei Kal ppa-^vTTjri, 'in ce Kal o^vttjtl rat (3apvrr)Tt rat tS /Jecry. *j- " Ha3C vero differunt formationibus oris, et locis (vel formis et characteribus) densitate aspirationis et tenuitate; longitudine et brevitate ; insuper etiam acumine et gra- vitate, et medio, i. e. inflexione, quae accentum circum- flexum format." We may now then call this Aristotle's division, as well as Scaliger's. As there are accents naturally on particular syllables of single words, which must be rightly placed to make * Poet. lib. iv. c. &7. but a tone between them, i. e. the com- t By /xirtv bere.Thcod. Gonlstonus, mon pitch of voice: and then Ba-^i, whose interpretation I cite, understands must be somewhat below that. But as the circumflex : so does Dacier : and Bafv is itself most commonly supposed I believe too, Castelvetro, who translates to belong to the common pitch as well it by ripiegato, which signifies among as to any depression below it, Ms kol juoKpa fiaKpag. Certain I am, that in English the quantity of the first syllable of folly though long, is yet not so long, as the first in dowry. So the first syl- lable of tollit among the Romans was probably not so long, in proportion to its second, as the first of odit. The principles, on which I suppose the o to be shorter in tollit than odit, may explain what Ammo- niusf says of the quantity of a in the second syllable of Karay/jLa, being long when the word is used in one sense, and short in another: and what J Mceris Atticista ob- serves on the Attics pronouncing the second a of ayo- paZu) long, implying that the common Greeks used it short: and in the same manner, what§ Draco Stratoni- ceus says of dissyllable barytone verbs in a£w having the a short, as in araZ,(o, atyaZo), /3a£w, and polysyllables in like manner, except they have t subjoined, as fxardi^w, o-^aSot%w. In these cases, where the a is said to be * There is to this purpose a passage Longum intelligunt, quod babet duo in the Scholia on Hephaestion. 'io-rioy tempora, neque quicquam ultra respi- 5s, ?ti aXXai? XapQhovo-i re* Xpo'vov oi ciunt. Rhythmici vero dicunt aliud Mirpixoi riyovv oi r?a[A[Aa.TMot, xai aXXauj alio esse longius, aiuntque banc quidem oi Pv9[amU* o! rga,cc/>iaTixot Ixe"vov pa- syllabam habere duo tempora cum di- gov x?^ vov fewWBHj t3v Ip^ovra 5-o p^go- midio, illam tria, istam plura." He- twti xai ov xaraylvorrai i\q [Ati^ov phasstion himself distinguishes between Ti" oi $e PuBfjuxol "Kiytiuvi to'vSe &vai a letter ftaxpov, and /j,n>cv]iofj.evov. /LtttK^o'TEjov ToZh, a$ y^mm, tr,\ 5e % 'Ayopa^Eiy, Ixtei'vovte; toQ a, oi 'At- t^imv, rw $e ttXeio'vot/. p. 73. edit. Pauw. tixoi. " Sciendum, quod aliter accipiuntTem- § Iu the note of J.Pierson on the pre- pus Metrici vel Gramraalici, aliter cediug word in Moeri J, p. 70, Rhythmici. Grammatici illud Tempus 18 ESSAY ON short, the syllable we know is long : but being long only by the position of a short letter before two consonants, it is shorter than one long by its own nature. This may serve likewise to account for what Cicero mentions in regard to the different length of certain letters, which we now call long, and see used as such in the best Ro- man poets. In his* Orator he says, that the first letter of inclytus is short, the first of insanus and infelix long : he does not say the first syllable of inclytus is short, but the first letter: the. letter may be short, though the syl- lable be long by the position of the short vowel : as it is in inclytus, which hath its first syllable used long in the Roman verse. But yet it sounded not so long as in the two latter words. So Maximus Victorinus says that the prepositions in and con are sometimes short : but followed by s and / are long, as instare, mfidus : in all other cases are short, as inconstans, imprudens. Which observation of Victorinus well agrees with Cicero's in- stances above, and with whatf Gellius likewise cites from Cicero. The same Gellius in another:}; place says, that in the frequentative verbs tsito and unctito the first vowel was pronounced long, but in dictito the first short : that the first of actito should be pronounced long, though some learned men in his time expressed it short. In an- other § chapter he inquires, whether in quiesco the e should be pronounced long or short. Of the same nature is what he || says on the vowels of sub, ob, and con, being short in compound even before words beginning with a consonant. Donatus on the^f Andria of Terence, " fili- um perduxere ut una esset," says, " si producta legatur esset, significat cibum caperet, sive ederit." And on the** Eunuch " ut de symbolis essemus," he observes, " melius essemus producta e litera." The true power of * " Inclytus dicimus brevi prima li- t A. Gell. lib. ii. cap. 17. tera, insanus producta : inhumanus bre- X Lib. ix. cap. 6. vi, infelix longa : et ne multis, quibus $ Lib. vi. c. 15. in verbis eae prima? litera? sunt, qua? in || Lib. iv. c. 17. sapiente atque felice, producle dicitur; 11 Act. i. sc. 1. in caeteris omnibus breviter." Oral. 48. ** Act. iii. sc. 4. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 19 this long e Cratinus and Varro said might be perceived in the* bleating of sheep, f Charisius says, " Plinius os oris producta efferendura censuit, os ossis correpta." Corinthius in his treatise on the Greek dialects, speak- ing of the iEolians, says they are fond of shortening syl- lables, and accordingly change Qdpu) into 9ippw' vt yap 6i(TH paicpa iXarTwv tori tijq (j>vau paKpag, E7rd kcu to a to v06yyov. We ought not to forget, that of the three Greek du- * E longum, cujus sonus in ovium balalu senlilur, \it Cratinus et Varro tradiderunt. Cavin. Hellen. p. 26. And after them Eustatliius upon the 499th v. of Iliad. I. remarks that the WOrd /3X<3vj/, EtTTlV T?C JtXEvf-uS^aj v^ps fxif^rmnxi; xara tou? iraXmovq' @h, i"/} 1 f/.i[xr,a-iv irgoQaTtev to the Attic alphabet, and as c and tj did in e, before the additional character 17. And indeed Quinctilian says, that these two powers had been formerly expressed in his own language by two characters; for that, before Accius's time, and even after it, the ancients used to write their long syllables with two vowels : " usque ad Accium, et ultra, porrcctas syllabas geminis vocalibus scripserunt." — Lib. I. 7. What we now write cogo was then coago, cdgito, cougito, captiv'i captivei, libo leibo from \rffio), dlco deico from Sh'koj, which certainly sounded differently from dlca of &kt) : so the preterits with the temporal augment emi eemi, ?gi aegi, tdi eedi. Instances of this kind may be seen in every line of the Leges Re- giae et Xvirales, collected by Lipsius.J The Greeks seem not ever to have used two short vowels in like * Sextus Empiricus therefore, with Meiele hominum, duo Meillia, item good reason, (though Dr. G. thinks huic utroque opus meii.es, otherwise, p. 28.) concludes, that there Meilitiam, tenues I. Pilam qua lu- are ten Greek vowels. — Adv. Gram. dimus, Pilum I. 5. §. 112. Quo pinso, tenues I. plura haec feceris, t The reader may see some very Peila sound and ingenious criticism, ground- Quae jacimus, addes E, Peila, ut ple- ed on the different powers of Homer's nins fiat." o (which indeed were three, of o, m, and The ei instead of the long i we find eu) in Dr. Taylor's Elements of Civil several times in every page of Varro, Law, p. 553. 4. 5. See also p. 561. as published by Jos. Scaliger. The ei on the Roman vowels. On the Greek was likewise used in many plurals of vowels, see likewise his Commentary nouns, where we now have the long e: on Marmor Sandvicense, p. 7, 8, 9. our omnes was omneis : in the Augustan X They are given also by Sylburgius age it was omnis. Not that the two at the end of his first vol. of Dionys. vowels in these places were then quite Halic. Scaurus (de Orthograph. p. out of use: for inscriptions even of that 2255.) cites some lines of Lucillius on aera give us Civiisus Seuvateis. The this subject. " Item quod Lucillius, final us of the genitive singular, nomi- ubi I exile est, per se jubet scribi, at ubi native, and accusative plural of the plenum est, pruponendum esse E credit, fourth declension, is a contraction from hisversibus: uis, ues ; manuis, tnanues, manus. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 21 manner for a long one : but one character served both purposes. 'Ou yap 7j lypwfitQa, aXXa. £ to iraXaibv, says Plato in his Cratylus: and again, to yap o avrl tov at !xpwjU£0a.* We say now that i or u is doubtful : and so it is to us, on account of our ignorance of the ancient pronunciation : but in that there was no ambiguity ; the two powers long, and short, of i or u, were then as easily discernible as a and o are now. In general as the pow- ers of all the letters existed in the human voice before the invention and formation of the letters themselves, so there are many distinct sounds and powers at present, that have no different character yet assigned them. + And the long t of the fourth conjugation is, I believe, a contraction of the like kind. Audi-ts from Audi-o is like Legis from Leg-o : from Audi-ts, Audit, And so perhaps docc-o, doci-is, doccs. Scaliger with good reason supposes, that the loug i in the penultima of illius, unius, alius, " quasi dipthongus Gra?ca re- mansit, ac longa fuit,i£/eius Secundus hie casus possessivus dictns est : possessivorum autem rnulta sic in- venias, Petreius, Luceius, Locutuleius, a petra, luce, locutione Ergo vir doctissimus Terentianus non fuit veritus producere in alterius, quum tamen caeteri corriperent." De Caus. Ling. Lot. c. 43. The verse of Teren- tianus, to which Scaliger here refers, is the following Trochaic, tetrameter catalectic ; Sescupla vel una vincet alterius singu~ lum. Putsch, p. 2412. * This double use of the same cha- racter is taken notice of by the Scho- liast on the Phoenissas of Euripides, v. 668. In that passage he understands the words trol ixytvoi not in the nomina- tive plural, but dative singular, saying " it may be written a-S viv Ixyova x-nVav, not as it is now a-ol sxyom • The occasion of the mis- take was this. Before the addition of long vowels, when Euclides was Ar- chon of Athens, they used short ones instead of long, i instead of n, and 6 in- stead of a. AiijUa) was then written with the i added thus aIjUoj. Those therefore, who did not think of turning here the o into the d have confounded the meaning of the verse." It was in the Arconship of Euclides that these long letters, (after having been invent- ed by Simonides, from him received into common use among the Ionians about 50 years before Christ, and set- tled afterwards in the alphabet by Cal- listratus the Samian) were admitted into public writings and inscriptions by the Athenians. See Suidas in iijUajvi'Jij; : in 'ATTixiflYAo'f : and in lay.'icov l SS/t*of. This magistracy of Euclides is there- fore a remarkable era in literature, and gave occasion to that expression, t>?j pET Elxteifav r^a|UjUctTw«f . Euripides lived before Euclides : Plato twenty years after him. Callislratus was the person, who settled the Greek alphabet in the form wherein we now have it. — See Valcken. ad Phatniss. p. 260. 668. t " Quibusdain Uteris deficimus, quas tamen sonus enunciationis arces- sil." — Velius Long, apud Putschium.p. 2219. As the ancient alphabets, like 22 ESSAY ON In regard to the Romans, what is said above will be more clearly seen in Latin words, which are either de- rived from the Greek, or from which Greek ones were afterwards derived : as in venter (from ivrepa with the initial tEoHc digamma) the first syllable, though long, was shorter on account of the short e, than the first of Census, Festus, (in Greek KijvaoQ, (j)r}(TTog) where not only the syllable, but the vowel too was long. In general, the difference between the long and longer time is this : in the former case the vowel derives its length from being joined close in articulation with the following consonant, as in fal-lit: in the latter case, the vowel commonly stands alone disjoined from the next consonant, as in falle-bat. Thus in English the first syl- lable of mt-tre is longer than the first of bet-ter. The longest time of all is when the long vowel comes before two consonants, as in <&r\iv in this line, being an uncommon word, should be altered to iv x w P*c rov a, $ia to fxkoov, because if aiv is placed there, it will lengthen the final voAvel of the preceding word icn'ivea aiv. The reader cannot but take notice that the obser- vation of Terentianus and Victorinus on the power of s, retro vires ac tempus sufficientis, is very conformable with what Cicero says above on the short syllable in being long before s, though short before some other conso- nants. * Jac. Ceporinus allows this in the Greek metre. But he is mistaken in denying that the same takes place in the Latin. He takes notice very properly of one thing on the subject of metre, which is often overlooked, that [iv, KT y 7rr, in regard to the preceding vowel, are each of them considered as a mute and liquid in conjunction ; f AlyvwTiovg Odys. S. 83. 'HAticrpuwvjje Hcs. Scut. Here. v. 16. 35. Ttfivu Iliad. N. v. 707. Thus verbs beginning with those two consonants repeat the former of them in the reduplication of the preterit tense ; which syllable of reduplication with the consonant is in general short, but without the consonant the additional £ is long, as in the first of e&jko. When we see so very frequently Greek vowels made short before two consonants, (of which a hundred % in- stances might be given) and on the other hand, made long before other vowels, as in aXylov, Sa/cpwe and num- berless other words ; why should we be surprised at finding the same in our own language, as in really, cru- elty, &c ? There is indeed no good reason in the nature of our sound, why the voice should not dwell long on a single vowel, and in a short time hurry over more than one consonant. But arguments of general reason, in a case relating to speech, I do not so much regard, as * Si sequens dictio substriiul binas vel t See a remark of Herodian, pub- duplices consonantes, pracedentis dictio- lisbed from a MS. lately by Mr. Valc- nis vocalemjinalem brevem Gratis sufful- kenaer on Pboenis. v. 1508. ciunt. Cum tumen apud Latinos biiuz % See Mr. Heath's uotes on /Escli. consonantes dictionis postertz principales Agam. v. 120. Sopb. Elect. 122. 128. nihil juvent positu vocalem brevem nude Eurip. Hec. 683. and Mr. Dawes, p. finalem dictionis prioris. in Hesiod. de- 196, claratiuncula. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 25 fact. And fact, I am sure, allows of what is said above. The first syllable of the word strength-en, where the vowel appears to the sight to be clogged with six con- sonants and an aspirate, hath as quick and easy a pro- nunciation, as the first syllable of oo-zy, where two vow- els stand alone. This brings me again to the consideration of English quantity : in regard to which, it will be said, that those syllables, which I call long, receive a peculiar stress of voice from their acute accent, as in really, cruelty. I al- low it ; and by that means they are elevated : but they are lengthened too. The case is, we English cannot rea- dily elevate a syllable without lengthening it, by which our acute accent and long quantity generally coincide, and fall together on the * same syllable. If we pronounce the word majesty, we utter the first syllable with an acute higher tone and long, the two last with a grave lower sound and short, majesty. Here, because the same syllable is pronounced with a higher note, i. e. acuted, and with a protracted one, i. e. lengthened at the same time ; we are apt not to distinguish between these two different modes of the same syllable, between its accent and quantity. But let one brought up in Scotland, pronounce this word, and we may soon mark the difference between them; by his pronouncing the first syllable long with an acute : as, majesty . But the coincidence of the acute and long quantity on the same syllable is certainly most f usual with us in the pronunciation of our own language, (which will be admitted by any one, who with this view attends to the sound of an English voice.) And this has probably been the occasion, that accent and quantity have been con- * This is confirmed by the decisive acting together, authority of Mr. Saml. Johnson, whose ,t I say most usual, not universal, very great abilities and extensive eru- The accent is on a short syllable in dition have done an honour to bis age privy, though on a long one in private. and country. He, in the rules of his On the other hand, though the acuted prosody prefixed to his dictionary, syllable is generally long, yet every considers the acute tone and long quan- long one is not acuted. tity, in English verse, as equivalent by 26 ESSAY ON founded together by numberless persons, not only in dis- course, but in writing on this subject ; and quantity been frequently considered, as excluded from our language. There are several propositions of the following kind in many parts of Dr. G.'s treatise, which, with all my at- tention, it is not in my power to comprehend. A man, (says he) of a phlegmatic temper will love long syllables, and will be pleased with the majesty of quantity and ac cent. If the use of accent and quantity be a sign of phlegm and solemnity, every nation of the earth, from the creation down to the present times, must come within this description; and the Hottentots, Iroquois, and Sa- mceids, are as majestic and solemn in their manner of speech, as the fiapwTiKoi ^Eolians. For all these barba- rous people have, I make not the least doubt, a voice with at lea st two tones, and those varied in length ; and if they have, they must have accent and quantity the same in quality though not degree with Cicero and Demos- thenes. Again, he says, that the great disproportion be- tween long and short syllables in the northern languages made it impossible to think of establishing quantity, &c. He here writes as if language and its pronunciation were established, like civil institutions, by public laws and decrees. Pronunciation is originally established in all places accidentally by the ear, to which the organs of speech, without men's thought or attention, modulate and adapt their sounds. We are apt indeed to say, that the authority of such or such an ancient writer estab- lishes the quantity of such a word : and so it does to us, who cannot perhaps go further back for it. But this au- thority did not really settle it at the time he wrote : the actual pronunciation of his countrymen had before determined it and familiarized it to the writer's ear; from whence he adopted it ; and accordingly used the syllable with that measure of sound, which he found as- signed to it in common speech. If, when Virgil used the first syllable of bonus short, his countrymen at the same time had lengthened the sound of it, he would not only have not succeeded in establishing his own quantity, ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 27 but by refusing to conform to the public ear in this and the like instances, would have raised a disgust against his writings, which must probably have stifled them in their birth, For, as Scaliger well observes, " Quis nes- cit a pueris sermonem ortum, sui usum agrestibus prae- buisse ? quern ad eum modum acceptum, in alias distor- quere leges, etiam sapientibus religio fuit. Quare his ita positis ad pedum naturam et genera accedendum est.*" Quantity therefore depends on nothing but the common actual pronunciation; not on the authority of a writer, not on rules : for it is antecedent to them. " Ante enim carmen ortum est, quam observatio carminis.f" It may be indeed afterwards, as it has been, reduced to rules ; but those rules again relate not to the general pronun- ciation of all languages. Many of these may have a different manner of their own, on which difference par- ticular rules may be formed for them, as particular ones had been formed for others. This is the state of the case between the quantity of ancient and modern languages, and the rules respecting it ; which rules must always be considered as following, not prescribing the pronuncia- tion of any language. For, after all, let the rule be ever so rational, the practice, which is conformable to it, is not right on account of the rule, but the rule is right on account of its conformity to the preceding practice. But scholars often talk of speech, as if it were formed by scholars ; whereas it was formed in every country long before scholars remarked it. And when they do make their remarks on it, they must take it as they find it. The question always in this case is, not what could or should be, but what is. And thus in regard to quantity ; when a German can % precipitate his voice over four or * Scalig. de pedum gener. in poet. brevia producunt, ul debauch^, imple. lib. ii. Germani, Belga, Angli dipfhongos et t Quinct. lib. ix. c. 4. positiones etiam difficiles subinde ne- t This Henninius complains of, not gligunt : v. gr. immerdoer, overdracht, only as perverting quantity, but as de- Kettinghen ; Hamilton, Canterbury." stroying the very nature and essence *EXA»jv. '0^9. p. 87. j. cxi. of it. " Galli longu subinde corripiunt, 28 ESSAY ON five consonants without lengthening the sound of the preceding vowel, where a Greek or Roman voice would be retarded by only two ; it is absurd to say, this Ger- man has not a natural quantity. It is natural, formed as much by the nature of his organs and senses, as that of the Greeks and Romans by theirs. But many men call that only natural and rational, * which is agreeable to their own nature and partial way of thinking. Thus an African thinks a white complexion unnatural, and millions of Europeans think a black one so : whereas both are natural, in a limited peculiar sense. A thing may be natural without being universal. A Chinese or Muscovite has the same right to call his particular pro- nunciation a natural one, as Dr. G. has to call the Greek and Roman by that name. When therefore he says that " natural quantity" is excluded from the northern lan- guages, he can mean only a particular kind of quantity reducible to his own Greek and Latin rules of it. But every language doth, beyond all doubt, establish a dif- ference between syllables, making some long and others short, and consequently hath a natural quantity, which is one source of whatever harmony it hath. I will not deny, that where there is a greater number of vowels in a language, there will be more harmony. Homer's iitXioio, or Herodotus's Iwiirlou, where out of seven letters there are five syllables and six vowels, is certainly infinitely superior in sweetness to Chrultznitz, where in a greater number of letters there are but two vowels and two syllables. But yet there is quantity in Chrultznitz : there may be quantity with little harmony, and indeed with scarcely any at all : for mere quantity, consisting in general of only two measures, hath not in itself sufficient variety to be the foundation of much harmony, as will be fully shewn in another place. * Thus Henninius calls tbatpronun- languages, the Arabic, Latin, and old ation alone rational, which is directed Greek upon his plan. The pronnncia- by a regard lo the peniiHinia. This lion of all other languages, particularly takes in, according to hiin, only three the modern, is irrational. See p. 87. 88. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 29 CHAP. III. The metre of the English language. The kinds of it. Why no hexameters. Mere metre not sufficient to constitute good verse. In what the pronunciation of the English, Scotch, Welch, and Irish, differs. IF then quantity is not excluded from our language, and the English, as well as Greek and Latin, metre is regulated by it; a question may arise, why cannot our language be adapted to the old heroic measure, consist- ing of dactyls and spondees, as it is shewn by Dr. Bentley to admit the iambic, trochaic, and some others. Our common epic verse consisting of five feet, is trimeter iambic brachycatalectic : v An holiest man's \ the noblest ivdrk | of God. Suls et Ip- | sa Roma vl- J rlbus. '&2g wfyeXov \ irapoiOev lie- | \itthv. And so far the common English iambic is in the qua- lity of its feet, though not in number, like that of the Greeks and Romans, admitting likewise, as they do, dactyls, spondees, anapcests, and tribrachs. The dactyl is not very common, but may be found in every place of the verse, except the fifth : the rapidity of it on particu- lar occasions in the second place, where it is unusual, has great force, especially when joined with other quick feet, the trochee or Pyrrhic : as in these, Shoots in- | visible \ virtue | e'en to the deep. With im | petuous | recoil, and jarring sound. The anapast is common in every place, and it would appear much oftencr, with propriety and grace, if abbre- 30 ESSAY ON viations were more avoided. The tribrach too is often seen, as in Yet beauty, tho' injurious, hath strange power. But there is one particularity in our iambic, in which it differs very much from that of the ancients. They, it is well known, never admitted a trochee into their iam- bics ; according to them 6 Tpoyaioc avrnraQu no 'Ia/u^y. But in the English, a trochee placed at the beginning of an iambic verse gives it a peculiar beauty and vigour, as in this : Die of | a rose in aromatic pain. This pleasing effect of the trochee Mr. Pope, beyond all other English poets, seems to have felt, and has ac- cordingly used it oftener than any of them. He has like- wise introduced it on particular occasions with great success, in the middle, as well as the beginning of his verse, and even at the end of a sentence : On all sides round the forest hurls her oaks Headlong. In general, that nervous springiness (if I may so ex- press it) so very observable in Mr. Pope's metre, is often owing chiefly to a trochee beginning his line. And the weakest lines among his, in point of versification, are those which begin with a pure iambic. The trochee is admitted in every place of our verse, except the last. It is sometimes followed by an iambic, and so forms the choriambic, as in the foregoing, die of a rose: sometimes by a spondee, and so forms the second epitrite, as Lives through all life, extends through all extent. It must be so : Cato, thou reason's t well. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 31 The second epitrite, and clioriambic, appear, both in this: Boiv'd their stiff necks j louden with stormy blasts. The clioriambic in the first and second places, or third and fourth, is better than in the second and third, or fourth and fifth ; as in Wliere were ye, nymplis \ wlien the remorseless deep — it is more harmonious, than in this, In their triple degrees, regions to which — Fierce rain with lightning mixt, ivater with fire. The pyrrhic too is as frequently admitted into our verse, as the trochee, and very greatly contributes to the variety of the modulation. It is chiefly excluded from the last place in rhymed verses, by the mere force of the rhime : it is however sometimes admitted there, and in blank verse very often, especially in dramatic poetry, where it gives a more natural air and kind of ease to the dialogue : In the calm lights of mild Philosophy. It is sometimes followed by a spondee, and so forms the minor ionic, as here, Eternity, thou pleasing, dreadful thought. Each praifr accepted, and each wish resign d Sometimes it is followed by an iambic, and so forms the fourth pceon: As full as perfect in a hair, as heart. J del, who with inhospitable guile. 32 ESSAY ON Though the measure formed by the pyrrhic and spon- dee, is very agreeable to an English ear, and probably was so to an Ionian, yet to a Roman it seems to have been not so pleasing, if we may judge in this case from the omission of Horace, who among the Latin writers is distinguished by the name of numerosus, and has left but one instance of this* Ionic measure, of which he seems to have been soon tired, Miserarum est | neque anion \ dart, ludum. Though he hardly gave it a fair trial, as he used it unmixed. I wish we had the whole of that ode of Sap- pho, which began with one of these verses : Tt jue IlavSt- | ov\q wpa- \ va Y/AtSwv. This Ionic movement we have in some of our songs. The admission of so many different measures into our common verse, gives it a variety (which in all modula- tion is of the greatest consequence, and in Milton most remarkable) not to be exceeded, if equalled, in any of the ancient kinds of metre, at least not in their epic and dramatic. That, which makes our verse fall short of the excellence of the ancient, is the want of that dignity and solemnity, which distinguishes their heroic measure. The compass of our long heroic verse is but narrow. A Latin or Greek epic line does, in the language of prosody, consist of twenty four times. A Latin or * Tereutianus Maurus has taken notice of this, in two Ionic lines : Simili le- \ gc sonantes | numeros ad | Nenbnlen Dedit uno ] modulatus | lepide car- j mine Flaccus. Hephnestion mentions an ode of Ale- Ionic from the two Phrynichi, the tra- man, and one of Sappho in this metre, gic and comic poets. Pag. 39. edit, and gives a verse from eacli ; as like- Pauw. Dr. Benfley says in primis wise from Alcaeus, who is said hy him dulce est metrum (not. ad Hor. cann. to have written several odes in the lib. iii. 12.) and thinks the difficulty of same measure. He cites also some it alone prevented Horace from making trctrametercatalectic lines of the minor a second attempt. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 33 Greek iambic, if pure, of eighteen times. But the long English heroic, if it consists of pure iambics, has but fifteen times. So that it is, for this reason among others, difficult for an English poet to translate any number of Latin or Greek iambics or hexameters into a like number of English epic lines. But to resume our question. If the English admits the iambic, why not the dactylic and spondeic metre ? The reason seems to be this : there are not many dactyls in our language, and hardly any spondees, I mean, scarce ever two syllables, next to each other in the same word, both long alike, as they frequently are in Greek and Latin. In general our language is iambic and trochaic, our dissyllable nouns being for the most part trochaic, and our verbs iambic, as in the NOUNS. VERBS. frequent frequent converse converse concert concert process proceed premise premise refuse refuse, or refund produce produce present present object object project project absent absent contest contest conduct conduct descant descant. Some polysyllables are indeed dactylic : but in most words of more than two syllables, the long syllable is so placed, as to make the word, when divided, resolve itself into an iambic or: trochaic foot, as reft- \ ner, or re- | fintr. Thus for the most part the long and short syllables of our language are alternate. And accord- D 34 ESSAY ON ingly in many words derived from Latin, those letters Which form two short syllables together in their original tongue, in English form but one, by which the long and short times succeed each other alternately. This is seen particularly in substantives ending in ion, as nation, mention, which sound and are scanned in metre thus, nienshon, nashon, where our last short syllable makes two in Latin, mentio, nafio. This tendency of our lan- guage to iambic and trochaic measure hath insensibly made it run so much into verses of that kind, and ren- dered it incapable of bending to the ancient heroic me- tre ; which Avas the reason of Sir Philip Sydney's mis- carriage in attempting to introduce English hexameters on the Greek and Latin plan, And Sydney 's verse halts ill on Roman feet. This is confirmed by Dr. Bentley, who speaks of the metra dactylica in relation to our own language, as a kind, quod patria lingua non recipit. By this means our language is deprived of that kind of metre, which is of all others the most noble and solemn, according to what Longinus truly says of the dactylic measures, *£uy£VH7TciTot ovtoi Ktu fieyeOoTroiol: and Aristotle likewise, •f 6 fj.lv fipqoQ ae/avbg, ku\ ov Xzktikoq : whereas the iambic more nearly approaches to common discourse, 6 Si tap- pog avri] \ariv i) \££,ig twv 7roX\{ov' dio fiaXicTTa ttuvtiov tCov julrpwv lafifiua fyOiyyovTCii \iyovreg*. But in whatever metre the long and short syllables are alternate, to that our language is easily adapted : as to this, where the amphibrachys is used, With honour \ and glory \ through trouble \ and danger * Nobilissimi hi sunt, et ad sublimi- $ Iambus est ipsa dirtio vulgi. quare tatem facientes. Sect. 39. Aristides maxime cmnium metrorum Iamhica effe- Qninlilianus accounts for this, de Mu- mint vulgo hquevtes. Rhet. iii. 8. See sic. lib. i. p. 51. also Poet. c. 4. t Pes Herons snlomis, nee sermoni tiptuS. ACCENT ANI5 Qt ANTITY. 35 or where the cretic, O the sweet \ country life | blest with health \ peace and (ease. (As this foot is called the fescenninc, it probably was chietly used in the old poetic ribaldry, that has the same name.) But to none more happily than the trochaic, to express alacrity, and exultation : Vital J spark of j heav'nli/ \ flame: Quit, uh quit this mortal frame : HarJc ! they ivhisper ; Angels say, Sister spirit, come away. So Milton in describing his rustic jollity, When the \ merry \ bells ring \ round, And the jocund rebecks sound, To many a youth and many a maid Dancing In the chequer' d shade. There is indeed no kind or degree of harmony, of which our language is capable, which may not be found in numberless instances through Milton's writings : the excellency of whose ear seems to have been equal to that of his imagination and learning. Notwithstanding the confidence, with which it is often affirmed, that English metre depends on accent and not on quantity, which I have endeavoured to refute ; and though I have allowed that accent jointly with quantity doth direct it ; yet I cannot help thinking, that the es- sence of it is founded in quantity alone. And to this I am induced by the following fact : let a Scotchman take some verses of any of our poets, as these, All human things are subject to decay, And when fate summons, monarchs must obey. He will pronounce them with the accent transposed thus, d2 36 ESSAY ON All human things are subject to decay, And when Fate summons, mondrchs must obey. Now, though he alters the tones, and transfers the acute from the beginning to the end of words, yet in this pronunciation the metre still essentially subsists,because founded in quantity, which is not violated by him. Did the metre depend on accent, it would be necessarily disturbed and destroyed by his transposition of that accent. Metre depends on quantity alone. Rhythm is in its nature more complex, and seems to comprehend accent with quantity. The difference between mere metre, and rhythm, considered in this light, will be readily seen by any one upon reading the two following lines : Tali | cbncidil J impiger \ ictus ] vulnere j Cdesar H6c ic- | tus ceci- | dit vio- \ lento \ vulnere \ Cdesar. The metre here in both is the same, accurate and good : but the rhythm, by which I mean the result of the whole, is different, being in the former verse very bad : because, though the times in each foot of it are right, the tones, in regard to the modulation of the whole, are wrong and placed improperly. " Neque vero tarn sunt intuendi pedes, quam universa comprehensio."* Scali- gerf, I know, accounts for the bad rhythm of such verses as the preceding (where single words complete single feet, and both are closed together) by saying, that the words in scanning should run into each other, as stones and pieces of timber do in buildings, where the joints are carefully diversified. But this is only a rhetorical illustration of the fact (i. e. the ccesura) in Greek and Roman verse, not an explanation of the cause in gene- ral. If this principle of his operated universally, it would in our language, and the following verse would accordingly be faulty in rhythm, * Quinct. ix, 4. t Puttie. II. J. tt iv. 49. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 37 Heroes, repel attacks, command success. Here the single feet are each separately complete in single words, as in the Latin line above : and yet in this English verse there is no want of poetical rhythm and harmony. The case seems to be this : since with us the long times and acute tones coincide, if these times are right, the tones cannot be wrong ; and therefore what- ever makes true metre, will always make tolerable rhythm. But in another language, where the long quan- tity and accent are frequently separate, the times and metre may be perfectly right, and yet, by a particular position of the tones, the rhythm may be very defective. This thing however is of a subtile nature, and admits perhaps of a different and better explanation. I can at present see no other reason, except that assigned above, why the Latin and Greek verse should require the* ccesura anymore than the English. We may be assured, that the harmony of ancient verse was somehow affected by accent, even if the ccesura was not at all connected with it, because Quinctilian says, (lib. xii. c. 10.) that the difference between the Greek and Latin accent occa- sioned the difference in point of sweetness between the * On the application of the ccesura therefore perhaps no caesura. Athe- iu ancient metre, see Beda de metr. ra- nasus mentions a poem of Castorion tion. p. 2368. Dr. Bentley, de metr. Solensis, as a very particular one, Terent. p. 2. et seq. and more fully Mr. wherein the single feet were completed D'orville, Crit. Van. p. 323. et seq. in single words. To Je Kao-ro^iajvof tou The only kind of verse, wherein it was 2o\sa>f, ij o KXsa^o;

iTiKovt; e^ei tov; being either extended to agrert length, -bjcJoj tovtojv $e eWo-toj tZm iroSSiv, or cut short after any foot ; it had not ij a; t? Ta£si 8?;, to airo ^etjOv a.7ro- auy one foot written with a regard to Swsi. Castorion Solensis, at Cleurchus another, (except in the quantity of its elicit, in Panu hujusmodipoema condidit. final syllable,) but each was independ- Singuli pedes iniegris vocabutis compre- ent of the other, being detached and hensi, et antecedentes et stquentes omnes complete in itself: and thus there was pedes similes habent Horumpe- uorhythrnofaiy/ej/est'fQffeet.asinoiber dum quisque, quocunque modo iispona- measures required or observed, and ti r, idem metrum reddet. lib. x. p. 455. 'H? ESSAY ON Greek and Roman verse, and gave so great a superiority to the former. There are many accounts of the poetical 'VvOuqq or mimerus to be met with among the grammarians, both ancient and modern ; some of which I do not clearly understand. Of those which are intelligible to me, I know not any one more full and satisfactory, than this which Scaliger gives. " Oritur fPufy/oc vel numeru&] ex partium quantitate, qualitate, dispositione. Quan- titas duplex, in corpore et in tempore : corpus appello dictionis extensionem, tempus tractum pronunciationis. Qualitas in tenore etin sono : tenorem intelligo elationein vocis aut depressionem, sonum aeris verberationem qua- lemcunque. Dispositio comprehendit locum, situm, ordinem. Quod ambigua voce dixerunt numerum ve- teres (nobis liceat) canorem appellemus. Est quippe numerus in oratione concentus quidam*." The reader may see this further explained by Scaliger, with great discernment and subtlety, in another passge, wherein he shews, how rhythm comprehends metre, and ought to di- rect it.f Aristotle, with his usual brevity, says the same in his poetics, where having mentioned the difference of letters in oaawrjn teal \pi\oTr)Ti, kcu ju//i«t kcu j3pa\vTr]TL, tri §£ KCU O^VT^Tl KCU j3apUT7}Tt KCU TCO /X£(TW, he ObSCrVCS, that each of these particulars is to be regarded, where metre is concerned, ween &v Kaff 1 ekcmtov wv toiq wcrpticoTc irpocn'}- Kit QshfOUV. In regard to the difference of manner in the pronun- ciation of our own language among those different na- tions which use it, it may be stated thus: The English join the acute and long time together, as in r/berti/. The Scotch observe our quantity, and alter our ac- cent : liberty. When I say they observe our quantity, I mean they pronounce the same syllabic long which we do, but they make it longer. In respect to the cir- cumflex with winch their pronunciation abounds, it may * Puftic. in. 44. t hi. ii. 2. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 39 be remarked that it is not formed, as the Greek, Latin, and English, of an acute and grave, but of a grave and acute, vdvg. ros. round, Engl, round, Scot. The Irish observe our quantity and accent too, but with a greater degree of spirit or emphasis, which Sca- liger calls ajflatio in latitudine, giving to most syllables an aspiration : liberty. The Welch keep our quantity, and alter the accent, with a manner of voice, which Cicero calls aspera, frac- ta, scissa, flexo sono: liberty'. Nor need we wonder, that in the different provinces and kingdoms where our language is used, there should be a variation in the tones, though there be none in the syl- lables themselves, or their quantity. The same exactly was the case of the Greek tongue in different countries. The Asiatic Greeks in using the very same word and quantity with the Attics, pronounced it with a different spirit* and accent: What an Attic called Itpsiig, an iEo- lian did Upevg, what the former did eyw, the latter iytrt. The same general adherence to words and quantity, and particular variation of tone and spirit are certainly ob- servable in the use of our own language now; the man- ner of pronunciation among the Scotch, and Welch, being oxytone, that of the English and Trish barytone; the former carrying the accent forward to the end of * The particular accent oftlie Altics, (torn. II. p. 189) Las turned from Io- dislinguished from that of tlie other nic into Attic Greek, the difference be- Greeks, is shewn at large, from the Iween the two, which is first observa- best grammarians of antiquitj', by H. ble, is the frequent aspiration in Ihe Steph. App.de Dial. Attic, p. 192. latter, not seen in the former. The At- 193. 194. Eustat. 341. 12. 21. Their tics aspirated the middle or final, as particular aspiration is remarked by well as initial syllables, as TaS; nien- Tzetzes on Hesiod. To eXi* 'attixoi tioned by Athenneus (p. 397. Casaub.) Saa-uvovtrr ol Ss Xocaroi Travrsj vf-iXouoi, if Kal to S./xa^a- h Si rian, and ^Egyptian languages. Putsch. Kcm haKtKTog Kal to a/xa^a 4-iXo~, Ka- p. 548. 9. Caninius from Athenaeus and 0s>5 Aa;£if Kal AioXif, Kal tuvig. p. 108. Huslathius takes notice of several mid- See also 1'iersonad Mcerid. p. 179. In die syllables being aspirated, that have the gpeecfc of Xerxes, in the Polyhym- no niaik of it at present, niaof Her'jdetn>, which Dionysitis Hal. 40 ESSAY ON words, and the latter drawing it backwards towards the beginning. In this method of considering pronunciation I have followed Sir John Cheke's direction : whose words on this head are remarkable, declaring, " that the na- ture of ancient pronunciation is not so abstruse, as not to be capable of being explained, and even illustrated in writing : nor by any means so difficult and intricate, as not to lie open and obvious, if a scholar would apply it to his own language : nor yet at the same time so un- serviceable and fruitless, as not to afford him the means of easily discovering and marking out the traces of an- cient eloquence."* The learned and judicious J. Pierson makes the same application of the Greek language to his own. " The Attics," says he,f " uttered several words with a particu- lar accent and spirit, as we are taught by all the gram- marians. And I would not have such observations as these rejected as the imaginary and trifling conceits of teachers. For is not the same variation observable in the use of our own language, in different provinces ?" Aldus % has made a like remark on the Italian. The consequences drawn from the peculiarity of join- ing the acute with a long time, in pronouncing our own language, shall be considered by me afterwards, as they affect our pronunciation of Latin and Greek, and have not, as far as I know, been hitherto observed. * .. ■ 1 Pronunciationis ratio non tam ab- quam magistrorum uugas et mera deli- pita et recondita est, quit) oratione non rameuta a quibusdam explodi. In lin- modo doceri, sed illustrari possit : ne- gua vernacula quis ignorat Zelandos que tam difficilis aut aspera, quin faci- inulta cum spiritu aspero proferre, lem ingressum el facilem viam habeat, quae caeteriBelgasleniler pronunciant?" si quis eruditus earn primo ad Lalinam, Prtef. ad Mxrid. Atticist. p. 34. deinde ad vernaculam linguam transfe- f " Imitamur tamen hanc linguarum rat : neque tain inutilis aut infructuosa, varietatem et copiam lingua vulgari. quin magnum antiquae eloquentiae in ea Non enini eadem est Romanis lingua, et gravilatis vestigium facile cernat." qua; Parthenopa?is, qua; Calabris, quaj Epist. ad Steph. Episc. Vinton, p. 158. Siculis. Aliter Florentiui loquuntur. t " Attici inulta vocabula accentu aliter Genuenses. Veneti a Mediolanen- mutato pioferebaot, et multa a vocnlj sibus lingua et pronunciatione multum iucipientia aspirabant. Nollem beec tan- diflerunt." Pruf. ad Hart. Adon. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 65 CHAP. IV. j. On the accent of the Romans. The agreement of the Latin accent and dialect with the Mulic. Some account of the iEolism of the Roman language. Ho- mer's holism. An argument drawn from thence in favour of our present Greek accentuation. The difference between the Roman apex and accentual mark. THAT the Romans had a regular accent, that is, used a particular elevation and depression of voice on cer- tain syllables, distinct from the prolongation of it, is evident, not only from the nature of things and neces- sity of the human voice, but likewise as a fact, is clear from what will have greater weight with many persons ; I mean, from the fullest and most undoubted authority. Not to trouble the reader with numberless and needless testimonies, I shall insist chiefly on Cicero and Quinc- tilian, who will doubtless be allowed to have been ac- curately acquainted with the niceties of their own lan- guage, which in their writings they had frequently occa- sion to discuss. Cicero in several passages, some of which are cited above, expressly speaks of this thing, as well known and observed by his countrymen. The word accentus was not perhaps known in his time : but I am here speaking of the * thing ; and that certainly •"Quaecunque syllaba, simpliciter in pronunciando paulum inten debatnr f ilia dicebatur acui eiacutum habere accen- tum, cujus nota fuit lineola ab sinistra parte, unde scribimus, sese e;igens. Reliquse syllabae.quae remissius pronun- ciabantur, credebantur habere gravem accentum, quasi in guttur subsidentem, et proinde ejus nota fuit lineola ab si- nistra parte sese demittens. Notis qui- dem istis vetercs non reperiuntur usi, sed tamen snuos ipsos, prout vel inten- debantur, vel remittebantur, istis appel- lationibus dislinxerunt." — Perizonius ad Sanctii Minerv. lib. i. cap. 3. The reader will, I doubt not, be pleased with whatScaliger says on this head. " Gravem appellarunt, ab instru- ments scilicet vocis : propterea quod in guttur aut pectus earn demitteremus. Alteram autem priorem illam ab affec- tn potiiisnominaruutacufum: ferit enim aures, quarum viribus objecta est. . . . . . . Evenit autem ut du£iV yoiacrxiXkaQa evoyara Siaigti, TtL'it;, Jai'j , iwi rov 7ra~c, $&'<;• iSia;? Ji obroi, ccra ma£ nfjCt Sacrvvtrat t) o^urovtirai, J,i\S)s \tyovcri nal Bagurivctic;' Baguromvcri Se ob fx.ovov rx QVoy.ct.ra, aXXa Kal t« ag9ga. to. $£ Jis-DXXa&a, l£uriva>( ira.% hyii heyo/xeva, avrol Ba^vrovaZcn- e9oj Ji e^ciutri xai t« W^OTnyo^iXa. @a.gimv. To. Js a.<&apiy.$ara xara'Kr.yovra e'c e7v, avrol e'j eij {xerafiaWovtri. voily vUic., £0V£t?, JtaXsiv xaXEij- so likewise yt- XttV yi'Kai;, Trsivav TTEivaij, opQovv ogflot?, p^gue-oDv %pvo~otg. Proprium hnjus dia- lecti est oxytonas dictiones invertere. Mo- ncsyllaba nomina dhidit, traic;, Sai'f, ab irais, Sat?. Peculiariter hi, quazcunque apud nos aspirantur vel aciitum in ulti- ma syllaba habent, cum spiritu leni et acceutu in penultima dicunt. Barytona faciunt non solum nomina, sed et articu- los . Dissyllaba, apud nos oiytona, ipsi barytona efferunt. Solent etiam et ap- pellativa gravare. Infinitiva verba in £~v desinentia illi in ei? mutant, vos~v voei?, povE~v (ppo'vEi?, ytXav yi\ais, ofloZv ogScut;. So oxytone participles become bary- tones il^rjuiig ilariKCiiv, vEvoijxa;? VEvewxaiy. These instances of the transposition of the JEolic tones are collected from different parts of Joannes Grammaticus. t Dualibus numeris hi nequaquam ■utebantur, sicut etiam et Romani, coloni ab his deducti. Quincliliau speaks of some persons, who were of opinion that the Roman language had a dual in the third person of verbs ending in re, as scripsere, legere. But this usage of the final re he will cot by any means allow to be a dual, but only applied to soften the pronunciation, evitanda: asperitatis causa, ideoque quod vocant duale, in illo sologenere consistit. Whereas, had there been a dual here in the verbs, there would probably have been one in nouns: as the Greeks had in both. He there- fore concludes, there certainly is no doal in his language. Lib. i. c. 5. 46 ESSAY OH sius himself would admit, is, what Apollonius Dyscolus hath observed in regard to that dialect, as it appears in some fragments of his published by Reitzius. Iv TtS irepl tTis sya> nai &y^y«j says he, AloXug fiapiwg. So again AIoXuq ifxoi $a$km* In another place for i/dug vju&c or vufxeg AloXmv ; and for ri/xilg, AloXug cifi/itg. SO vpiozv for vawv. for * i, oia-f y.i- itiv;' Sia toZto >) t»v ei$ tug ye\iixh iv xal 2£iV, xai to Mtv, r$( Avxmlria>$ per v\a UtXaaywv, O'l 7rorf Kv\\r)vri6ev ly Eustalh. 8. 1. 41. nunc sunt Latmcc, indicio erit Delvhica § In Mo. I. v. 569. and so Athenaeus. tabula antiqui (cris, quo* est hodie in Pa- lib. xii. p. 523. The Greek language latio. in those lower parts of Italy was not t See ChislniU Inscrip. Sig. 24. quite worn out in the time of Augustus. J Pindar, who wrote in the broadest Horace speaks of the people of Canu- Doric, calls his ode Ai'oXhiS* fAohirw. sium as using it mixed with the Ro- Strabo reduces the four dialects to two, man. " Canusini more Bilinguis." Serm. the Ionic and old Attic he calls the I. 10. v. 30. The Gvaca testa of Ho- same, and the Doric and ^Eolic. lib. race (Carm. I. 20. v. 2.) is explained viii. Thus above p. 89. the Dorians b_v Turnebus, Cumana. Advers. xvii. 5. 50 ESSAY ON through many historical discussions, he concludes his first book with saying, that he has proved his point, IXXaSa ttoXiv avrrjv aTroStiKvvfitvog. What Quinctilian hath observed of his own language respecting the ^Eolic, is remarked by other good Latin* grammarians : and indeed was observed long before * Priscian in his first book says, " o transit in e, vt bonus bene, yaw genu, itavt; pes, antiqui compes quasi compos, in quo JEoles sequimur." In another place, " ae ponitur pro a, ut JEsculapius pro 'ac-xXdtho?, in quo Moles sequimur ; Mi enim vvfA.^enq pro wy.ai«-ov vacant. Stmt autem scripta sic An- uo&aFw, AaaKaFmv pro AafaacLv ." Prise, lib. vi. p. 710. The same writer hav- ing mentioned a peculiar deviation in the Roman accent from the general rules, says, " necnon JEoles, contra con- suetudinem mam, idem facer e." It has been asked, why the short u of Numa is in Greek by Plutarch, though not byDio- nysius, turned into av Noi/^S? . This may admit an vEolic solution from Priscian, who speaking of the Roman u says, "modo pro v longa, ut pro y.v<; mus : modo pro correpta, tva^veo. purpura. In pie- risque tamen JEoles secuti hoc facimus. Itli enim Qouyarne dicunt pro BvyaTV?, av corripientes: vel magis v sono u soliti sunt pi-onunciare, ideoque ascribunt o, non ut dipthongum faciant ibi, sed ut sonum v JEolicum ostendant; ut Calli- machus, KaXXfp^ou j^Sovoj oiifiaj davyarvQ. Putsc. p. 554. I have given this pas- sage concerning BavyaTng from Pris- cian, because it throws, I think, some light on the metre of a line in Homer, that is apparently irregular, Odyss. II. 387. Et S' IfMV o'Se ju.tl6o? aav&avE(, aX- Xa |2ouXE5-0e. Where Dr. Clarke says, " nulla ratione excusari potest, that Boo should be short." But if Homer's lan- guage was iEolic as well as Ionic, it is accounted for at once by Priscian's re- mark on Bavyarn^. Thus suus by the old Romaus was written souus : (Syl- burg. on Dionys. Halic. vol. I. p. 784.) So the very learned and accurate Mr. D'orville says " Boeotoruni dialectodi- ci Qovyari^, et tamen corripi syllabam bine suo jure Graeci pos- tumus potuerunt vertere nia-rooy,o; , nee tamen producere syllabam." Crit. Vann. 491. The Boeotian and Doric dialects are known to have been very nearly allied. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 51 even Quinctilian's time, by a man, who certainly under- stood both the Greek and Latin languages very well, who says, " The Romans use a language not quite bar- barous, nor yet purely Grecian, but mixed and com- pounded of both, fc fortv 17 -irXdow AtoXt'e*. But even if the agreement of the JEolic and Roman dialect had not been so expressly mentioned by Diony- sius, Quinctilian, Priscian, and others ; and they had only said in general, that the Latin was of Greek original ; we yet might have been certain, that the JEolic was the mother language, from some other peculiarities in the Roman tongue, beside that of the accent. In the Latin alphabet there are two letters, F and the consonant V, which are not in the Attic, and yet are in the old Pe- lasgic and ^Eolic. That letter V of the Romans (the power of which is the same with that of our W) resem- bles in nature, though not in form, the tiEolic digamma ; which having a soft open sound could not be expressed by the other Greeks; who, when they attempted it, either changed it into a simple aspiration, or sounded it like (j>, and destroyed its true nature. The Roman F was the (j> without the aspirate : and this letter too the common Greeks could not pronounce ; concerning which | Quinctilian mentions a particular fact of Cicero, who, in pleading for Fundanius, laughed at a Greek, who was brought into court as a witness, for not being- able to pronounce the word Fundanius, and using a $ instead of the initial F. The iEolians, we are told by the oldest and best§ grammarians, did in general avoid * Dionys. Halic. Antiq. Roman, lib. Sylb. Again, "AXXoj ju.ev"exx>jve? Sac-u- i. ad finem. voviri t« (pttiwivra. AioXeij Se ov^a/jiZg. t Concerning this letter, see the ibid. ■yiXomxoj oi AioXeij. Eustath. p. postscript to this chapter. 27. 1. 38. Alii quidem Grceci cum as- | Contra Gracci aspirare solent

1£VTtt. AioXeT? 8e (A0V01 TE£0V oWlivETttf 010V, TTOp'pa), appaHTTO^ P^f'? 4iXo~e-[. Apollon. de Synt. p. 44. edit. tsSv AioXix<5v ot yap AioXei? 4'^*>Tai ovte? E % 52 ESSAY ON aspiration, and used in many cases the digamma, where the other Greeks did an aspirate. This is observed by Terentianus Maurus in the following trochaics, Nominum multa inchoata Uteris vocalibus Usus JEolicus reformat et digammon prceficit* He then exemplifies this in particular words. What an Attic called 'EAIvij, they did FtXIvrj ; IWepoc they called FtWfjOoc, from whence the Roman vesperus ; and the same in many other instances. And thus, among the an- cient Latins, they * used Fostia, not Hostia, Fostis, not Hostis : and like the iEolians, according to Quinctilian, to avoid aspiration, hordeum they called fordeum. In regard to the letter H, he says in general, " parcissime ea veteres usi etiam in vocalibus, cum cedos [non hcedos] ircosque [non Jiircos] dicebant. Diu deinde servatum, ne f consonantibus aspiretur, ut in Graccis et triumpis." Thus in many Latin words of Greek derivation, either the aspiration is entirely J left out, as in cano from nal to $uo ff -SfikoZe-ir oTcv Jtsp'po), , in Aldi Then. p. 129. Regula est qua>p, w» ; and others retain it, as Philosophies, Rhetor, from 4>iXoVoi ]} in ; Dens 9e6g ; fagns (j>ny6g ; fuga ot> stipo poos, v. p£~of rivus piykw v. £W£o) frigeo ayiai vagio o-ga Jio «f>uXXov folium a\aiva Balcena. The following retain the Greek aspirate. %i*vt chelys x B k ye*^ chirographum, chironomia chirurgia, &c. JC£0VIX.3f chronicus X( va ~°s in all its deri- vatives qaXay^ phalanx pEV>13-JJ phrenesis i- Xo~ Js xat ev toutSe toij ewes-iv, on AioXeL; WV TO"? VOjWOif ToTc TOUTOJV lfflr,T0. Kft~S X' E7TI o-%ffy<; ° y' t ? m > ' 7r ' $' -w&vita. oTvov Aei#E' veoi Se Trap avrov l^ov mp.Trx@o}.a. AioXeej yag f/.woi ra eTtXayyyo. iirl -n'vni oi2l\£>v owrSa-iv, ol Ss aXXoi "EXXwe; iitl tjjSv Kal ya.% nofjt,u£ou?iv ol AioXeT; ra Ti'ivri •niyi.ttt. Herod, vit. Horn, sub fiuem. Quod vero JEolensk fuerit Hu- merus, indicat etiam in his versibus, quod JEolensis ipse succgentis ritibus usussit, tutu seginina car- Ipse focis multo crepitantibus admovet igni Ciuda senex, el vina super nigranlia fundit : Quern verubus quinis juvenes ouerata tenentes Brachia circuinstaut. jEolenses enim soli intestina quinque ve- rubus fixa torrebant, reliqid Greci tri- bus : pro TtiVTi enim dicunt JEoUnses 5G ESSAY ON tions, which are mentioned by Apollonius and other good grammarians, such as the * resolution of circum- flexed vowels to bring the acute backwards, and others remarked above, are found in every page, and almost every line, of his writings. In them there is certainly a mixture of other Greek, which it is natural to imagine he insensibly transfused into his original ./Eolic by his travels. But the principles and stamina (if I may so call them) of his language are, I make but little doubt,f vEolic. And that lonico-poetic dialect, which is so fre- quently attributed to him, is probably nothing but the common language of his own native land. It may per- haps be a question, whether the Ionic rejection of the augment in verbs is not % Mo\\c too ; and from thence passed to the Romans ; who, in the formation of tenses, make no alteration at the beginning of verbs, discrimi- nating them only by their different terminations : except in those verbs, that have the syllabic reduplication, as mordeo momordi, disco didici, &c. and the temporal aug- ment in a few prasterits, as ago egi. Like those abbre- viations in Homer, of fipt for fipiaphg, X'nra for Xnrapbc;, Kpl for Kpi&r), &c. there are in Ennius, gait for gaudium, coel for ccelum, Fabric for Fabricius; and in the carmen Saliare, according to Festus, Pa for Parte, Po for §Po- * jEolis amat per circuitum verba § Lips. Epist. Qusest. 1.19. Ua^ahly- protendere. Diomed. lib. II. p. 435. /xaa-t Je p^pSvrai tou fjiiv itoimov, to KpT", t This was the opinion of Philel- xal A» xai Ma.4-' 'Ha-io'Jou SI, on to BpiQu phus, one of the most diligent inquir- xai ToEpfapovBp~>.£}>£(. Evfopixv $i x.a.1 ers into every part of Greek literature tIv !iX(ov "Kiyu rCK. Strabo. VIII. " Ex- that latter ages have produced. In a eniplis utuntur Homeri, voce KpT, et Aw, letter to Perleo he says " Lingua yEo- elMaj; et Hesiodi, quod vocabulum lica, quam Hornerus et Callimachus in Bpiflu, et B^ia^ov dicit Bpr Eu- "suisoperibuspotissimum suntsecuti." phorion vero etiam faiov dicit »ix." Sal- Apud Hodium de Gr<£C. Illustr.-p. 188. masius (de re Hellenist.) has a particn- X Scaliger speaks of this, as iEolic. lar remark on monosyllables: " cer- " Canere Latini ab Hiatu dixere, Graeca turn est, linguas omnes, quae monosyl- voce eyavov : nam yEoles, ab eo quod labis constant, eaeteris esse antiqui- est yainiv, non apponunt incrementa ores." And then mentions, as an iu- praeteritis, sed dicunt j^avcv, demuntque stance of this, the number of them in aspiratior.es, ut rem barbaram." de ancient Greek, as appears in the old caus. ling. Lai. c. 52. poets, and later imitators of them. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 57 pulo. Thus are cited by Victorinus,* do for dorno, famul fox famulus, guberna for gubernacula. Some of the Romans, jealous of the honour of their language, which they were desirous of having considered as primitive, seemed unwilling to acknowledge its Greek original. On this principle it probably was, that Varro, the great antiquary ,f etymologist, and general scholar of the Romans, often acquiesced in a far-fetched, absurd, Latin derivation, rather than accept the Greek one that could not but readily offer itself, and was not less true than obvious. % And perhaps Virgil felt some of this national bias in favour of the Latin origination of his own language, when he makes Jupiter, on determining the important point of the Trojan settlement in Italy, at the close of the yEneid, say (XII. 834. 837.) " Sermonem Ausonii patrium moresque tenebunt faciamque omnes uno ore Latinos." Uno ore, that is b/uoyXuxjcrovQ, not as some explain it, uno nomine; for that had been promised just before, " Utque est, nomen erit." What Jupiter here declares, is in answer to a most earnest request of Juno, " Pro Latio obtestor, pro maj estate Tuorum, Ne vetus indigenas nomen mutare Latinos, Neu Troas fieri jubeas, Teucrosque vocari, Aut vocem mutare viros." — It is not unlikely that § Tyrannio, when he was at * Mar. Vict. Art. Gram. lib. I. p. nostris, omiuoque Latinis Uteris lumi- 2499. nis attulisti,et verbis. t This was considered by his coun- $ " Aliqui autera, inter quos Varro, trymen as no inconsiderable part of his etiaui maligue ernerunt omnia u Lati- character. " Tu aetatem patriae," says nis.Graecisque suas origines invidere." Cicero to him Academ. Quast. lib. 1.3. Scalig. de caus. ling. i.e. 29. " tu omnium divinarum humanarum- § This was Tyrannio, jun. who was que rerum Nomina, genera, ofiicia, author of a piece tte^ t>jj < P»' j u.ai'xiij Sia- causas aperuisti : plurimumque poelis Xsxtw o'ti icrh in t?c 'EXXiiviK??. Suid. 58 ESSAY ON Rome in Cicero's family, wrote his treatise, mentioned by Suidas, concerning the Roman tongue, in order to correct those wrong notions, which seem to have been popular there at that time. I wish that work of Tyran- nio had come down to us. As for the Latin accent derived from the iEolic, Quinctilian we have seen above is very explicit in his account of it. He does not indeed expressly say, that the accent, but only in general the Romani sermonis ratio, is deduced from the iEolic. But Athenaeus, who well knew the Roman language, mentions the derivation of the very accent, saying " The Romans follow the ./Eo- lians in every thing, even in the tones of their voice."* After Quinctilian, it may appear unnecessary to trou- ble the reader with accounts of the same given by sub- sequent old grammarians, who all copy from him with- out any considerable variation. But although what they say cannot much confirm an authority better than their own, yet it will serve to shew, that the Latin ac- cents, which are now little thought of, were considered by the f Romans themselves as essential a part of their language as the quantity of it. in V. Tvpaniuv. This learned Greek vaff. lib. X. c. 6. Romani in omnibus was carried prisoner to Rome, and Moles imitantes, xtt et in tonis Voeis. there presented to Terentia, Cicero's See also the observations of Palmerius wife. He was a scholar of the elder on this passage of Athenaeus. Exercit. Tyrannio ; who, after having been pre- in Auct. Gr. p. 514. ceptor of the famous Stiabo, had been t In the contents of Charisius's Trea- carried to Rome by Lucullus, where tise, addressed to his son, there ap- he was much esteemed in general for pears the title of a chapter de accentu, his learning, and honoured particu- though it is not in that part of his work larly with the intimacy of Cicero, who which we now have in Putschius's edi- speaks of him often. (Epist. ad Attic. tion, which is the only one I could ever II. 6. IV. 4. XII. 2 et 6. ad Quinct. see. There are remarks however on Fratr. II. 4.) The elder Tyrannio is accent in those remains, which we have said to have made a collection of above of him ; as on the word ne. " Ne acuto 30,000 volumes. acceniu recipit imperativa, ut ne fac : * 'PiefxaXot nrh-ra. roi{ A;oXe~; jA.ifjt.ou- quotics vera graci accentu, pro eo quod /j,ivot ojj x.at Kara roln; TO'nOY£ trie <$&• est apud Gr&cos i'va ph accipitur, opta- ACCENT AND QUANTITY 09 We, whose ears are accustomed to receive the sound of an acute and a long quantity as nearly the same, when we find the acute joined with a short syllable, as in bonis, are apt to startle, and think the accent here in- consistent with quantity. The reason of this apparent inconsistency will be considered afterwards: its real consistency, as a fact, is clear and certain beyond the possibility of cavil. The Romans did very seldom, if ever, use tonical or ac- centual* marks, as the Greeks did. Which Melancthon tiva recipit : utapud Horatium nefacias, quod Numidius. Nonnunquam lutein, etiamsi acuta accentu. eff'eratur, optativa quoque recipit, utue facias, tie scribas." Putsch, p. 202. Dioinedes, in his se- cond book, lias a long chapter deaccen- tibus, agreeable to Quinctilian's doc- trine. Grillius ad Yirgilium de accen- tibas is cited by Priscian, lib. I. p. 560. Priscian himself has a whole book on the Roman accent ; and his subject he there opens with this general remark : " Sed nos locuturi de partibus, adaccen- ium, qui in dictionibus est 7iecessarius, transeamus. Accentusest certa lex et re- gulaad elevandamet deprimendam sylla- bam uniuscuj usque particular orationis, &c." And then proceeds to lay down those rules, which are referred to above. Donatus in his editio prima has a chap- ter de tonis. Sergius in his commen- tary on the editio prima of Donates, has given us a long chapter de Accentibus. Cledonius, in his exposition of Dona- tus, has one chapter de accentibus, an- other de ratione accentuum. Maxiinus Victorinus in his Ars Grammatica has a chapter likewise on the same subject. Alcinnus in his Grammatical Dialogues omits not this : F. Syllabe quot acci- dunt ? S. Quatiwr : tenor, spiritus, tern- pus, numervs. D. in quot species divi- ditur Grammatica'! M. in xxvi. in vo- cem, in literas, in syllabas, pedes, accen- tvs, §c. So constantly and uniformly do the oldest and best Latin gramma- rians consider accent as an essential part of their language. Macrobius has mixed his remarks on the Latin accent with some on Lhe Greek; among which are the following : "'AvapEfA.fara,qu(Ein o-ftai exeunt, aut tertium a fine acutum sortiuntur accentum, tit \kyta-Qai, ypa.- Es-9ai ; aut secundum, ut mlxdai, xe- xagdat : aut circumfiectunt penultimam, ut TrotiicBai, voeis-dat. 'Awap^u^aTov, quod in <7%en exit, si habeat in penultima v, modo prasentis temporis est, modo praz- teriti perfecti, et hanc diversitatem dis- cernit accentus. Nam si tertius a fine sit, prascns tempus ostendit,ut o\\v?Bai, pnyvvo-dai, ^ivyvus-Qcu: at si secundus, prateritumperfectum, ufXiXua-Qat, i£v)f/.a.mi el^x-vs-dat, quod est prgteriti, vna. xenti- pva-Qai." De different Graoc. Lat. Q. vcrbi. p. 2762. Putsch. * " Modum [prouunciationis] diver- sum accentu exj)resso Latini Graiuinatici non indicaverunt. Gra:ci indicavcrunt. 60 ESSAY ON however laments as a defect, and wishes, for the sake of preserving the genuine Latin pronunciation, that such had been used.* "The most ancient Greeks," says he, " affixed no apices in writing, as may be seen in some ancient inscriptions, and is confirmed by Poli- tian. The following age of scholars, having more prac- tice and artificial skill in literature, added these marks to the tops of letters, as directions in pronunciation. And whoever at that time disregarded them, was looked upon as illiterate. I should have been glad, had the like attention been paid by the Romans to the observ- ance and settlement of their tones; and I make no doubt, but, had that been properly done, the Latin pro- nunciation through former ages would have retained a much greater degree of purity." We know, however, that the Romans, though they applied not the marks of tone, did occasionally use those of time, and placed a horizontal line, called an apex, over some long syllables to distinguish them from short ones with the same letters ; as in solum the ad- jective, to distinguish it from solum the substantive; in aret of areo, as different from aret of aro ; which use of Res Latinis Graecisque communis : rei Aldus, in his edition of Statins in signum apud Grascos solos invenitur." the year 1502, has prefixed a vocabn- D'orvill. Crit. Vann. p. 332. See also lary of near fifty pages, which he en- Lipsius de pronunt. ling. Lat. c. 19. titles, Orthographia etflexus Bictionum * " Vetustissimi Graeci nullos apices GrtEcarum omnium apud Statium, cum scripserunt, ut est in antiquis quibus- Accentibus et Generibvcs ex variis utrius- dam inscriptionibus cernere, et con- que lingua; Autorilms. And Robert firmat Politianus. Postera a?las Gram- Stephens in his Latin, ling. Thesaurus maticorum, artibus exerc,ita,haec Uteris hath generallymarked the circumflexed adjunxit IwwtvXk*, quasi notas pronun- syllables, though seldom the acuted ciationis: habitusque turn, qui ea con- ones. Those marks, that are used by tenmeret, non sat politus. Vellem et Dr. Bentley in his Terence, Pha-drus, Latinis par diligentia in observandis and P. Syrus, regard only the Ictus tonis fuisset ; nee dubito quin mansis- metrici. I never saw bat one Latin set integrior superioribus saeculis ratio book accented throughout: that is, loquendi." Melancth. Grammat. cap. Grammatics Quadrilinguis Partitiones, de Tonis. by Johan. Drosacus. Paris, 1544. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. (Jl the apex is remarked by * Quinctilian, afterwards by Scaurus, in the end of his Orthographia, and likewise by Caninius, who says, " Latini in longis vocalibus utebantur apicibus, palus, mains." These always de- noted quantity. But in some ancient Latin inscriptions, mentioned by Dr. G. instead of this horizontal line over long vowels, an oblique ascending one, like the com- mon acute mark mentioned and described by Diomede, is placed: as patro'no', cu'rione, pe'danio ; which, as he says, " sheweth, that in the sense of those who engraved these inscriptions, a syllable was long, when it had such an elevation given to it, as is proper to an acute accent." But does it shew that any syllable was ever by this acute mark denoted long in the sense of any scholar, or of any person except the blundering carvers or engravers, who did not know the different applica- tion of the apex of time, and accentual character of tone? For want of attending to this distinction, Cardinal Noris hath sadly perplexed himself in the last part of his Ceno- tapJiia Fisana, where he confounds these two things; and misquotes Quinctilian, in saying that " apicem, seu accentum addi solitum," where Quinctilian says only " apice distinguitur." We are sure the oblique marks were not applied by any scholar in the foregoing in- scriptions, as the true marks of the real acute sound, because he would never have placed them over a prae- antepenultima, as in pe'danio, cu'rione, nor two of them in one word, as in patro'no'; for he must have known, that one acute was never carried back beyond the antepenultima, and that two could not take place in one word. This mistaken use of these marks in some Latin inscriptions made the judicious Gerard Vossius say, " they were cut by such illiterate persons as to deserve not the least regard." f I cannot therefore see Lib. i. c. 7. Jam eorum rationem haberi oportere." u)v' tipyyrai, wg opOo- rovouutvrj TrepunraTcii. AloXug (tvv tm F' tpaivtTai Fot Krjvog' 2a7r0w. p. 427. 01 usitatur Atticis et Ionibus. Prosa scriptores usi sunt Plato et Xenophon. Dicitur, quod rectum accentum habens circumjlectitur. JEoles cum F. $>aiviTai Fot Kr}vog. Sappho. Thus we are certain this digamma was used by the iEolians and some others of the old Greeks, and considered by them as a letter of ACCENT AND QUANTITY, 65 their alphabet. When the ancient Greek language was carried into Italy, both the character and power of the digarama passed thither with it. From the Pelasgic F very probably came the old Latin and afterwards Ro- man F: from the iEolic F or T came the Etruscan T, (which the reader may see in a plate p. 24 of Mr. Chishull's Inscriptio Sigea.) As the Roman language was compounded out of the old Latin and Etruscan, it took the power and character too of the Pelasgic F, in its own F : it took likewise the power, but not the cha- racter, of the ^Eolic or Tuscan 1, in its V. Some in- deed think (Montfauc. Palaeog. Gr. p. 562.) that the Roman language had originally the character as well as sound of the iEol, digamma. However, if it had, it certainly lost it afterwards ; and for many ages the V was used till the time of Claudius both as a vowel and consonant; as a consonant, having the power of the jEol. digamma, as a vowel of the common u. Diomede and Priscian speak both of this. But I rather give it in the words of Cassiodorus, as the fullest to this purpose. Est qucedam litera in F literce speciem figurata, qua di- gamma nominator, qua duos apices ex gamma habere vi- detur. Ad hujus similitudinem soni nostri conjunctas vo- cales digammon appellare voluerunt, ut est, votum, virgo. itaque in prima syllaba digamma et vocalem oportuit poni, Fotum, Firgo : quod et JEolii fecerunt, et antiqui nostri, sicut scriptura in quibusdam libellis declarat. Hanc literam Terentius Varro dumvult demonstrare, ita perscribit, VA : qui ergo in hac syllaba sonus est, idem literce erit. Nos hodie V literam in duarum literarum potestatem coegimus : nam modo pro Digamma scribitur, modo pro Vocali. Vocalis est, cum ipsa per se est; hoc enim cum ceteris quoque vocalibus patitur. si cum alia vo- cali, digamma est, qua est consonans. de Orthogr. cap. xi. there is more to the same purpose in his 4th chapter. Thus the Roman V answered two purposes, until the time of Claudius, who, disliking this double use of V, endeavoured to introduce the old ^Eolic or Tuscan cha- racter of the digamma, and so leave V a vowel only. F 66 ESSAY ON Nee inutiliter Claudius JEolicam Mam ad hos usus F li- teram adjecerat. Quinct. i. 7. This institution of Clau- dius was certainly a good and useful one, though his authority could not establish it: for his new letter was not used long, but gave way to the consonant V, which again resumed its double power of digamma and u. Caesar (says Priscian, p. 545.) lianc figuram jl scri- bere voluit : quod quamvis Mi recte visum est, tamen con- suetudo antiqua superavit. We, in English, have the sound of the W where we use no character at all : the word one we pronounce as if it were wone. The Ro- mans continued after the time of Claudius to use the V for the digamma, as they had done before it. Quinc- tilian, in another place, speaks of their retaining the power, after having rejected the character of this iEolic letter: JEolicce quoque literte, qua servum cervumque dicimus, etiamsi forma a nobis repudiata est, vis tamen nos persequitur. Lib. xii. c. 10. The figure of the Roman F being like the iEolic F, and a mistaken passage of Priscian (cited by Dr. Mid- dleton in his little treatise de Latin, liter, pronunc.) have betrayed some persons into an erroneous opinion, that the powers of these two characters were alike : which was by no means the case. It is the Roman V, and not the F, that corresponds with the Molic di- gamma. V loco consonantis posit a (says Priscian, lib. i.) eandem prorsus in omnibus vim habuit apud Latinos, quam apud Aioles digamma F. The Roman F was a different letter, approaching nearer in its nature to the Greek , nor yet altogether like that (as some persons have imagined, and among them Salmasius) being itself with very little or no aspiration. When the Romans expressed the Greek , they did it by PH. H quoque interdum consonans, interdum aspirationis creditur not a. hcec si C mutcB subjuncta fuerit, \ ^otat Grcecam : si P prceposita fuerit aspirationi, significat. Diomed. lib. i. sub init. And though we sound the initial consonants of forum and philosophia alike, the Romans did not, phi having a strong aspiration, and /a scarce any. Hoc ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 07 tauten scire debemus (says Priscian, having mentioned ph, , and f) quod non tarn fixis labris est pronuncianda f, quomodo Ph. Putsch, p. 543. see also p. 548. This difference is clearly expressed by Terentianus Maurus : " we," (says he, speaking of the Roman F) Si quando Grcecam $ necesse exprimi, P et H simul solemus, non Latinam heme [F] ponere ; Cujus a Grceca recedit lenis atque hebes somis. The Roman F seems to have sounded more like our V; certainly Terentianus' description of the manner in which the sound of his f was formed, nearly suits our V: Imum superis dentibus adprimens labellum, Spiramine lent, (velut hirta Grain vites) Hattc ore sonabis. — Putsch, p. 2388. So does the description, which Martianus Capella has given of it : F, per denies lab rum inserius deprimentes, lingua palatoque dulcescit. Though Capella here ap- plies the word dulcescit, and Terentianus the epithet lenis to the F, to Quinctilian it appears to have been more offensive than any in the alphabet : quce sexta est nostrantm, pcene non humana voce, vel omnino non voce potius,per discrimina dentium eJJJanda est. xii. 10. But which of our letters are we to suppose like the Roman V and/Eolic digamma? most probably our W. This is doubted indeed by some persons (see Middleton de Latin, lit. in V) but affirmed by others, and those of the best authority, as Erasmus, Lipsius, Dr. Bentlcy, Mr. Dawes, and some others. The formation of the sound of the Latin consonant V, as described by Teren- tianus, corresponds in the exactest manner with that of our W, both being uttered, according to his words, pro- ductius coeuntibus labellis. (Putsch, p. 238(>.) Now this would not be true of the Roman V, if sounded like our V; but is strictly so, if like our W. Thus Martian. Capella: V ore constricto labrisque promulis exhibctnr. So Victorinus Afer in almost the same words with Te- 68 ESSAY ON rentian : V literam quoties enunciamus, productis et cce- untibas labris efferemus. As the formation, so the sound of our W is well described by the Roman grammarians when they speak of their consonant V. The fullness of it, though without aspiration, is expressed by the words pinguis and erassits. Digamma (says Sergius) inventum est, ut adhibito sermonibus impinguesceret somis. Again : Prteterea et hoc propriam V habet, at dig amnion sonet, id est, pingue quiddam, quumsibiipsaprceponitur, ntservus, vulgus. And so Terentianus on the same letter, v. 161, 2. Ut vade, veni, vota refer, teneto vultum, Crevisse soman perspicis et coisse crassum. Dionysius Halicarn. when he turns the Latin word Telia into Greek, calls it OY'lXta : in which Mr. Dawes thinks Dionysius is mistaken. By which mistake must be meant, either that Dionysius did not know the sound of the Latin consonant V, or if he did, that he applied to it improper letters from his own alphabet. But Dionysius could not be ignorant of the true sound and real power of this V, which he must have heard a hun- dred times every day during his long residence at Rome : and the word Velia itself, being the name of a well known place in Italy, he probably had very often heard pronounced by the Romans. Neither on the other hand is it likely, that this great critic, so well skilled in both languages, should not choose out from his own Greek alphabet those letters, whose nature approached the nearest to the Roman V ; the sound of which he in- tended to convey to his Greek reader. It is evident from his book -rrepl avv9. that he had studied the minutest parts of his own language in the most accurate manner: and therefore, if he thought the sound of ov was the nearest to that of the Latin consonant V, we may, I think, presume that it was so, notwithstanding any mo- dern authority to the contrary. The propriety of Dionysius in assigning ov as the ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 69 nearest in sound to this V, is confirmed (if what he says needs confirmation) by the first words in a public me- morial drawn up near 200 years before the time of Dio- nysius, and sent by the Romans to the Teians. It is given at length by Chishull, (Antiq. Asiat. p. 102.) with the name of Marcus Valerius (then Prsetor for foreign affairs, in the year of Rome, 559) thus addressing the Teians in their own language : Mapicog OvaXapiog, Map- kov } arparnybg, k. t. A. Marcus Valerius, Marci F. Prcetor Concilia, Populoque Teiorum salutem, &c. There can be no doubt of there being the greatest care taken on such an occasion to write the principal magistrate's name in proper Greek. There is, therefore, from the foregoing testimonies, the greatest reason to think that the sound of ov was from among all the Greek letters the nearest to that of the Roman V. What then was the sound of this ov ? Most are agreed, it was like that of the Latin* u, these two appearing as convertible be- tween the two languages : ovpavla becoming Urania, and custodia Kovarwdia. Now both the ov and u are gene- rally thought to resemble our oo, or the French f ou: and both these latter dipthongs nearly agree with our W ; the French oui sounding like our we, Corno«faille, Cornwall ; and indeed our own W is analyzed by the eminent author of a late " Introduction to English Gram- mar," into oo. (p. 33. in the note.) Certainly many words beginning with V in Latin, that have passed into our own language, are by us used with the W : vinum, ivine; vasto, to waste; via, way ; vicus, wick (a. termina- * Priscian. p. 554. " Quod nos se- cuti [jEolicain scilicet rationesn] u modo correptam, modo productam habe- mus, quumvis videatur ou dipthongi so- num habere. t Dipthangus ov profei'tur veluti ou in dictionibus Gallicis nous, vous. Scot. Grararu. 3. And the like sound of the Latin u is clear from a passage in Plau- tus (Mensech. p. 622. edit. Lambin. fol.) Men. Egon' ctedi ? Pen. Tu, tu istie, inquam, vin' afferri Noctuam, Qua: tu, tu, usque dicat tibi? nam nos jam nos defessi sumus. It here appears an owl's cry was tu tu to a Roman ear, as it is too too to an English. Lambin, who was a French- man, observes on the passage, " Allu- dit ad nocture vocem seu cantam, tu, tu, seu tou, tou." 70 ESSAY ON tion to several names of places) ventus, ivind; vespa, wasp, &c. Aspiration seems every way excluded f:om this V: which had, as Scaliger says twice in one page, sonum mollissimum (de ling-. Lat. c. 10.) The Greek writers in general, after Dionysius, as well as before him, when they have occasion in Roman names to turn this V into Greek, most commonly do it by ov, as Dionysius above: Severus becomes "Eeovripog, Verus ovijpog, Varro ovapwv, Virgilius ovtpylXiog, Vespasianus ovetnrcKriavog. And, on the other hand, the Latins have turned the ov into V, as from ovai vce. Sometimes indeed their V be- comes in Greek B. Dionysius writing- Varro Bappiov, and Plutarch making Servius ^Lapovtog, and SIpjSioc- And Gaza, one of the most learned of the latter Greeks, in his translation of Cicero's treatise de Senectute, for Turpione Ambivio magis delectatur writes £7rl TvpTriwvt 'Ajuj3t/3«i> ijSetcu : and for vidi etiam senem Livium elBov %n Ktu Alfiiov yipovra. There certainly was some relation between the iEolic di gamma and B, which seems to have been a favourite letter of the xEolians. In B etiam solet apud JRoles transire F digamma, quoties ab p inci- pit dictio quce solet aspirari, ut p?'rrwp j3pjrwp dicunt. Priscian. cap. de lit. The same is mentioned by Joan. Grammaticus and Corinthus, who say that, " to words beginning with p they prefix j3, and avoid the aspirate, as poSa |3poSa, 'FaSapavOvg BpaSajuavOuc, paicog fiptucog." So Caninius : ** Lacones, Cretenses, et Pamphylii pro digamma utuntur j3, wtbv wj3eov ovum, Qaog , j3at)w vado; j3fjveu, j3euva> venio; /3o(xkw vescor; fiopog vorax. Lipsius on the affinity, which he says there was among the ancients between B and V, both in writing and pronunciation, grounds a pretty emendation of a fragment of Afranius preserved by Gellius, where it stands thus : — ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 71 " Hem iste parentum est vitabilis liberis, " Ubi malunt metui, quam vereri se a suis." There is neither sense nor metre in the former line, as we here read it. Muretus was sensible of it, and altered it thus : " Horumce parentum est vita bilis liberis." i. e. amara, odiosa. A correction this not unworthy of Mu- retus. But Lipsius thinks he proposes a better in " Horumce parentum est vita vilis liberis." By the change of V into B, he would restore a line of Pacuvius, which appears in Nonius thus : " JS T on potest hie, Melanippe, sine tua opera exantlari clavos." For clavos he reads labos. (Lips. Var. Lect.ii. 28.) He speaks there of the treatise of Adamantius Martyr " de affinitate V et B," which he says he had seen in manu- script : of which we have only some short extracts in the fifth and eighth chapters of Mag. Aurel. Cassiodorus de Orthogr. Salmasius thinks, that even " cum linguam Romanam puriorem usurparent, bitidum pro vitulo dix- isse, et vellum pro hello, cujus hodieque pronunciationis vestigia expressa remansere in Glossariis Latino-Grgecis ante mille annos scriptis" (de Hellenist, p. G2. and more to the same purpose in Prof at. ad Philox. Gloss, a La- bceo.J The like remark is in Peter Victorius. Var. Lect. xxvii. 2. The Latin B in many words passes with us into V: habeo, have; taberna, tavern; lib ero, deliver. But though the B is sometimes used in Greek versions as corresponding with the Roman consonant V, yet it is not so often as ov; ^eovrjpog being met with more than twelve times in Goltzius' medals, where St/3r?poc is but thrice. Dionysius, when he writes OviXta to express Velia, says, " The old Greeks (i.e. the vEolians and Pelasgians) used frequently to prefix to words beginning with a vowel, this ov expressed by a single character. And that single 72 ESSAY ON character was as a T, with two transverse lines joined to a perpendicular one." 'E-rrlvdovTai ye §77 7rpoe rovg ntXao- yovg, teal SiSoacnv avrolg -\wpia, rr\g tavrwv inroSaoa/uvot, to. irspl ti)v hpav \ifxvr\v, iv olg r/v ra rroWa eXwotj, a vvv Kara tov ap\a"tov rr\g (HaXtierou rputrov, OveXia bvofxaZ.i.Tai. ]v £vi (Troi\£u^ ypa(f>Ofi(vriv. tovto §' v\v woTTtp ya/x/ua diTTaxg £7ri fiiav dpdijv lirfevyvvjizvov raXg irXayiaig, wg Fe- XtVrj, Kat Fava£, Kai Foticoe, kcii Fav?)p, icai 7roXXa romvra. (Antiquit. Horn. p. 16. edit. Sylb.) Thus much concerning the character and power of the digamina. Its application to the correction of some im- perfect Greek metre, particularly that of Homer, in many places, has been pointed out in general by Dr. Bentley, and made more fully, with a different name given it, by Mr. Dawes. This proposed use of the di- gamma hath been thought whimsical by some persons, and ridiculed by others; by one especially, who in learn- ing and knowledge was as much inferior to Dr. Bentley, as in taste and genius he was superior to most of his age. The critic is introduced by the poet as saying, Roman and Greek grammarians ! know your better : Author of something yet more great than letter ; While tow'ring o'er your alphabet, like Saul, Stands our digamma, and o'ertops them all. Mr. Pope here intended to expose Dr. Bentley's in- solence, not his ignorance: but through a mistake of his own he has made the Doctor speak like an illiterate, as well as vain man. Would he ever call himself greater than the Roman and Greek grammarians for being the author of a letter, which he meant to introduce solely on the authority of those very grammarians ? Or would he speak of the digamma as in figure o'ertopping the rest of the alphabet, when he must so well understand the fore- going passage of Dionysius ; who says not a word of its ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 73 extraordinary size, only that it was like a gamma, with this difference, that it had two transverse lines joined to a perpendicular one, F, the common gamma having only one, r ? That great critic's application of this ancient Greek letter, notwithstanding the sneer of the satyrist, is an extraordinary instance of that sagacity, which was almost peculiar to him; and is now confirmed by the express testimony of one of the greatest gramma- rians of antiquity, Apollonius, who in parts of his writ- ings lately published, and not known to Dr. Bentley at the time of his first proposing the introduction of the di- gamma, mentions it by name as used by the old poets in those very words, to which the Doctor added it by con- jecture. I cannot help mentioning another particular confirmation, which one of his conjectures has received since his first offering of it. The epigram of Philodemus, which he said would throw light on Hor. Serm. i. 3. v. 120, 121. if it were found, has lately been published in an Anthologia of Greek epigrams by Reiskius at Lipsic, 1754, and illustrates the sense of the passage according to the Doctor's explanation of it. This epigram of Phi- lodemus, a famous Epicurean Greek in the time of Cicero (Fin. ii. 35.) is addressed by him to the celebrated Piso, his scholar. Eivi pv\dig Kpa^iag Soiovg irtpiBakirti) zpwTag Tov filv 'Pwjuai'Soc, tov St KopivQiaSog, 'H juev parpwvag te rpoirovg kcu fiQea crripytiv OTS' Ct7TO K£KpV$aAoV P^XP 1 TSp'O'KfAlStoV. 'H Si "xycrjv trapi\u irday ^tXorrjrt Trpoar\vwg UXaoTovpyovcra Tvirovg roiig , ^\erj , and sup- posed it should be read aiFayoFcig, as aiaXCoaai is ex- plained in Hesych. by iroiKiXm : in the latter word, ; for Apollonius not two lines before says the digamma was u^sd in this word, mentioning it by name, AIoXikov Aiyafifxa, and then gives an instance of it from Alcaus in arep yiOev : where we can have no doubt but it should be FIQev. The similar forms of letters (though the lines that compose them, considering their smallness, seem vari- ously modified to as great a degree of diversity, as human wit and sagacity could possibly carry them) have yet, as is well known, miserably corrupted the text of ancient books. Thus the likeness between the small Roman r and t hath, I believe, corrupted the following passage of Virgil in his naval games : ^En. v. X30. Hie viridem JEneas frondenli ex ilice metam Constituit, signum nautis, pater, unde reverti Scirent, et longos ubi circumflectere cursus. By the insertion of pater here in the second line, the construction is embarrassed in a manner unknown to Virgil: the word itself is unnecessary, if not absurd. When it is joined in construction with JEneas in the other parts of the poem, it is generally close in position likewise: Turn pater Mneas; at pater JEneas; &c. Thus it is used in seventeen places : I can find but one where they are disjoined, iEn. viii. 28. Cum pater in ripa, gelidique sub cetheris axe iEneas, tristi turbatus pectora bello, Procubuit. Here, however, though pater is separated, it yet stands first as in pater JEneas: and the sense of the word here is very emphatical. In like manner pater is closely join- ed with Anchises in nine places, and separate but once, ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 77 where the construction is however perfectly easy, ./En. iii. 610. Ipse pater dextram Anchises, hand multa moratus, Dat juveni. On which account I suspect our common reading not to be Virgil's, and that he wrote it thus : Hie viridem JEneas frondenti ex ilice metam Constituit ; signum nautis patet, wide reverti Scirent, et longos ubi circumflectere carsus. The changing of two letters in Ivavrlov for two others of a form somewhat similar, will perhaps give the true sense of a passage in (Edip. Col. of Sophocles. OEdipus towards the close of that defence, which he makes for himself against Creon before Theseus, says, " My hands have indeed been guilty of my father's murther, but they were guided in this by accident, perhaps by the Gods. Yet you upbraid me with the whole of this, before these people." Totavr ovuS'&ig fie rwvS' 'ENANTI'ON. V. 1057. Thus he speaks, according to the present reading. But would not the conclusion here be much fuller, and more agreeable to the manner and spirit of Sophocles, were we to read Toiavr ovu&Zeig jue twv$ 'ANAI'TION. " And yet you injuriously charge me with the whole of this, innocent as I am" In the same play, v. 1585. STPE'^ANTA x«poc rfc uvikvtov /3e%j. 78 ESSAY ON What if instead of orptyavTa here, which seems too weak a word applied to thunder, it were read SKH'^FANTA x H P°£ T *>£ uviki'itov /3tXyj. 2kt)7ttoc is often used, particularly by the tragic poets, to express thunder, lightning, or storm ; and by the best authors in general: see D'orville ad Chariton, p. 692. and H. Steph. Thes. Gr. in V. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 79 CHAP. V. Ou the accent of the old Greeks. Some passages of Dionysius of Halicarnassus and Plutarch considered. The tones as well as times regarded by the ancients in their compositions. Importance of accent to harmony. IN regard to the accents among the old Greeks, (I do not here mean the marks or virgulce, which we now see in the editions of their books, the introduction and use of which I shall consider in another place) that they did regularly raise and sink their voice on certain syllables, I cannot help thinking as needless to piove from pas- sages of their own authors, as it would be to prove la- boriously from Plato, Aristotle, and Plutarch, that they walked with their two legs, or saw with their two eyes. If they had a voice, with two or three different notes belonging to it in use, they could not avoid having accent.* But in order to comply in some measure with the common expectation of readers on this subject, I shall just mention, that the present names of accents, though used more frequently by later Greek critics and gram- marians, were by no means first invented by them to express a thing of their own discovery, but were well known to the Greeks of the earlier and purer ages. Aristotle, we have seen above, uses o^vt-qq in the accen- tual sense. He uses likewise the word Trpoatocia, as we do, in his Poetics and Elenchi. Plato, in his f Cratylus, * " Quando has [accentuum Gra> cormn] Tiotas caeperint apponere, non inquiro : res ipsa semper fuit." D'or- vill. Crit. Vann. p. 333. t Speaking of the etymology of some compounded words, he says, ttoXKayaq tTriixBctWojxiv ■ypap/A.cna., rx J' tZaigoZ- ft£V xal raj o|uri)-ra; (A.iraBa.Wv- /j.bv. Sspe inserimus literas, aliasque eximimus et acumina 7nuta7nus. He then gives an instance of this in Ait lXof TO, T£ £TE{0V ttliToflsV land. l^siko/XlV, Kctl avTi o^siaj t?j fjiks-ti; truWa^.;, $a- £E~av t$9fy£a/xiQa,. In Aj£ <}hAo;, alteram iota exentimus, et pro acuta media sijllaba graie/n pronunciavimus. InsUad of SA 80 ESSAY ON mentions the very words o^sla and fiaptia as regarding merely the accent of the voice. Dionysius of Halicar- nassus, speaks as distinctly of these tones by the names we now have of them, as he does of long and short quantity. " Every word," says he, " that is placed in a sentence, is not pronounced with the same intension of voice: one is expressed with an acute [on its last syllable] one with a grave, and one with a tone com- pounded of the other two. Of those that have these two tones, some have the acute and grave in close con- junction on the same syllable, which we then call cir- cumflex : some have them separate, each with its dis- tinct proper power on different syllables. In dissyllables there is no middle place for acute or grave : in polysyl- lables of all kinds, there is a single syllable that has the acute, and all the others have graves."* <}>iXo; it was pronounced Ai'*f>tXo?, by leaving out one iota of iii, and giving the <(>i a grave instead of an acute. He then proceeds and gives an example in the word avflpoiTTo? of an opposite case, where some letters were added, and the tones likewise changed. aXXa>v Ss tou- vavri'ov iy.t3a.XkofA.tv y^a[xfj.ara, to. Xe o£ei»c BaguTEga, qBtyyofjizQa. ToSto toLvvv ev nal to t£v 'Av9fk ofyiaq, h Js iirl t«j /3a.p£i'ac, h 5e lie' aptyoTv. twv Se afAtyoripat; Taj Tao-eij I^outSiv, al f/,h xaTa yiav avXKafint ' EaUTOl! ti» olxitav llXttTTOV <{>uo-iv. Kai rait; y.h S(o-vXXa'/3«j ouSev to Sia ftirov ^piov /3«puT>jT0? Ha) o^vrn-rot;- t«"{ Se Tto'kvirvXhaBoi!;, oiai itot av liia-w, h TOV IQjV TOVOV \y0\K7O. fj.10. EV TToXXaif Bapiatt; sveo-tiv. Dionys. tteji trvv9. T/JLVIA. la. The word rtivai, though in its general primary signification it expresses ex- tension every way, in length as well as height, yet when used in a prosodical sense, is restrained to the signification of height alone ; and so are its deriva- tives toVij, rovoq, from whence the Latin toni, or tenores, and our tones. It is constantly used in this sense through the old musical writers. Scaliger gives an explanation of these words being used thus. Hos omnes Grieci tovouj vo- cavere, translata ratione a Jidibus, quo- rum intentione atit remissione acutior graviorve redderetur vox. de cans. ling. Lat. ii. 53. But whatever was the reason of this word's particular appli- cation to the height of sound, it cer- tainly is so applied in fact. "Evtovov is explained in Hesychius by o|u. 'AvaTEivsi in Stephens, by sursum cxtollo, erigo, ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 81 I know he speaks in the same chapter of the contra- riety of accents to metre on some occasions ; and that sustollo, attollo ; as likewise 'nrmivco and h-riiva, metaphorice ah intentione arcus vel lyrie. Every one knows that the usual difference between a man's voice and a woman's consists in this, that the former uses lower, or deeper notes than the latter : what difference there is, is in the comparative height of the notes, not in the length. When, therefore, I find to'voj Ba^b; used to distinguish a man's voice from a wo- man's, I am certain that those two words refer only to high and low. This then 1 find in Lucian, in his eiko've; 1 he is there describing a fine voice, and. says, wS? Js o tovoi; rou ydi-ypn-ros, oTos anaXincnat;, ovrs Bafvt;, £•? ei; to ay$ggioy rip/xatrrai, oxni nam Xetttoj i; &t)XijTaTOf ilvai. Omnis vero tonus vocis mollissimus, neque gravis, ut qui virilis, neque valde tenuis ut prorsus muliehris esset. Thus Aristotle applies o*u and Bapu : $10 ndi '0%v, iwa.y.ta>i; cvfx.ttov. Ka\ 'igyov Ta "ANIZ ateiv . to. Se Bajs'tt KA'Ti2. Probl. sect. xix. et Physiog. c. 2. As Saguj in Greek, so gravis in Latin, when ap- plied to sound, signifies lowness: thus Lucretius uses it, iv. 549. Quum tuba depresso graviler sub murmure mitsit. and Virgil, Turn sonus anditur gravior, tractimque susurrant, where he is ex- pressing the low hummiug of bees. So Cicero de Orat. iii. 6. Est item contra quiddam remissione gravissimum, quo- que tanquam sonorum gradibus desceu- ditur. From ai^ai tollo, comes in like manner agenj as opposed to Sriffif on •which Scaliger speaks thus ; Syllabg igitur modus, quo tollitur in ea vox acu- lior, dietus est a Greeds £.e.; i£ aXXoiv TE TToXXaiv $n\w, Hal fxakia-ra t£v Evg;- Tri'SoU fJ.BkuV, a TCZKoinHZ T«» 'HXEXTfaV "hiyovtrav Iv 'OfEo-Tu ttjoj tov X°Z° r iXya, 6oyyou y-iXxliiTai, xairoi tocv toiSiv Xe^eojv ly.atrTn Sapsi'aj te Tal^a- vou ovtoj ev ovo/jia, Silo Xa/SEiV o^Ei'a;. Hal tou TiSeite, QapiiTEga fj.lv h TrgZrn yivsrai, $vo Je m.st' avryv o^vrovoi te xai cfA.i)j wjoo-a)Siav o^£~av, aXX' \iii t«v TETapTnv trvWaQfiV xaraBsBix-SV h rao-u; rng t^itjjj. Qiue vero instrumen- tis cantuique aptatur Musa r/icft* ones concentui submittendas postulat,non vero concentum dictionibus : ut ex multis aliis patet, et prcecipue ex hoc Euripidis ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 83 words. This he instances in some lines ont of the Orestes of Euripides : Srya, arya, XevKov i\vog ap/3v\i]c TlOilTE, flrj KTViriLTS. ' ATTOTrpofiaT tuaia cmoirpoBi Koirag. Now, says lie, " though it is impossible there should be more than one acute in one word, yet the word apfiv- Xrjc here is made to have two, by having the same tone on the middle and third syllable." Where are these two ? not on the word, according to any pronunciation that would be assigned it by the patrons of accents, or by the common rules of them : by them it has but one, as Dionysius himself limits it. Where then were the two, which he objects to 1 why, in the musical notes of those composers, who set these lines of Euripides to music ; and, in doing that, gave as high a note to the last syllable of ap/BuArje, as to the second : so that, ac- cording to these musicians, the word was accented thus, ap(5v\i]Q. So in KTVTTHre (says he) " the circumflex is by them quite destroyed : for, by their setting the long syllable ttu to a note like that, which they assigned to the short syllable next to it, these two syllables, of cuntico, quo in Oresle fecit Electram ad turn eundem liabent. Vocabuli, KtuotIte, chorum uti : circumflexus penitus obscuratur : una Tacite, tacite, candidum soled? vestigium Ponite, strepitum ne edite. Ahscedite bine procul a leeto. enim ditcc syllable intensione efferun- tnr. Et vox, 'A7ro7rpo£aTS, non habet in media syllaba accentum acutum, sed us- que ad quurtam syllabam transfertur Na7n in his ij quoque in tertia syllaba eundem authors, which I have occasion to cite quern in media tonum habet, etsi nequit throughout this Essay, I have not fieri, ut una dictio duos habeat ucutos. thought it necessary to adhere to the Ac vocabuli, Tiflsire, gravior quidem pri- common versions, but have often given ma fit syllaba, duct vero sequentes acu- a new one. g * 84 ESSAY ON different accent and quantity, are by them reduced to an equality. And in tnroTrpofiaTe the middle syllable hath not the acute, which is carried to the fourth syllable." But it surely is not carried to the fourth now ; nor can be according to our modern accentuation. By that, a7ro7rpo/3aTf is acuted on the middle syllable, in the very manner which Dionysius here prescribes. The method then of accenting these lines in Euripides, remarked here by Dionysius, is as follows : "Sitya aija \svkuv 1.\voq appv\i]Q lit/art, ju»7 KTvirtiTt, 1 AiroTTfiofiuT Ikug tnroTrpodi KOirag. Whether the giving of such tones to these syllables in music be really a fault, I pretend not to say : let musi- cians* themselves settle that with Dionysius. I only * However the common accent of syllables might be regarded by the Greek composers of music, it seems to be acknowledged that the quantity was duly observed. ProbabiUor eorum est opinio, qui dicunt, toni sea vocis prola- tionem, syllabae. quantitatem semper sequi. Thus writes the learned author of a piece de Antiqua Musica Graca, printed at the end of the Oxford Aratus : and this he grounds on good authority, par- ticularly on that of Martianus Capella. I know not any writer, that expresses the quality of lowness and height in sound, with more perspicuity and ele- gance, than Capella. Constat omnis mo- dulatio ex gravitate soni et acumine. Gravilas dicitur, qua modi qitudam t de- missione moilescit : acumen vero, quod in aciem tenuatam gracilis et erectce modu- lationis extenditur. — Satyr, lib. ix. The author of a letter to Mr. Avison, concerning the musie of the ancients, speaks thus of their observation of quantity. " The tunes which were played to odes, like those of Horace, must have been plain and simple, be- cause of the speedy return of the same stanza, and because of the quantity of the syllables, which was not lobe vio- lated, or at least, uot greatly, by the music. The modern musicians, who have attempted to set such Latin or Greek odes to music, have often too much neglected this rule of suiting the tune to the metre, and have made long syllables short, and short syllables long, and run divisions upon single ones, and repeated some of the words. In mo- dern vocal music we regard not this law, but perpetually sacrifice the quantity to the, modulation ; which yet surely is a fault. If we had the old musical notes which were set to any particular ode or hymn, that is extant, I should not despair of finding out the length of each note; for the quantity of the syl- lable would probably be a tolerable guide : and I would consent to truck the works of Seignior Alberli for the tune that was set to Pindar's X^va-ia. <$oe(AiyZ 'A7reXX*vcf.'' ACCENT AND QUANTITY. S5 mention the thing as a fact, which he censures, for being not only contrary to quantity, but the true accent of the language too. I have taken this particular notice of that passage in his works, because I know it hath, either with inconsiderate haste or wilful misconstruction, been alleged to shew that he objected to the use of accents in general pronunciation, whereas he there objects to the abuse of particular accents among musicians, who, in setting their words, neglected the ordinary quantity and accent. After he has exemplified his assertion by particular instances, then follows the favourite passage of the ene- mies of accents ; 77 /utv yap 7TE&7 \i£ig ov^tvbg ovn bvofia- toq ovre pyj/xarog /3m£erat rovg \povovg, ovdt f.i£TaTiQt)cnv' aXX o'lag TrapdXritye ry (pvcru rag avWafiag, rag t*. fxaKpag nax rag ftpa\dag, TOiavrag tyvkaaau. — " Now prose, [which is not subject to this perversion of musical composers] never violates nor transposes the quantity of any noun or verb ; but preserves the natural quality of syllables both long and short." These lines Dr. G. hath inadvert- ently twice quoted, without attending in the least to the context, as a proof against accents, and advanced them in the title of his book, as the bulwark of quantity ; of which he is very tender and tenacious, though not so much as I am myself, as will appear in the following pages. Accordingly I should most readily reject the present accentual system in Greek, if it were really con- trary to quantity, as hath been alleged. Whether it truly be so or no, will be further matter of inquiry in another place. In regard to the point before us, can they, who have supposed the foregoing passage as a declaration against accents, imagine that such a very sensible man as Diony- sius, could object to the accents of general pronunciation in one part of his treatise, and then contradict himself in another, where, in the clearest terms, he speaks of these very tones as contributing greatly to the harmony of language ? Among the constituent parts of perfect writing or speaking, which he recites in his xixth chap- 80 ESSAY ON ter, he mentions these accents as such : o-y/jjuaTa travrola kal TA'SEIS (pwvrjg, di KaXovfievai nPOSQiAl'AI, Siadjopoi, KkiTTTovaai ry iroiKikia tov Kopov. " All kinds of rhetori- cal figures, and different tones of voice, that are called accents, which by their variety insensibly beguile us, and prevent our being sated and fatigued by an irksome repetition of the same sound." The same excellent author in another part of his rhe- torical treatise, where he is giving some general direc- tions for harmonious composition, says it must be diver- sified, and particular care be taken to avoid repetitions of words of the same number of syllables, of the same tones, or same quantity, placed near each other, *ftfrrt oXiyoavWafda 7roAXa t&w Xafifdavtiv' (kotttztcii yap rj a/cpoa- mc) (Lyre To\v(TvWaf5a TrXuio rwv ikclvuv, fiv^il o?j OMOIO'- TONA Trap' ofioiorovoiQ, firjdt bfiotoyjpova Trap bfioioyjpovoiq . Now if the Greek tones and times had been the same, had there been no difference between the buoiorova and vfxoioxpova, Dionysius would never have mentioned them as distinct, in a part of his book that required any precision. The two things are therefore certainly distinct: Xoyoc and ttovtoq are ^ptoiorova, though not bfxoio^pova. But farther : these words of Dionysius .shew not only that the tones and times were really distinct things, but likewise that the former were attended to as well as the latter in the avvBemg even of t prose : a thing, of which * HEgt cgf- $<£<;• touto Se Efl-Tai lay /UEp^i tou rj. Fnrniam orationis decet neque rnetrum habere, ncque rhylhmo prorsus centre. Quod enim metrum habet,fidem non f li- cit : elaboratum enim videtur. Quod vero rhulhmo caret, infinitum est. C Rhythmus est , cujus et metra sunt seg- menta) Quare Rhythmum habere oportet oruiionem, rhythmum vero non nimis ac- curate ; hoc autem fiet, si sit ad cerium modum. Prose here is to have rhythm, but rhythm not elaborate and apparent. And on the same principles, since some kinds of metre will slip into prose, that is best which is the least conspicuous there : for this reason the Piui&a, irptorov /ilv ra. ovofiara avrCov iK/xavS'ai/Ojittv, eireiTa rovg rvirovg koi rag cvvafiHg, tiff" ovtw rag ovWafiag kol rci Iv Tavraig iraOi). icot fiera tovto i)CT) ragXt^eig, icai ra GVfifitfirjKuTa avraig, tKracFtig te Xiyu) koi (JVGToXag, tcai nPO^QtATAS, icai ra Trapcnr\{]ma Tovrotg.f " When we are taught our letters, we first learn their names, then their forms and powers ; and thus we proceed to syllables, and their affections or proper- ties: after this to whole words, with their particular modes and qualities ; I mean, the length and shortness of them, and their accents, with other things of the like nature." If this passage does not prove the existence of tones, their difference from quantity, their use and application in ordinary pronunciation and discourse, no passage of an historian can prove the existence of Julius Caesar. The reader will see, by a foregoing passage cited from this author, that he probably here uses the word 7rpoati)3ia to signify the tone itself, not the mark. He will see, likewise, that the word aKracng here is ap- plied to the length of sound, not the height ; as Iktuvu) * Plato, in his etymology of words, p. 408. on aj-T^amv, p. 409. on Jixaio- which he gives in his Cratylus, where crvvri, p. 412. On the word tpj>s$a.TTa. he accounts for the changes made by he goes so far as to say : vDv 8s avrnt derivation or composition, frequently sxxXiWa-i to ovofxa, E'TJTOMl'AN i/ the word 'AcncXtririov. This word TrpoTrapo^vvuv has been generally understood, be- fore Dr. G. undertook to explain it otherwise, to signify " acuting the antepenultima." He rejects that sense as " too strict a one forced upon the word ;" and is there- fore for taking off this restraint, saying it means " laying an uncommon stress upon the antepenultimate." Now this expositor in other parts of his treatise, by a parti- cular stress of voice, means the power of an acute. And if he means any thing else here, I wish he had made it known by some other word ; and at the same time had produced some authority for this new interpretation of TrpowapoKvvd). H. Stephens gives no other signification of it whatever, but the common accentual one. He cites * C. 16. veroper iEscnIapiuiri, 'Ac-xXwiov in an- t <2>6gv(2ov ixi'vija-fv, afMvi ii xa» tov tepenullinia acueus, atque ostendit se ' Ao-xXrnrdv , rrpoTta^vvtev 'Ac-xAimov, x;fl>j. " Tumulluni coinmovil, jurabat ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 91 no passage, indeed, as authority for it; I suppose, be- cause it had that sense only. But I could bring a hun- dred passages from Greek writers of good note, where the word is undoubtedly used with that meaning, and can have no other. One of the best grammarians who ever wrote uses it thus, I meanApollonius, who, in his syntax, p. 27. says, to' Apiorapxpi Trpo-nrapo^vveTai. Again, the same author, ret irapo£,vv6fie va i) TrpoTrtpici7ru)fxeva, avv^emv ovaSc- ^afxtva, irpoirapo^vvovTaC Kovpog, aKOvpog, liriKOvpog' doXog, aSoXog' 7rXr)(7toc, TrapcnrXimoQ.* And indeed, Dr. G. ad- mits the word in this sense, in many parts of his own book. Certainly Eustathius understood it so, in this very case of Demosthenes ; for, as it happens, he has taken t notice of the same. ?j 6suto vr\' ou icai tottov 'Epf.iov koXhv oiKiav rovg Tlv- OoiroXirag' oi>k opBwg ti)v dtvripav AAfl|3rjv TrtpHJirwvTag, Kid -n)v So^av IttI Qtbv otto "Hpwog ^araTiOivrag.* How the Greek tones are in their nature consistent, and in their modern application often inconsistent with quantity, will be seen in another place. * Et cum UtisHcrmnm ndbilem Athe- Xyland. I am obliged to the excellent ■uiensem ; a quo locum Hermou-oeciam editor of Lysias and Demosthenes for dicere Pythopolitas,quiparumrecte cir- directing ine to this passage of Plu- eumflectant secundum syllabam, hono- tarch, together with that above from remque ad Deum Mercurium ab Heroe Photius. Hcrmo traducant. Vit. Thes. p. 12. edit. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. JJ3 POSTSCRIPT TO CHAP. V. Among those ancients, who wrote on the Greek tones, are found the names of the most considerable scholars of antiquity. Zenodotus, the first librarian of Alexan- dria under Ptolemy Philadelphus, is quoted by Apol- lonius Alexandr. (Synt. p. 1G7.) on the subject of accent. Aristophanes Byzantinus (of whom more will be said in the next chapter) is referred to by Apollonius, and the scholiast on Aristophanes, in a case of accent. The famous Aristarchus, scholar of Aristophanes above (as appears from some scholia published lately by Mr. Valckenaer with Ammonius, on Iliad. E. G56. and from other scholia), either published his edition of Homer with accentual marks, or wrote upon accents. A particular remark of his on the tone of a/uvydaXr) is in Athenaeus, lib.ii. p. 53. and many others elsewhere. Dionysius Thrax, scholar of Aristarchus, appears from Sextus, as cited above, to have considered this subject : even if what Fabricius hath published as his, be spurious. Tyrannio, who taught at Rome, and was some time in Cicero's family, wrote irepi 'Ojurjpt/cije Ilpo^'iag. Suid. inV. Trypho, a man of great character in the time of Au- gustus, wrote his "Attikti JlpovySia, so frequently cited by the following writers, Apollonius, Athenaeus, Ammo- nius, and others. Abro, a scholar of Trypho, according to Fabricius, is cited on this subject by Apollon. Syntax, p. 130. Herennius Philo (who lived under Domitian, accord- ing to Fabricius, though placed after the age of Ammo- nius by Valckenaer) has left remarks on the same. 94 SS8AY ON Heraclides (who lived under Nero) wrote KaOoXiK^v TlpotripBiav, which is quoted by Ammonius on the word vvv, and by Apollonius. Synt. p. 326. Seleucus, called Homericus, is quoted on the same subject by Apollon. Synt. p. 167. Ptolemseus Ascalonita, before the time of Ammonius, by whom he is often cited on accent, wrote 7T£joi Ilpoa^- §uov of the Iliad and Odyssey. Amman, in ora^uA/j. iElius Dionysius, (who lived under Hadrian accord- ing to Pierson in praef. Mcer.) hath a tract still extant TTfjoi eyicXivofitvcjv Xe^Ewv, in the Ktpag ' ApaXOdag of Aldus. Remarks of his on accent are cited by Eustath. and Etymol. M. Ammonius, who lived in the time of Hadrian, and Mceris Atticista his contemporary, often explain words with remarks on their accents. Nicanor of Alexandria, under Hadrian likewise, (Suid. in V.) is quoted in the scholia, mentioned above as published by Valckenaer, in a case of accent, on Iliad, r. v. 230. Apollonius Alexand. Dyscolus, under Hadrian and Antoninus, wrote, according to Suidas in V. 7rejOi tovwv Kari]vayKci(Tpivwv, two books ; irepl rovtov aicoXiwv, one ; Trepl Trpoaojcuov, in general, five. His work^pi tovmv is referred to by himself in Synt. p. 135. His son Herodian, as hath been mentioned before, wrote very largely on this subject. The 20th book of his -rrpocTofi'ia is cited by Steph. Byzant. in V. &jiai. This great work of Herodian was epitomized by Aristodemus, according to Suidas. Another epitome of it is still extant among the Bodleian MSS. 179. by Theodosius, who is known likewise to have commented on Dionysius Thrax. Dr. Bentley, in his Epist.ad Millium, p. 37. says he had read this Epitome. Besides his KadoXiKrj Ylpom.j- &a, he wrote avopaXog TTpomoSia (see Etymol. 31. in V. apx,cuog) 'Attiki) TrpoaioSia (see Schol. ad Aristoph. Aves v. 4S5, and Etymol. M. in V. ^wpiapog) likewise 'OpripiKri TrpompSia (see Suidas in v. /acjuvtrro. Etymol- M. in y. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 95 7$oe. and Schol. Aristoph. Aves,v. 862). And Fabricius lib. v. c. 7. mentions another still extant, unpublished, de tonis adverbiorum. in cod. Barocc. 125. Concerning the KaOoXiicr) irpoaySia, Dr. Taylor in a letter of June 22, 1762, writes to me thus: " Something- of this kind [*. e. visible accentuation] I think I discover in the Anthologia. Lib. i. Tit. 17. JLvTTldlOV ' A6l]Vaiov GTlZjaVTOQ tIjv KaOoXov. TavToXuyiov Kavovwv (ptv 7rXi}06og, ?}§' aidiiXojv Evcrpiawv, XtTTTog rag l)(apa£,£ §6va%. Of.ifj.aTa pzv KtKjUTjice, Ttviov, pa\ig, Iviov, &/xol' Trig KaOoXov St (pipto rr)v 6($vvr}v KaSoXov. " I need not acquaint you that this regards the gram- matical work of Herodian, so often quoted by the an- cients, and distinguished by the emphatical name of r H KaOoXov, without the name of the author. So it is in the Schol. of Apollon. Rhod. i. 54. 'Aiitypvcroio] ypafperat kol cia tov ft. o>c Aiovvcnog. tan Se iroTaiiog QeaaaXiag. irpoTrapo^vverai de, wg ev ry i] rr]g KaOoXov, i. e. in the 8th book of Herodian s Universal Prosody. Now Eupithius, the scribe or critic, was employed lv t$ vrtZ,uv rrjv KaBoXov. As the grammatical books more particularly had accents, and anypr) is any point or mark in general, why should not the employment of Eupithius be that of accenting Herodian's book? The business of mere punctuation could hardly have occasioned that extreme labour and fatigue complained of in the epigram. Herodian's book, as it appears to have been written near the reign of Hadrian confessedly upon the subject of accents, clearly shews they had been settled and digested for some time. Indeed every thing shews the antiquity of them, and the authority of the present sys- tem." Pamphilus and Philoxenus are quoted by Athensus on the accent of a particular word, lib. ii. p. 52, 50. 96 ESSAY ON Phrynichus, who lived in the time of Antoninus, in his Ecloga has left observations on accents. Orus, of Alexandria, and nearly of the same age, wrote, according- to Suidas in v. 7tejoi Sixpoviov, kcu vepl 'EjkXitikiov fxopiwv. Athenaeus, who lived about the same time, has many remarks on the same subject. Of Charax, who is placed by Is. Vossius among the Alexandrine grammarians in order before Herodian, we have a piece, in the collection of Aldus, to this purpose. Alexander Aphrodisiensis, of the same age, has left occasional observations on accents. Julius Pollux, who addressed his ovopaariKov to Com- modus Imp. has left the like. See lib. ix. c. 2. In the following ages several authors wrote either professedly or occasionally on this subject, as Porphyry, whose work TTipl Trpoaafiiag is cited by Dr. G. and mentioned by Fabricius. A MS. treatise of Arcadius Antiochenus Trspl tovwv is commended by Salmasius de modo usura- rum, p. 256. Chaeroboscus, of the fourth or fifth cen- tury, has some pieces, published by Aldus in his kyittol 'ASoWSoe, on this subject, and another, not published, Trept irpoaqSuov mentioned by Fabricius (lib. v. c. 7.) in Cod. Barocc. 116. Olympiodorus, of the fifth century, may be added to this list. I must not here descend any lower through the later ages to Stephanus Byzant. Hesychius, Photius, Stobaeus, Theodorus Prodromus, Is. and Joh. Tzetzes, &c. for I shall be told by some persons that I am here carrying my reader Inter inhumance nomina barbaric, and plunging him in the very sink of barbarism, from whence nothing but corruption is to be drawn. How- ever, the preceding names, that are found in the purer ages, sufficiently shew the attention that was constantly paid to the tones of their language by the most cele- brated scholars of Greece. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 97 CHAP. VI. On Ihe introduction, use, and accidental abuse of the Greek accentual marks. Vindication of the character of Aristophanes Byzanlinus. Accentual metre of Tzetzes. Character of the learned Greeks of the lower empire : and of some of their scholars. A review of the history of the Greek language. " Veteres quidem Graeci (says* Caninius) accentus pronunciabant, non scribebant. Quod ex Elenchis Ari- stotelis potest intelligi." The passage of Aristotle, which Caninius means, is in his third chapter Elenchwn, where he is considering the several kinds of sophistry used by disputants ; and says, that " those ambiguities, which are occasioned by the use of homonymous words, cannot be so easily applied to perplex a controversy, which is carried on between two persons debating and conversing together : because the accent there deter- mines the sense of the word. But when the dispute is managed by writing on each side, there the accent hav- ing no visible mark to fix the sense, leaves an ambiguity and room for cavil, which would be avoided in ordinary discourse, "f Alexander Aphrodisiensis comments very largely on this passage in his exposition of the Elenclii ; from whence I will transcribe a few lines, because they con- tain a definition of TrpoouSia, part of which was, perhaps, copied from him by Lascaris, and from Lascaris hath been given by disingenuous or ignorant writers, as * Hellenism, p. 98. mate magis. — Sophist. Elench. lib. i. t riaga Se rhv TTfoirwSiav lv f*.h to"; c. 3. see also c. 21 and 23. Iu the anv y£*q>ns SiaAexTDtoij oL pa'Jiov itoiwm seventh chapter where he speaks of Xoyov, lv $£ to"? ■yey^a.fx.y.ivoii; n 7romfjt,a?i itqtti?StaV lariv. og TIQ fj.lv Iv toIq SiaXtKTiKoiq \6yoig toIq jut) yeypappivotg, aXXa Xeyopivotg, ov pqSlwg yivtraC Iv St to7c yty pappivoig ciaXtK- TiKdlg \6yoig kcll roig 'Opnr^piKOig ironifiaai ovvarai yeviauat. ovopiaCerai & veplr^v irpotryStav, on 'O TO'NOS IIPtfS*ON "AtAOMEN KAF TOY'S AOTOYS nOIOY'MEOA, Trottt tov TrapaXoytcrpov' vvv plv ovTiog, uXXots §' aXXwc V Ka ^ aXXaYov Tidzptvog. — Iv ptv bpiXlq koi ctaX(t,u, ouk cnrarriaeig ttotI oXtywv/ETAI'PA XPYSI'A E'l OPOI'H AHMOSIA "ESTO. £t'Xr}7rrat yap 6 Xiyiov Trapo^vTovwg tov Xoyov i£,e~ viyicwv, i\ tv^ov koi TrpoTrapot,vr6vii)g. nal oi>K av aocptcraiTO ttote tov -!}Kpoi]pivov , vvv filv 7iapoL,VTOvii)g Xiywv, vvv OE tig TrpoTvapo^vTOva jUETaXajUj3avoJv* tt7ras yap up\)Kh)g, ecrr)p.av£ to tavTOv /3ouXrjjua. el St Iv ypa(py elr\ Keipevov to oripoma, ovSiva tovov e\ov, totz c»jra koi tov TrapaXoyujpbv "\" aireicr). From the foregoing passage in Aristotle (on which Alexander hath fully commented) it appears there was * Quinlus cavillationis per verbum modus ad accentum pertinet. Qui qui- dem in sermonibus, rum scripto sed voce fact is, baud facile contiugit : in scriptis vero sermonibus, et H'omericis carminibus fieri potest. Dicitur vero ad accentum pertinere, quia tonus Me, ad quern cani- ttius et verba facimus, captiosam ambi- guitatem facit ; mine in hoc, deinde illo, aliasque alio locopositus. in sermone muluo coram habito, nunquam falles si dicas " arnica si aurum eerat, 5«|Uoa-itt sit.*' Deprehenditur enim qui- vis loquens, cum accentu vocemproferens vel in.penultima syllaba, vsl etiam for- tasse in antepenult ima : neque fallat unquam audientem, nunc in penultima eum ponens, deinde in antepenultimam transponens : semel enim cum dixerit, ostendit plane quod sensit. Quod si in scripto sit vox hrec Sn^oo-ia, nullum to- mim palam habens, turn quidem capti- unculam facit. — See also Auimonius- Henn. F. de interpretations, p. 10.43. 50. 52. Dr. Taylor lias pointed out to me a passage in Hermogenes like the preceding in Ales. Aphrod. 'H juevtcs a.fj.^iZo'kla. not airl too iwfxatoq itrn tyavzei. "Ecti j/ig afxtyiQo^la, ay.tynrQrf Trie-it; ittol puTcv, i» Tr^otra-'Sia? h Siaa-ra- o- govrra' Hal h /«£V ta yj/vala )(; avctytvuxr- Kouc-a tov vojCioy. ol Se ov ra %pvtria,, dxx' alnhv Sn/xoc-iav [sc. AHMOSl'A] elvai, nttteifynbws amyivwo-HoVTZs. — Hermog. p. 59. edit. Crisp. t There is a corruption in this pas- sage, as it stands at present : perhaps it should be read thus, tote Sirra Hal o itaoa'Koyiv^ aidZn. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 1)9 a dispute in his time among scholars about the meaning of these two lines in Iliad xf/. Hottjke c;i»Aov avov, ogov t opyvi vxtp air\q, *H Spvbg jj 7T£uktjC) to /lev ou KaTcnrvQeTai opfipaj. The sense of the second verse would be very different, according as it should be read with ov or ov, the former signifying non, the latter i^fo' or cujus ; in which case there could have been no doubt, if the same marks had then been used, which we now have. Aristotle * says, that Hippias' determination in favour of the negative ov was at length agreed to. In this manner many diligent persons have with learn- ing and industry laboured to prove from passages of ancient authors and other strong testimonies, that these marks of accentuation were not known to the old G reeks. f And they have, I think, proved it satisfac- * Kai tov "Ofxn^ov Ivioi Sio^Souvrai w^of TouijlXEyp^ovTttf, oo; d-roVa? Ei^xora, "to fj.iv ov xaTaTrvBiTai ofA-Ggai," Xiiovti yag avTi rr, Trpoo'cuSitt, Xej/ovtej to oi> o£lte£ov. Kai to mi) to huirviov tov 'AyafA.BfA.vovo*, on ovx. avrot; a Zeus eTwev, " SifyoiEl' Se o! ivyoi a^o-Qat," aXXa to ivunvio) IvsteX- Xeto JiSovai. to. fx.lv oZ>v -roiaZra na^a. tw yrpos-wStav eo-ti'v.— Elench. I. These two cases are mentioned by him in another place : Kara. Si TrpotrcoSiav, aio-itio 'limiac; eXuev o QaVis; to " SiSg'^ev SI ol" xai, " to fA.iv oil Kara7rvStrai OfA-Gpo!." — Poetic, c. 25. This Hippias, we see, by the difference of accent in the word SiJojUEv, solved an objection, that was made by some of the ancients against Homer's representation of the supreme Deity. In the commands, which Ju- piter gave the dream in order to de- ceive Agamemnon, there were these words, $ioofj.iv Si ol iv-^og agicr&ai (which by the by do not appear in our present copies of Homer). These, if we un- H 2 derstand Si'SojUEV in the sense of damus or spondemus, make the god guilty of a lie. Many of Homer's readers were much offended at it, and Plato in his second book de Bepub. makes it matter of reproach against the poet. Rut Hip- pias cleared up the difficulty, by say- ing, that SiSo/xev was not to be taken in the indicative sense with the accent on the antepenullima, but in the infinitive, for SiSo'^Evai, acuted on the penullima S(So'//sv. And then the god says, im- peratively, " give or promise him suc- cess." This proves two things : both the non-existence of visible accentu- ation in the time of this Hippias, and the propriety of our present accenting the Ionic infinitives in [a.zv on the pe- nultima. t Hennin. from sect. 38 to 58. See also Gul. Canter. Syntagm. de rat. emend. Gr. Auct. c. 6. — Politian. Mi$- cell. c. j8 et 60. a 100 ESSAY ON torily : which yet, perhaps, they might have done as clearly by a shorter way,* I mean by this plain argu- ment : that such helps and directions in the pronun- ciation of a language of any country are notf requisite in writings, drawn up in the vernacular tongue of that nation for the use of its natives ; who must be supposed not to want instruction in that respect. An author in general, when he writes in the language of his country- men, and for their perusal, need not any more affix such marks for the regulation of their voice, than a poet in particular need mark the quantity of his syllables : be- cause in both cases such a practice would be altogether needless. When a language is to be taught and ex- plained to persons ignorant of it, either children or foreigners, then indeed such helps become necessary. And such we see now used in grammars and dictionaries of modern languages, but not uniformly in the ordinary writings of them. Such exactly was the case with the Greeks. When their language became, what it was for several ages, the favourite one of foreigners, then those persons who particularly studied it with a view of illus- trating and making it more generally known, did, in order to facilitate the instruction of others, wisely and properly enough apply marks of direction for that pur- pose. Whether these marks were invented by a gram- marian, or only borrowed by him from those of musi- cians (as is supposed by % Vossius) is of little conse- quence in the present question. It is not the derivation, but the application of them solely, in which we are con- cerned. As, likewise, whether they were then used by grammarians in the same form§ with those we now * This might have saved Henuinius of the marks from a scholar of Aristar- the pains of writing - many pages. — Sect. chus (for so this Dionysius was) which 2 — 8. appear from thence to have been nearly t Hennin. acknowledges this. — Sect. the same with those used at present. 16 — 19. See Append, ad Dissert. Westen. con- t P. 140. and Hennin. p. 26. taining a few observations on this MS. $ If that MS. of Dionysius Thrax, of Dionysius, communicated by Mag- which is cited by Dr. G. (p. 67.) is liabechi. authentic, we there have a description ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 101 have, is equally insignificant. Marks themselves are quite arbitrary : and if they are but faithful, are good. But whatever signs or characters grammarians either borrowed or devised on that occasion, the thing signi- fied by them, i. e. the particular rise and fall of the voice, was the same, not invented by them, but existing always before them (as much as speech was* before any characters were formed) and only pointed out by them in a certain determinate manner. This then was done to ascertain to foreigners the due elevation and depression of their voice on certain sylla- bles. Bat it will be asked perhaps, why was not the same method of some visible mark requisite to direct them likewise in the continuance of it, that is, to fix and settle the quantity as well as accent? The reason, I sup- pose, is, that the quantity of syllables did in a manner point out itself even to strangers, who did but know the power of the Greek letters. Their long and short vowels, and diphthongs, and the position even of dubious ones before consonants, would readily enough, with but little direction, mark the quantity of syllables. Had these accentual notations been introduced before the addition of H and G to the Attic alphabet, and the use of diph- thongs ; such a circumstance might perhaps have given some reason to think that these signs were intended to mark quantity. But since the distinct characters of H and Q were added by Simonides near CCC years before the time of Aristophanes, the inventor of the accentual virgulce, and the quantity of the Greek language was for that and other reasons more obvious perhaps than the quantity of any other language whatever, it is almost absurd to suppose, tha x these virgulce were applied to so needless an office. The same kind of direction, therefore, which accent required, was not wanted to teach quantity. * The Spaniards, when they first be- They had a regular civil establishment, came acquainted with America, could and were in many respects a very sa- not find that the inhabitants ever had gacious people. One of the royal any letters among them. And yet no family of Peru became afterwards a one will suppose they had no language. good writer in Spain. 102 ESSAY ON Agreeably to what is here said, we are told that the person who introduced the signs of accentuation, was *Aristophanes of Byzantium, a grammarian, and super- intendant of the Alexandrine library, who flourished under the Ptolemys, Philopator, and Epiphanes, and devised them for the use of his scholars : " not (says the learned Montfauconf) that the Greek language before his time was without accent or spirit ; for no language can be pronounced without them : but that he brought under certain rules those sounds, which practice had before introduced ; that he invented signs and charac- ters for them, and shewed where they were to be placed." This man was not the first that observed the accents of the Greeks, or gave them their name, TrpocrioSlai, though he first gave the visible notation.:}: The same tones * See Salmasii Epist. ad Sarravium. This Aristophanes is placed by Suidas in the 145lh olympiad, about 200 years before Christ. Vitruvius in pra?f. lib. vii. places him under Ptol. Phila- delphus. t " Aristophanes Byzantinus wgo- c-wMav sive accenlus excogitavit. Non quod ad illam usque setatem Graeca lingua accentibus et spiritibus carue- ril : nulla eniin potest lingua sine ac- centu et spirita pronunciari. Sed quod ille ea, quae usus magister invexerat, ad certas normas et regulas deduxerit, signa et formas invenerit, quo loco es- sent couslituendi accentus, docuerit." Montf. Palteog. Griec. p. 33. I make this Aristophanes the introducer of accentual marks, on the authority of Salmasius, Huetius, and Monlfaucon. They say not, whence they learnt this. Their authority is however great: espe- cially as their account well agrees with the time, when we might naturally look for their introduction. The conjecture of Baillius is not an improbable one, who supposed they were first used somewhat before Cicero's time. (Baill. apud Scot. p. 791. See to the same purpose Muncherus de origin. Accent, and J. C. Albrechl de constitut. ling. Grajc.) But this matter would proba- bly be cleared up, upon consulting Arcadii Grammatical (mentioned amoug the unpublished Greek grammarians, by Fabricius, lib. v. c. 7.) 'ApxaSiou wsji Tovoy tSv oxtm fx.t(Zv tou 'hoyoo, xai itsci lutitTixit; tSv 7rpov. in Cod. Colbert. 3123. I take the word Trgos-aiSioDv here to mean the mark, not the tone : otherwise I cannot see how it can be joined with tuferis. For you can no more say eveeo-is t£v ToW, than you can eugsins t??s Qaivvi;, or " the invention of seeing, and breath- ing, or Sancho Panca's invention of sleeping." £ Herm. Hugo says that Pherecydes, master of Pythagoras, did DC years before Christ give Ihe first marks, and thinks he has authority for this from Diog. Laerlius. (c. 27. de prima scrU bendi origine.) ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 103 with the same name irpoobfilai are mentioned, as hath been seen before, by Aristoxenus, who lived at least a hundred years, and by Plato, who lived not less than one hundred and fifty before him. This Aristophanes, who, by Vossius, is contemp- tuously called literator, an insignificant petty teacher, is, by Suidas, termed rpa^uemKoe ; which Vossius very well knew was an honourable appellation among the an- cients : not being then restrained in its sense, and im- plying, as it does at present, a person employed in con- sidering, or teaching, the inflexions and construction of words, and attending merely to the minutia of language, but one comprehending within the compass of his stu- dies every thing relating to polite literature. " Litera- tum a literator e distinguunt, ut Grasci Grammaticum a Grammatista, et ilium quidem absolute, hunc mediocri- ter doctum existimant."* We are not, therefore, to wonder at the best Greek writers, Aratus, Apollonius Rhodius, and Callimachus, being called, as they were, Vpa/ijuariKoi. Other circumstances related of him by Suidas, make it very unlikely, that he should have been such a mean inconsiderable man as Vossius represents him: he is said by Suidas to have been the son of Apelles, rtyovfjie- vog arpaTKoriov, a military officer of rank ; and to have been the scholar likewise of three eminent men, Callima- chus, Zenodotus, and Eratosthenes.f This very ill agrees with the appellation of literator. Such misrepresentations of one scholar are very unworthy of another. Especially since this person, by Vossius' own account, introduced no- * Sueton. de illustrib. Gram. And tat xat to. cvyyga.fAfAa.Ta. koIto. airofAyri- thus Quiuetilian understands the word (ji.mi\) fAa.ro. Ttayra. naX Xoyina, Im-nlStufAa.- grammatice ; "Cum prreter ralionem to.. — Scholiast. Dionus. Thracis apud recte loquer.di, non parum alioqui co- Valcken. Animadv. ad Ammon. i. c. piosam prope omnium maximarum ar- 13. tium scientiam amplexa sit." lib. ii. c. t Eratosthenes is said by Suidas to 1. 'AvTo'Stwpoj $6 Ti? Ysa.fAfAa.Ti'.ili; rga/A- have left, when he died, (AaStirhv 'Eni'- //.ari/ihv avTnv aivofxaa-zv it ago. tw yvZiriv 2HM0N, "Afio-TO^avw tov Ei»£dvTiov. in v. rj;y ypu.y./A.a.T»iv. rga/AfAara, li naXovv- 'TgaroaShni;. 104 ESSAY ON thing inconsistent with quantity and true rhythm, which he supposes was not injured by accentuation till the age of Antoninus, or Commodus ; that is, till near four hun- dred years after the time of Aristophanes. This man, by contributing to the establishment and perpetuation of the genuine Greek pronunciation (which he did ac- cording to the concessions of Vossius himself), did, by this general convenience and direction of tone, which extended itself to every part of the language, do more real service to the cause of rhythm and harmony, than if he had written fifty treatises " de Poematum cantu, et viribus Rhvthmi." But farther, this same {iterator, Aristophanes, was the person who invented and first made use of punc- tuation: which every one will acknowledge to be a thing of extreme utility. Before his time the words were written uno ac perpetuo ductu, the letters of the same and of different words at exactly the same dis- tance, without any mark of a pause to distinguish either sentences, or members of sentences, or words from one another. This would be even at present very inconve- nient to a common reader: but much more must it have been so then, when writers made use of but one set of letters, all large capital ones : for small* ones were not invented, according to Montfaucon's account, until some hundred years after. The merit, therefore, of this single inventiont of punctuation, I should not scruple * " Literee unciales observantur in libris omnibus ad nonuni usque sascu- lum.'' — Palaog. Reccns. p. 12. t Huetius, in a passage where he is mentioning the punctuation in old co- pies with capitals, speaks of it thus : " Triplici punctorum situ orationis distinctio oinnis absolvitur, collocalo puncto vel ad suminum litera?, vel ad medium, vel ad imum. Positura prior, quae est ad summum literae, sententiam perfecte claudit, ul nihil preeterea ad ejus absolutioncm lectoris animus re- quirat. Alter situs ad medium literae, sententiam quidem claudit, sed non perfecte ; ut ad explendum lectoris animum et absolvendam penitus sen- tentiam aliquid prscterea desideretur, et ejnsdem fere sentential commata di- vidit. Infima vero positura morulam iuterponit quandam, dum lector spiri- tum ducat, et diversas ejusdem sen- tential partes una connexione aplas in- ter se et conclusas distinguit. Prions generis punclum, TEXEi'a en-ypn appel- latur ab antiquis grammaticis ; secuudi ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 105 to prefer to that of the best critical or grammatical trea- tise that was ever written, not excepting even Aristotle's and Quinctilian's great rhetorical works : which, though admirable performances, are not of that general conve- nience, and extensive utility, as the simple marks of punctuation. And, indeed, in most cases, even a slight invention of something new, is of more service and im- portance to the world, than a considerable improve- ment of what is old. This Aristophanes is, I believe, the person meant by Thomas Magister, in his life of Pindar, prefixed to that poet's works in the Roman edi- tion of Calliergus ; where it is said, that the ode begin- ning with apujTov fxlv vStop, was placed the first in order, vtto ' ApLGTotyavovq, tov avvrd^avTog* ret TlivSapiicd. Varrcj- speaks of him as a person of very great erudition. By Cicero, he, in conjunction with Callimachus, is consi- u.ia~n ; tertii Jwoo-ny^. Atque id inventum ad orationis nitorem excogita- tum, Aristophani Grammatico acceptum refertur. Quod cum ipse boo tempore reperisset, quo Uteris quadratis et raa- jusculis vulgo scribebatur, aptissimus fuit et utilissimus s-riy^aivillaruin usus, quod literarum amplitudo intercapedi- nem observatu perfacilem tres inter punctorurn sedes conslitueret." — Dan. Huet. praf. ad Orig. comment. See also Montf. Palasog. Gr. p. 31, 32. The same thing is related of Aristo- phanes by Salmasius, and explained at length by him in his Epistle to Sarra- vius. Both he and Huetius lake no- tice of the change that was made in the form of these a-riyfjutt afterwards; when, instead of the great square capi- tal letters, the smaller round ones were introduced. But this occasioned only a different modification in the charac- ters of punctuation ; the thing itself, with its application to the division of sentences, which we have at present, is the same, derived from Aristophanes. The same account of the use of the first .us, as he is likewise by Suidas in V. ' Apinapyoq. He is by Quinctilian joined with Aris- tarchus. " Aristarchus et Aristo- phanes poetarum judices," lib. x. c. 1. And so he is in the scholia ■^iv'Suw ya of Didymus on Homer : y.ara rhv 'Aji- ctkpyov xa\ Apicro-pavcv; oo'^av. II. A. 5. See also Sch. Odyss. *■. 296. B. 190. To him, iu a case of accent, we are referred by the scholiast on Aristo- phanes, Nub. v. 1149, on the word cLtraioXv, where it is said, 'Apiav>if o^uvScS'a./ jTai, i>q hlohmm. In Quinctilian, I know not thai the % Athenaeus, p. 397, edit. Casaub. Greek marks of accentuation are men- It is remarkable that Athenaeus, speak- tioned, though the accents themselves iiig of the accent of th-hh;, from Try- are, " Tenores (quos quidem ab anti- pho, uses the word ayayivwyxowi, quis dictos tonores comperi, ut videli- " they read it thus in Eupolis.'' Read, cet declinato Graecis verbo, qui tovovi; what? a thing not visible nor legible? dicunt) vel accentus, quas Graeci irpoo-- a character not existing ? For -raSj, oiSLa; vocant." lib. i. cap. 5. see Arisloph. Aves. v. 102, where it t P. 74. Edit. Pauw. In the chapter stands at present circumflexed ; and irepl Zvy-etiuv, he mentions rov 'AXxaiou the scholiast on it observes : Taut;, tw 'Apia~ro

v as a barytone, if in the copy of that poet it stood thus, rpox^v 1 If it should be said, it might be collected from the metre, how will this be where he quotes authors of prose, as well as of verse ? Athenaeus,^ when he speaks of the tone of dfxvyZdXr), says, that according to Pamphilus, when the word signified not the fruit but the tree itself, it was circumflexed on the last, as poSfj was in a poem of Antilochus : and then brings passages from Eupolis, Aristophanes, and Phrynichus, for its accent in both senses. So Ammonius, in many places, not only remarks the particular accent of words, but brings authorities from passages in writers : on djuvySa- Xrj, as differing from a/xvy^dXr}, he quotes the Taxiarchi of Eupolis ; Menander on the word ap7ray»j ; Homer on dafpoStXog ; Thucydides on juoy^poe ; Aristophanes on Trapeiai and irapuai; Menander and Demosthenes on ttotoq and 71-oroe ; Homer, as cited by Ptolemaeus Asca- lonita, in his second book of accents, in the Iliad, on GTCHpvXji; Aristophanes on ^ouc and x°«c- The same proof of the existence of accentual marks in the ancient copies may be drawn from the manner in which Mceris, in several words, remarks the difference between the At- tic and Hellenic accent. Solon, in some§ scholia, men- tioned above, Says, 'O jutv 'Aptorapyoc to ctfiapTrj X W P'C tov i TPA^EI kol '05fY NEI.ot St Trepl'UpwSiavbvTrepKnrw- m, kcl\ Trpo(rypdovm. What can be here understood but the actual mark in Aristarchus' edition of Homer ? So * Id. lib. ix. p. 400. $ Lib. ii. p. 52, 53. t In Ammonius, on tbe word t^o'^oi, § Published by Mr. Valckenaer, p. 137, edit. Valcken. on which see wilh his Ammonius. Anirnadv. p. 241. Valckenaer's Animadvers. lib. iii. c. [ad Iliad. E.v. ti.36.] 15. also lib. iii. c. 6. and 12. 110 ESSAY ON Charax, the old grammarian, published by Aldus, with /Elius Dionysius, Herodian, and others, 7rfpi twv tyicAivo- fiiviov, says, that " Aristarchus, at the beginning of the Odyssey, would not give two acutes to dvdpa fxoi [ovk ifiov\i)Qii dovvai tig top, avcpa fioi, cuo 6%,tlag, aXXd jiiav elg to av] but only one to the av." In the same tract, he says, " the second person of the verb tl/ju is an enclitic, as in Homer, alfiarog tig dyaOoio." How could Charax know this himself, or prove it to others, except the marks of accent were in the copy of Homer, to which he appeals ? The frequent mention made of accents in the syntax and fragments of Apollonius, who brings in- stances from Homer, Sophron, Alcman, Alcaeus, Aris- tarchus, Trypho, Heraclides, and other ancient authors, of some peculiarity in the tone of certain words, must likewise assure us of there being a visible notation of accent on those words. Strong deductions of this kind might be likewise made from some passages of Herodian and Chasroboscus : which, however, I omit as unneces- sary. From them, and later grammarians, particularly from Eustathius, it would be easy to produce numberless passages of the foregoing kind ; if, after having con- sulted the great grammarians of the first centuries, it were requisite to pursue the same subject through those of the following ages, as Hesychius, the several scho- liasts, Thomas Magister, &c. through whose remains the history of our present accentual system might, if it were necessary, be easily traced down to Lascaris and Gaza. To the time of these Greek exiles, from the age of Aristophanes himself, the signs of accentuation appear to have been well known, though not perhaps constant- ly applied. Accordingly, we find Demetrius Triclinius speaking of them, their nature, use, and invention, in the following manner.* " Those ancients, who wrote on * Oi waXat -ra Weji ypa^^ctTix^? fl-W- erv'K'ha.@Xiy zat T>jv <5rjo$ofav Jiaj/iVcuirxEiv Ta^a.[jLBvoi, trnfjCBia Tint irocJ>5? iTtmhtrav- £X ! "/ a£V • ="uM*?£v $e f*ot xa» ou arai^um fit; irapaiitiitixao-iv, I| aTv riv te Swa.aiv ttyrai, iitt^h 'ra ph e-roi^sXa, x.e.6' a.1- ■/.:<.. rr.v, »'f av stwsj Tif, Tr'Anma -rm ts xEi^uEva, oi^uiaf two; ^.l-viyii Suva- ACCENT AND QUANTITY. Ill grammatical subjects, wisely invented and delivered down certain marks, by which we might know the power and quality of syllables, and distinguish the true pronunciation of them. I mean syllables, not letters ; for letters, taken singly, partake not of this peculiar qua- lity : but compounded, and united with each other, and thus constituting syllables, they have certain powers and properties. Scholars, therefore, invented various signs: I mean accents, spirits, and the like; which they called 7rpocrw§t'eu, as conducive to the establishment of musical and common pronunciation." Montfaucon, in his Palaeographia,* says, there is no appearance of these marks in MSS. earlier than the seventh century ; and that in MSS. of the seventh and eighth, they are fre- quently misplaced, and often omitted. In some MSS. of the eighth and ninth centuries, they are accurately and properly placed. The use of them seems to have been universal, not only among grammarians, but Greek wri- ters in general, after the ninth century. Baillius de- clares, that he had carefully himself examined above eight hundred old MSS. in the library of the queen mo- ther of France, Catherine de Medicis, written by Greeks some ages before the taking of Constantinople, and ob- served the omission of these marks scarce in one. And those were the very times in which one might naturally expect more particular care would be taken by the [/.itu;' o-uXXiKfS-svTa Se k*1 oiov evoi&sW* bendi accentus et spiritus in septimum irfoi; aKknXa. not ret? a-vWaSai; affOTsXs- circiter a Christo nato saculum conj'et- cravTtt, iuvapsn; ts nvaj nal notormas ri posse videtur. cum semel eorum Ijje*. IwEvcuo-av J! aXka. te tmfx.sia, rovovq ususiuvectus est, alii accuratius, alii neg- Ugentius, pro cujusque arbitrio, accen- tual i7f>Go-&'fc'a? iirifjuta-av, ij wpo? tw otifr tus perscribebant. p. 223, 4. I am not x.a.1 t>iv ix^Mvne-jv tSv trvlXaBZv owTSXci- myself very solicitous about their ap- traf in Prrefat. ad Aristoph. pearanceor omission in the very oldest * Ante septimum seculum in solis and best copies, thinking that even if grammaticorum libris observatafuissevi' they had never appeared before the dentur. Qu<£ vero dicimus [sc. de Codd. fifteenth or sixteenth century, they vetust'nsimis quinti seitique sE\£i. The same regard for due quantity is seen in a long poem of iambics by the same author at the end of his thirteenth Chiliad, Trepl irai'Suv aywyrje : in a short poem of hexameters, and that followed by another of iambics. What is very particular, and at the same time a strong proof of what I have said above of Tzetzes' being ac^ quainted with true quantity, is, that in some introductory verses prefixed to his poem de liheris instituendis, he speaks with disapprobation and contempt of that bar- barous metre which then prevailed. Such he calls the metre of a mean, strolling, vulgar muse,* fiovorjg dyvp- tima. Several of this sort are men- tioned by Aldus, in the vocabulary prefixed to Statius ; and by Servius, in many parts of his notes on Virgil. Now, wherever we find a Latin acute, to that in our English pronunciation we commonly annex a long time, as will be considered more fully in another place. And thus we come to pro- nounce the words, Helena, idea. * Mus<£ circulalrich, Qua pedum concinnum non servat grei- sum. Quid vero quispiam artijicioso scriberet metro, Pedesque seriaret itbique, et ancipite$ litems, Et omnia subtiliter, prout decet, liina- ret, Cum aquali in honore sint artijiciosa et barbara, Et indocta velut docta dominentur ? Et h ypa^cn photo, IloSac ts rijpot iravra^ov, koX Sf^povovg, Kal TravTa Aottwc, tog \petov, airo&oi, "\otov $OKOi>vTtov TtyyiKtov /eta j3apj3apwi>, Kai tCjv ari^vtov tog aofptov Kparovjiivtov ', Kat ravra iroioig ; roT^ Sokouot. 7ravcro^)OtC' OvTto to koXov £^a7T£7rri) row j3tou, Owrto KarEicparjjcrtv 17 \^uoatorrjc. The vulgar corruption, which hef here laments, and the sense which the intelligent and learned had of it in the twelfth century, agrees nearly with the account of the Greek tongue three hundred years afterwards, given by Philelphus, who, in the fifteenth century, was at Con- stantinople, and seems to have made very particular in- quiries into the state of the language and pronunciation there. In a letter to Peter Perleo, in 1441, twelve years before the taking of that city by the Turks, he says, " that though he took pains to get what information he could, in regard to their language, from the schoolmas- ters there, he could meet with nothing satisfactory from them." But though he describes the depraved state of the Greek tongue among the common J inhabitants of that city, he tells his friend, that it still retained its ancient purity among persons§ of higher rank and learning, who * Ti or -n, is always short. He J In a letter written about two might have written, Aia riyap x. r. X. M. years before the taking of Constantino- t There is mentioned by Fabricius, pie, he speaks of linguam vulgar em Bibl. Graec. lib. v. c. 7. p. 48, a ma- earn, qua et k plebe erat depravata atque nuscript piece of this Tzelzes, er titled corrupta ob peregrinorum mercatorum- Versus Politici de pedibus et metris poe- que multitudinem, qui quotidie Constan- ticii. in Bibl. Vindob. et Cod. Barocc. tinopolim conftuebant, in urbemque re- 131. Fabric, in the same book, p. 17, cepti incolce, Grcecisque admixti, locutio- 18, mentions likewise a MS. of his, de nem optimam infuscarunt inquinarunt- omni versuum genere, et de versibus poli- que. Apud Hodium de Grec. illustr. tick MS. Reg. 84. A sight of this last p. 188. piece would probably clear up this § Graci, quibus lingua depravata non matter at once. sit, et quos ipsi turn sequimur, turn imita- \2 116 ESSAY ON use (says he) the same language, and speak in the same manner at this very time, as the Greeks did eighteen hundred years ago. As it is plain that Tzetzes was well acquainted with the true nature and use of accent, so it is evident, that those learned Greeks, who, both before and after the taking of Constantinople, came into the west, and there taught their own language (some of whom had the care of the* first editions of the old Greek authors that were mur, ita loquuntur vulgo hue etiam tem- pestate, ut Aristophanes cmnicus, ut "Eu- ripides tragicus, ut oratores omnes, ut historiographi, ut philosophi etiam ipsi, et Plato, et Aristoteles. Viri Aidici ve~ terem sermonis dignitatem atque elegan- tiam retinebaiit : in primisque ipsa no- biles mulieres, quibus cum nullum esset omnino cum viris peregrinis commer- cium, merus ille ac purus Grecorum sermo servabatur intactus. Idem in epist. ann. 1451- A pleasing and af- fecting picture this of the Greek court a year or two before its destruction. The same person, in a letter to Saxolus Pratensis, in 1441, after dis- suading him from going into Pelopo- nese, where there was nothing that de- served his regard, except Georgius Gemistus, advises him rather to visit Constantinople: illic enim et virieruditi sunt nonnulli, et culti mores, et sermo etiam nitidus. The particular mention made above by Philelphus, of the women in the By- zantine court keeping the purity of the Greek language, agrees well with an observation of Cicero, in his third book de Oratore, " Facilius mulieres incorruptam anliquitatem conservant, quod inultorum sermonis expertes, ea tenent semper qua; prima didicerunt." * Demetrius Chalcoudvles pub- lished Suidas, at Milan, 1499. John Lascaris was employed in editions at Rome. But more particularly Marcus Musurus, of Crete, under Leo X. in- spected the editions of many Greek books printed by Aldus and Blastus, particularly of Aristophanes, with the excellent scholia, Athenaeus, Plato, Hesychius (the last of which was printed from a single MS. copy, being the only one then found). Aldus often gratefully acknowledges the services of these Greeks. In a dedication of his to Musurus, prefixed to his Statius, he says, " Non est moris nostri fraudare quenquam sua laude : irao decrevimus omnes, quicunque mihi vel opera, vel inveniendis novis libris, vel commo- dandis raris et emendatis codicibus, vel quocunque modo adjumento fuerint, notos facere studiosis, ut et ill is de- beant, si mihi debent. — Atque utinam plurimos id genus haberemus reipubli- cse literariae benefactores, quauquam plurimos speramus futuros, non in Ita- lia solum, sed el in Germania et Gal- liis, atque apud toto orbe divisos Bri- tannos, in quibns habemus Grocinum sacerdotem, et Thoniam Linacrum vi- ros uiidecunque doctissimos ; qui olim Florentia? sub Demetrio Chalcondyle, viro clarissimo et gra?ca3 facundi* in- stauratore magnoque decore, grascis li- ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 117 printed, and in them placed their accentual marks as we now find them) that they, I say, considered accent, of which in all their books they published the characters, as distinct from true quantity, and not inconsistent with it. For it is certain at that time, when they used these accentual virgulce, they perfectly knew, and duly re- garded, the old pure quantity. This appears not only in their editions of the ancient Greek poets, the metre of which they were undoubtedly well acquainted with, but likewise in some of their own metrical compositions, in which the metre, regulated by true quantity, is as ac- curate as in the poems of their ancestors two thousand years before them. Of this the reader may see a proof in some* iambics of Theodore Gaza: in an epitaph on the famous cardinalf Bessarion, archbishop of Nice, written by himself; likewise in that of John Lascaris, composed by himself : AdaicapiQ aXXoScnrij yaiy IvucdrQaTO, yair^v Ovt£ \iriv %dvr]v, w %,ivz, fis/Kpo/hievog' Evpero fxei\i)(iriv. aXX d^Oerai, tlirsp 'A^atotc Ouk en \ovv \^ u Tropic iXsvOepiov. Lascaris externa terra jacet, haud tamen ipsi, De gente externa quod quereretur, erat : Nee piget hospitii. dolet hoc, quod Grcecia natis Amplius hand prcestat libera busta snis. I have produced these lines of Lascaris particularly, as they appear to me pathetically expressive of those tender emotions, naturally arising in the author's mind, from reflecting on the situation of himself (who was of teris incubuerunt. — Gaudeant igitur teras bonasque arles propagari nostra bonarum Hterarum studiosi. nam D. aetate desideraut, omnia suppeditabi- O. M. annuente, assiduisque laboribus mus, quibus in summos viros queant nostris, atque acadeinicorum nostro- evadere." rum auxilio, et caeterorum bonoruni * Hodius in vita Gaza?, p. 58. doctorumque liomiuum, qui bunas li- t Id. p. 151. 118 ESSAY ON the Greek imperial family) and of his country at the time of his death : Hie tibi mortis erant metes : domus alta sub Ida, Lymesi domus alta; solo Laureate sepulchrum. But to return to our argument. This pure quantity is seen also in some verses of his prefixed to the first edi- tion of the Scholia on Sophocles, at Rome [1518] (where he was appointed by Leo X. president of a Greek aca- demy, instituted chiefly with a view of giving accurate editions of the Greek authors,) and many other epi- grams of his now extant. The elegiac poem of Musurus, prefixed to Aldus' edi- tion of Plato, and addressed to * Leo X., for which that prince made him an archbishop, will likewise prove * This great pontiff (whose charac- ter, as far as it respects learning, may be thus briefly given in the words of his celebrated historian Paulus Jovius : " ad beneficentiam, ornandamque vir- tutem natus educatusque"), by his own polite taste and liberality, repaired in a great measure that loss which the arts had sustained from his famous prede- cessor Pope Gregory ; exciting among the scholars of that age a most won- derful spirit of recovering ancient, and improving modern literature ; which, by opening the old treasures of sound knowledge, and giving a freedom and vigour to men's thoughts, did eventu- ally, though not intentionally, contri- bute much to that great work, the re- formation of the western church. Thus Leo's encouragement of learn- ing was in its consequence not. more fortunate to that, than to the religious and intellectual liberties of Europe, and tended, in the end, to shake that throne, which lie had adorned with a spirit of urbanity, polite and judicious munificence, and general humanity, be- yond the example of any of his prede- cessors. The labours of Aldus, favoured by the patronage of this prince, and con- nected with the learned Greeks of his age, are astonishing: in a preface to Euripides, addressed by him to Deme- trius Chalcondyles, he says, " mille et amplius boni alicujus autoris volumina singulo quoque mense emittimus ex academia nostra." We must not here understand the word volumen, as Sir William Temple did, iu his writings on ancient learning, to signify what we call a volume,bat only a part, in a single roll, of a larger work. There were not 600,000 books in the Ptoleinaeanlibrary (as Sir William states the number), be- cause there were 600,000 volumes. The Greek Academy of Leo's insti- tution well answered the purposes of its excellent founder ; but as it flourish- ed under him, so it sunk with him. Upon his death, in 1521, it fell into a gradual decay ; from which Gregory XIII. did afterwards iu vain endea- vour to recover it. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 119 that the admission ofthe accentual marks, as they stand at present in our books, was not considered by those Grecian teachers of Greek, as inconsistent with the quantity and rhythm of their language : for they strictly observed the quantity, and yet retained those marks. That these Greeks did not look upon Trpoatj^ia and its notations as affecting quantity, I am certain likewise from the manner in which these things are treated by them in their grammars, * wherein they are constantly kept distinct. * They generally distinguish tliein, as Theodore Gaza has done in the fol- lowing parts of his third book : at the beginning of which he recounts the se- veral particulars, in winch a person might speak or write improperly : Qap- Gaglfav ti? Ixlyytrai, r> svJew, h TrXtcvar- fxa, n IvaKhayy, >i X?° v Vt * wjoirwo'ia, h ypa^n. "Ojoj wpoT'X^ia;- ITPOSIiiAl'A fj.lv ovv S5"Ti T&iri; Tioia, tij <{>a>vi]j iyy^af/.fj.d-rou Wfo? Ewpajviav tod oXod \oyov. Afterwards he says, 'icrri 5e to'voj, STriracrt; h avicriq, h fxicrorrig, c-DXX.a?oiv ivtyajviav lament, h fj.iv yag o^iia to E7rtT£Tayw.£vov i)(ti tod 9apTo; aioZv y.al xga-rot; a.xga-ro<;. p. 195. " Those are guilty of a barbarism in tone, who say, lav £ov\£i- /wai,and lav d^Sj'Aai : for they ought to say, Qov'hxfj.ai and a^tof/Mi. In the same manner they who say, axpSrov, with a circumflex on the penultima ; for they ought to say ax.pa.-rov, acnting it on the antepenultima, for the priva- tive a prefixed to dissyllable noun* 120 ESSAY ON Those great and deserving men, who came out of Greece into Italy in the fourteenth, * fifteenth, and the beginning of the sixteenth centuries, and restored the Grecian language which had been lost in the west for several ages; whose names and memories ought to be dear to every ingenuous admirer of that excellent lan- guage, have strangely been represented by some dispu- tants (merely to support a favourite system) as low, ig- norant persons, unacquainted with the purity of that tongue which they professed to teach, using themselves a barbarous language and pronunciation, and put, in short, on a level with the illiterate priests of the Archi- pelago, or those strolling Greeks, of whom f Rutgersius has given so ridiculous a description. At other times they are represented as men of some knowledge indeed, but of great pride, avarice, aud dishonesty, who knew better perhaps than they taught ; but, in order to raise their character and stipends, wilfully perverted the real propriety of their language, in order to make the attain- ment of it more % tedious and difficult to their scholars ; who might thereby think more highly of their masters' sagacity in explaining so intricate a thing to them, and be more ready to reward their great learning and trouble with extraordinary liberality. The former of these re- ending in oj, draws back the accent : of the ancient language, which was as xaxos ax.ay.ot;, 9ajTo? a6afro;, and, used in the liturgies of many churches therefore, xgaroq anpaToc." This obser- there : as the liturgies of St. Basil and valion agrees with what is cited above St. Clirysostora are to this day used in flora Apollonius, at the end of the fifth the churches of Greece. But although chapter. See also p. 203. of Valcken. in Calabria there might be then some on the accent of ivytvni;. remains of the language, yet a general * I say the fourteenth century, for it ignorance of it was spread over every was so early that Leontius Pilatus of other part of the wesl. Many instances Thessalonica taughl in Italy, where he of which are related in Zwinger. " Orat. was the master of Boccace, and lived de barbarie superiorum saecul." and in some time with Petrarch. Petrarch Chr. Becman. on the same subject, himself learnt Greek from Barlaamus, t Varioe. Led. lib. ii. c. 11. a Calabrian monk. In Calabria, which X Vid. Adolph. Mekerchi tract, de is part of the old Magna Gra?cia, there veteri et recta pronun. ling. Gr. p. remained even then some knowledge 21. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 121 presentations is at present clearly contradicted by fact : it is by no means certain that they all used, even in com- mon discourse, that barbarous language, the modern Greek, which is objected to them. From Philelphus' account of the learned men in Constantinople, just be- fore the taking of that city, we have good reason to think the language of scholars was far from being cor- rupt. But whatever might be the vernacular tongue, especially of those who were natives of the southern provinces of the Greek empire, they indisputably knew what was ancient Greek. How were they otherwise enabled to write such good grammars, prefaces to edi- tions of Greek authors, occasionally good verses, and many other literary pieces, some of which, in point of propriety of language, would not have disgraced their ancestors sixteen hundred or two thousand years before them? They may be invidiously called Graeculi, Graeca- nici, Semi-Barbari, Grasco-Turcse, Romano-Hellenistae, to vilify and sink their characters. But these are only words against facts. Their industry, their knowledge, and in many of them their taste and genius, entitle them to far different appellations. They were, indeed, sur- rounded and persecuted by barbarism, but seem not to have been tainted with a mixture of it. Their literature, notwithstanding the pollution with which it was threat- ened, escaped with purity : Doris amara suam non intermiscuit undam. As for the latter representation of their manners and general character, there is something so uncharitable, so illiberal and unworthy a scholar in this imputation, at the same time so base and ungrateful towards these Greek teachers, that it must raise some indignation in a good mind, to find learned men, in arguing against what they think corruptions of pure Greek, attribute them to these unfortunate scholars, and so turn that little Greek knowledge they have against those very persons from whom alone they originally derived it.* * A brief account of these illustrious his Pdyhistar. lib. iv. c. 6. " Nitni- Greeks is thus given by Morhofius in rum erant novem inter exules e Graeci* ESSAY ON The only thing in which some of these Greeks seemed to want a truly judicious discernment, is, that they Roman) profugos, qui praecipue Grae- cas literas in occidentem et septeutrio- nera intulernnt. Sunt vero illi, Bessario Cardinalis, Emannel Chrysoloras, De- metrius Chalcondflas (tot egregiis dis- cipulis clarus, Leon. Aretino, Franc. Barbaro, Fr. Philelpho, Bapt. Gaarino, et PoggioFlorenlino)Theod. Gaza, Joh. Argyropulus, Georgius Trapezuntius, Marc. Musurus, Michael Marullus, et J. Lascaris : qui postremus ex illustri Lascarina Iraperatorum familia oriun- dus, Medicaeam Bibliolhecam insigni Graecorum codicura thesauro ditavit; eumLegatusaLaurenlio MedicasoCon- stantinopolin ad Bajazetem missus om- nes Grsecias bibliothecas scrutaretur. Eodem Lascare auctore Leo X. Ponti- fexRomanus(Laurentii Medicaei filius) ipsam propemodum Graeciam in Italiam quasi in novam coloniam deduxit. Pue- ros enim ex tota Graecia, in quibus vis ingenii et bona indoles inesse videba- tur, cum suis praeceptoribus, Roman* evocavit, ut linguam Romani suam ipsis commodias traderent, vicissim- que suam illi Romauis. Addendus vero his novein Graecis Antonius Eparchus est, Corcyrensis, qui snperiore saccuio per aliquot annos Venetiis Grsecas lite- ras docuit, prosecutusque est Elegiacis versibusruiuam Constantinopolis : de- mum Corcyram regressus, inter suo- rum literatos consenuit ; is quoque centum codices Grajcos secum attulit venum Imperatori Carolo V. et Fran- cisco I. Galliarum regi oblatos. Prae- . terea e Graecis, quibus Graeca eruditio mullum debet, Hieron3'mus Spartiata, necnon Franciscus Portus, Cretensis, et jEmilius Francisci filius, memorandi sunt, omnes laboriosissimi : ut et Nico- laus et Zacharias Calliergi, Cretenses itidem, quorum utrique curamimpressi primo Magni Etymnlogici, posteriori insuper collectionem Scboliorum Theo- criti debemus." Morhoff might have mentioned several other editions Qf Zachary Calliergns, as the Pindar with scholia in 1515, and Phavorinus' Lexi- con in 152.3, with other books. Ema- nuel Chrysoloras, before he taught in Italy, was at London in the reign of Richard II. on an embassy from the emperor Joannes Palasologus, to desire his assistance, with that of other Christ- ian princes, against Bajazet. This he mentions himself in a letter, which he wrote from Rome to the Emperor. Pa- laeologus did afterwards himself, in per- son, come into England, on the same occasion, in the time of Henry IV: as appears from a MS. (cited by Dr. Hody) in the Lambeth library, entitled '•' Speculum Parvulorum," lib. v. c.30. On the subversion of the Greek em- pire, there were several mean illiterate Greeks scattered over the west and north of Europe. These being some- times accidentally met with by the scholars of Germany and our own coun- try, and appearing, as they really were, low ignorant persons, raised in stran- gers an unfavourable opinion of the Greek refugees in general. Accordingly we find some writers of Germany and England speaking of the exiled Greeks with great contempt: while those of France and Italy, who by their situa- tion were acquainted with the real cha- racters of those illustrious men, men- tioned above by MorhofT, hold them in the highest estimation. Several writers have given the his- tory of the revival of Greek learning : Christ, Rosa " de Turcismi fuga, etGr. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 123 * affected to depreciate Cicero's writings (though f others among them illustrated parts of them with comments, paraphrases, and translations). But this, perhaps, did not proceed from want of taste for such excellent com- positions, and may not improbably be accounted for by a general national prejudice, which there seems to have been through all ages among the Greeks against that great Roman. Dr. Middleton observes, that Dio Cas- sius's spleen and malignity against him might arise from a Grecian's envy to a man, who for arts and eloquence was thought to £ eclipse the fame of Greece. Cicero is known likewise to have provoked this enmity of the ling, incremento." C. F. Boerner " de altera migratione lit. Gnec. &c." Sam. Battier. " Orat. de lit. Graec. post in- ductam barbariem, &c." * Particularly Joan. Argyropulus. t Theod. Gaza ; Georg. Trapezunti- us, &c. X Among the Romans themselves Cicero's character was not at first pro- perly treated. He is never mentioned by Horace or Virgil : thongh the latter had an opportunity of doing it with ho- nour in a part of his poem, that conld hardly fail of bringing Cicero to his mind, where he is describing the shin- ing qualities of his countrymen, com- pared with those of other nations : Tn regere imperio populos, Romane, memento : Ha tibi erunt artes : pacique imponere morem, Parcere subjectis et debellare superbos. Here was a fair occasion of asserting the literary character of his country: but he gives it up, and rather than do justice to Cicero's character, which he could not but hold in the highest esti- mation, he chooses to do an injustice to Rome itself by yielding the superi- ority of eloquence to others : Eicudent alii spirantia mollius or a: Orabunt causas melius, ctelique meatus Describent radio, &c. ■ This silence, which itself is a great in- justice to so extraordinary a man, Dr. Middleton well accounts for, by shew- ing that his name could not but be ob- noxious to the court of Augustus, and the very mention of it be a satire on a prince who was so infamously concern- ed in his destruction. As this court prejudice subsided, his character rose : and following Roman writers seem to pride themselves in their illustrious countryman, and to be fond of consi- dering him in a comparative view with the Greeks. " Marcus Cicero," says Paterculus, " ut vitaclarus ita ingenio maximus, qui effecit, ne quorum anna viceramus, eorum ingenio vinceremur." And Pliny, " Facundise Latiarumque literarum parens — omnium triumpho- rum lauream adepte majorem, quanto plus est ingenii Romani lerminos in tantum promovisse, qnam imperii." Hist. 7. 30. Another says, " Demos- thenes tibi pneripuit, ne esses primus orator ; to. illi, ne solus." Apnd Hieronym. 124 ESSAY ON Greeks against him, by taking every opportunity through- out his* works of drawing a comparison between the abilities and genius of his own countrymen and of the Greeks : the latter of whom he allows to have quicker inventive talents than the Romans, but to be inferior to them in solidity and real strength of parts. In answer to these comparisons of Cicero, it has been remarked, that Plutarch seems to have written his Lives partly with a view to confute what Tully has endeavoured to prove in almost all his prefaces, the superiority of the Romans over the Greeks ; and, for this end, to have * In many parts of his writings he speaks with some contempt of the Greeks. " Graecorum doctrina perridi- cula." de Orat. " Graeci fallaces et le- ves, et diuturna servitute ad nimiam assentationem eruditi. Graeci omnes vias pecuniae norunt, omnia pecuniae causa faciunt. Graecorum familiaritates parum fideles sunt, ad Qu.fratr. Homo levitate Graccus, crudelitate Barbarus. pro Flac. Graecorum luxuria et levi- tas." ibid. And even their language he will not allow to be so full and copious as the Roman : " ita sentio, et saepe diaserui, LaLinam linguam non modo non inopem, ut vulgo putarenl, sed Io- cupleliorem etiam esse, quam Graj- cam." de Fin. I. iuit. Which is con- trary to the general acknowledgment of the other good Roman writers them- selves, from Lucretius, who complains of egestas lingua: and patrii sermo7iis more than once, down to Muretus, who saj's, " in Grteco sermone, qui Roma- no immensuin quantum copiosior est.'' Var. Lect. xv. 20. (See more to this purpose in that elegant and judicious writer, v. i. xix. 4. and P. Petit. Mis- cell. Observ. iv. 5.) Many other expres- sions of the foregoing kind are scat- tered up and down in Cicero's works : who yet, probably, did not mean always to reflect on the Greeks in general, but those of a particular profession or cha- racter, whom his subject brought to his thoughts. In his orations, re- flections of this kind might be thrown out to invalidate the credit of an evi- dence. In his rhetorical and philoso- phical dialogues, the person who speaks introduces several things to serve his own purpose, very foreign from Cice- ro's own sentiments. But, perhaps, his Greek readers did not always make these distinctions, and applied to them- selves, what was not intended as a na- tional censure when it came from Cice- ro's pen. Certain it is, that in many parts of his works, particularly in his Epistles to Atticus, he discovers a strong passion for Greek literature ; in order to gratify which, he seems very desir- ous, with the assistance of Atticus and his Greek correspondents, to make a good collection of books in that lan- guage; which, if he could complete, supero Cramtm dcritiis (says he) atque omnium lucos et prata contemno. Ad Attic, i. 4. He speaks likewise, in many places, impartially and honour- ably of the Greeks, as men from whom the Romans received " philosophiaru et omnes ingetiuas discipliuas." deFin. But a single censure will by some per- sons be remembered long after a hun- dred compliments are forgotten. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 125 chosen out the most artful parallels. Some such national spirit might operate in Argyropulus against Cicero's works. It can hardly be any other way explained, how some of these latter Greeks, who had a relish, in com- mon with all other men of taste and discernment, for the other good * Roman writers, should yet so particularly except to Cicero. But so the fact was. And the same spirit was transfused into some of their scholars ; among whom was our learned countryman, Linacer, physician to Henry VIII., who was for some time a student in Greek at Florence, and appeared afterwards among the foremost of the Anti-Ciceroniani. And yet, what is very particular in Linacer, though his professions were against Cicero, his practice was with him; and his books de Latini sermonis structura have more examples of proper and beautiful diction from Cicero than from any other Roman writer. As many parts of the literary history of these times serve to illustrate some characters, the vindication of which is much connected with my argument; the reader will, I hope, on that account consider, what has been here introduced on that subject, as less foreign and di- gressive. What has been said of those Greek exiles retaining and using the accentual marks, may be said likewise of those very learned and eminent men of Italy, France, Germany, Holland, and our own country, the successors of those Greeks above-mentioned, in spreading the knowledge of that incomparable language over the west; who, from the time of Gregory of Tifernum to the present, have, by their lexicons, commentaries, and editions of ancient authors, been smoothing the rugged- ness of the road to ancient literature, and done posterity a service, which is ill repaid by some persons at pre- sent in disputing their authority, and questioning the propriety of the means made use of by them to convey to the world the knowledge of that language in all its * Lcoulius Pilatus, though a man of a saturnine disposition, was extrava- gantly fond of Terence. 126 ESSAY ON purity. But let us not hastily aud inconsiderately re- ject, what they, our superiors in Greek knowledge, have carefully and faithfully adjusted for us : tune studio disposta fideli, Intellecta prius quam sint, coTciempta relinquas. They certainly were thoroughly convinced of the ex- pediency and even necessity of these marks. If they, and the first printers of Greek, had not been satisfied of this, they would not have clogged an infant art, as print- ing then was, with needless impediments, when it was encumbered with so many other unavoidable difficulties of its own. The destruction of the Greek empire in the fifteenth century, which involved the Greek language in its fall, naturally raises in our minds some reflections on the par- ticular circumstances observable in the history of it: those, I mean, which regard its extent and duration. First, when we consider its extent, we see it, under the successors of Alexander, spread far beyond the bounds of the Greek provinces, particularly about the time when visible accentuation was first introduced. It was then the Romans began to pay great attention to it, when literature made* its first appearance among them in Greek. Q. Fabius, and L. Cincius, two of the early Roman historians, quoted so often by Dionysius, wrote in f that language. Hannibal % himself wrote * " Anliquissimi doctorum.qui iidem sterhuis, therefore, properly censures etPoetaeet Oratores serai-graeci erant Lucian for representing Hannibal as (Livium et Ennium dico : quos utraque learning Greek for the first lime in the lingua domi forisque docuisse aduo- shades below, not, ad Luc. torn. i. p. turn est) nihil atnplius quam Giasce 381. Hannibal's knowledge, however, interpretabantur." Sueton. de illustr. of tbat language was contrary to the Gram, laws of his country ; for some years t D\onys. Halic. Antiq. Rom. lib. i. before his lime the Carthaginians had p. 5. Sjlb. "oi|3io?, Aivxto; moni studeret ; ne aut loqui cum hoste KiyKio;. These two are cited afterwards aut scribere sine interprete posset.'' very frequently. Just. xx. 5. Alex, ab Alexand. torn. i. p. $ Corn. Nep. in \iu. c. 1j. Hem- 529. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. Vll what he composed, in Greek ; as did afterwards Juba,* his countryman, who is recorded to have been a very voluminous writer, and by what we know of his charac- ter and abilities, probably a very good one. All the ages of Rome, down to the time of Cicero, produced hardly one Latin f historian. He himself wrote in Greek the history of his own consulate, with several other % pieces : some for his private exercise and improvement in composition, and some for publication. The Greek Epistles of Brutus, and history written by Lucullus, are well known from § Plutarch. About a hundred and fifty years after the invention of accentual signs, the language became almost general. " Graeca (says || Ci- cero in his defence of his Greek friend) leguntur in om- nibus fere gentibus ; Latina suis finibus, exiguis sane, continentur." And, therefore, several % Roman authors, in order to make their writings more public, composed them in Greek, even while they belonged to the imperial court at Rome. In like manner Josephus and Philo preferred Greek to their own language, not only as more beautiful, but, probably, as more general too. This com- mon use of Greek must be owing principally to the ex- cellence of the language itself. We have seen, indeed, a modern language so very widely extended, as to seem almost to promise itself an universality in Europe : I mean the French. But this has been owing, not only to its own intrinsic merit, to its delicacy and perspicuity, which it undoubtedly possesses in a high degree ; but to the extent likewise of the power and political influence of its nation. This was far from being the case with the Greek tongue, which had none of these advantages. * 'EXhwmv toTj no} dam Mascenatis laus erat Grace Lati- neque scire, cum Romas ea tempestate quivis Senatoris Equitisve Clius, imo et de plebe innumeri, libertini etiamet servi, Gra?ce Ioquerentur." Ad Ilorat. Cam. iii. 8. v. 5. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 129 The wide extent of it was without doubt owing to other causes, besides its native excellence ; to the com- mercial genius* of the people that spoke it ; to the num- ber of colonies, which Grecian cities at different timesf sent out. One city alone, Miletus, according to^: Seneca and ||Pliny, sent forth, at different times, no less than seventy colonies. The great numbers that came into Italy, have been mentioned in a foregoing chapter. Mar- seilles is well known to have been founded in this man- ner, which, in §Cicero's time, seems to have been hardly inferior to Athens itself in the cultivation and improve- ment of the civil and polite arts ; and by ^[Strabo is considered as the great seat of learning in the west. The Gauls in general, according to **Caesar, made use of Greek letters. We learn from tfPl m y> that the Greeks settled likewise in Spain. No one is ignorant how numerous they became in several parts of Africa, and over the JJeast, under the successors of Alexander. And from the intercourse between the people of Mar- seilles and Britain, as mentioned by Strabo, and between the British and Gallic Druids, as related by Caesar, we have some reason to think that our own island was not ignorant of the Greek tongue, and that what Camden, Meric Casaubon, and others, have said on this subject, is not altogether without foundation. Erasmus j|||de- clares, " veterem Britannicae gentis linguam, quae nunc Vallica est, satis indicare earn aut profectam a Graecis, aut certe mixtam fuisse."§§ Camden accounts for this * See Dr. Taylor's Elements of Civil |||| In Adag. 'Pohoi tw Sve-iav. Law, p. 510. et seq. where much light §§ And thus Conrad Heresbachius : is thrown on this subject. " Britannornm pars, quae Cornubia di- t Lipsiusde rect. pronunt. ling. Lat. citur, reliquias Grsecas linguae profite- c. 3. tnr.'' And immediately after : " Quid X Consolat. ad Helv. c. 6. dicam de Germania nostra, in cujus || Lib. v. c. 29. lingnainnumera vestigia Graecas linguae § Orat. pro Flacco. remanent? et nos observavimas ali- H Lib. iv. quando aliquot centnrias vocabulorum, ** Bell. Gall. lib. vi. c. 13. quae mere Grncca sunt." Ex Orat. apud tt Lib. iv. c. 20. H. Steph. Th. Gr. i. p. 13. XX Senee. ad Helviam. c. 6. 130 ESSAY ON from the immediate commercial connexion between some Greeks and the Britons ; Meric Casaubon, from those people who, in the early ages, came over hither from the north-east parts of Europe, connected remotely with the Greeks and their language, and by their settle- ment here transmitted it to us. Which two suppositions are consistent with each other, and may in part be both equally true. As the Greek tongue was so extensive at the time of the introduction of Christianity into the world, the first promulgers of the gospel did perhaps, for this reason, publish it in Greek as the best human means to facilitate the propagation of it. This extent of that language cannot fail of raising it somewhat in our estimation; but much more must it claim our regard, when we add to that the consideration of its surprising stability and permanency. To reckon only from Homer's* time to the taking of Constantinople, it had subsisted 2350 years. But we may fairly, in our account, carry it much higher. For though such a writer as Homer most probably improved it, yet we may suppose, that he found it in no very rude state. A fine language does not grow up to any tolera- ble degree of perfection in one generation: its improve- ments must be successive and gradual. And therefore we may believe the Greek was no contemptible language before Homer's time. But its continuation *only from his age for 2350 years is an eminent proof that there was something intrinsically good and vital in the principles of it, which could support itself for such a length of time, through such various revolutions in the political state of its nation. Ergo non hy ernes Mam, non flabra, neque imbres Convellunt : immota manet, multosque per annos Multa virum volvens durando scecula vincit. * This is placing Homer's age a hundred years lower than Petavius has done. Doctrin. Temp. ix. c. 30. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 131 Turn fortes late ramos, et brachia tendens Hue ilhic, media ipsa ingentem sustinet ambram** Some persons have argued from these revolutions to prove, that the language, through a course of them, must have been greatly corrupted. But matter of fact, in this case, is more powerful than the most refined spe- culations. And the actual corruption of it has not yet been proved. It undoubtedly, in such a course of years, underwent many alterations. But every altera- tion is not a corruption. An addition is an alteration : and additions to it were necessarily made, through a series of ages, as they are continually to all languages, from new ideas, which must have new terms, in laws, arts, and sciences, and the general improvements in civil life. Many single words are by this means used in writers of the lower empire, which were unknown to their predecessors. After Hadrian, when the Roman language began to droop, there were several Greek translations of Latin authors ; and from those versions probably many Roman words became Greek. Some of these appear in Hesychius : what can Aj3ac be, which he explains ayac, but Habes ; and A/3iv, which he ex- plains IXdrrjv, but Abietem? Mr. Wetsteinf has observed that the Greeks took many words, not used by their heathen ancestors, from the septuagint and Greek Tes- tament; and the Byzantine lawyers, as appears in the Basilic a, % introduced many' from the Roman insti- tutes. But though the vocabularies of the tongue were by this means enlarged, yet the language itself was not so properly changed (much less corrupted) as ren- dered more copious, its genius in the mean time continu- * Those however, who have called num, composed in the ninlh and tenth it the most durable of all languages, centuries, in emulation of Justinian, are certainly mistaken : it is in this re- by Basilius Macedo, Imp. and his sons, spect inferior to the Hebrew and Syriac. Leo and Constantine, for the use of Dr. Bentl. on Phal. 404. the eastern empire, out of the several t Orat. i. de C rase. ling. Greek versions of Justinian's corpus, J Called likewise Jus Grczco-Roma- and other books of law. K 2 132 ESSAY ON ing the same. The same terminations, same inflexions, same syntaxis, and nearly the same general synthesis, are seen in the Greeks of the lower empire, as in those who long preceded the Christian era. And a person from reading Xenophon, may turn to Eustathius, who wrote in the twelfth century, that is, fifteen hundred years after him, without being shocked with any corrupt alte- ration in the general manner of the language. Nay, much later, in Georgius Gemistus, the Byzantine Plato- nic, commonly called Pletho (who attended the council of Florence in 1439) the language need not raise any great disgust, except in a very fastidious reader. No one, who is at all acquainted with the Byzantine history, can be ignorant of the great number of learned and good writers on various subjects, some of whom adorned every age of the Greek empire.* Dr. Taylorf observes, " that there is less disagreement between the Greek of the first ages and of the last, than there is between two Roman authors of the same century : and that we now have many authors in Greek, who wrote with great purity and elegance, after the Roman language became in a manner barbarous." Whether this purity continued in civil and popular use, or only in the writings of the learned (as Dr. Bentleyf thinks) who maintained it by imitating the old authors, does not much affect our agreement; if it did continue, that is all which concerns this question. They who take it for granted that the language of the lower empire was corrupt, and say it necessarily must have been so from the incursions of barbarians, as the Roman tongue suffered and was destroyed by the north- ern invaders, argue from one case to another that is very different. The language of the Romans ceased to * " An dicenms, florente virisdoctis co-Romanum, Syuodica, et Nomoca- Constantinopoliperiisselinguam? Quot nona Grsecorura, et similia scripta de- in re historica, in doctrina canonica, cantata turpiterignoret." Westen. Orat. in variis scientiisclaros auctores dede- p. 17". rit ilia astas, nemo est qui ignoret, nisi t Elcm. of Civil Law, p. 500. corpns Historiae Byzantina-:, Jus Grae- J Dissert, on Pha!. p. 405, 406. ' ACCENT AND QUANTITY. U*3 subsist as a living one, because their metropolis itself was taken, their civil polity subverted, and the empire itself destroyed. In this general ruin the language could not well survive. But this was not the case with the Greeks. Their European enemies indeed from the north-west, and those of Asia from the south-east, did certainly, for several ages, exceedingly harass them, and sometimes threaten their capital. But though they were victorious in several attempts on the Greek provinces (where they probably infected the language) yet the empire, however weakened, still* upheld itself, the capital was considerable, having a regular and magnifi- cent court, and a succession of learned persons, who maintained the language in its ancient state. Though Zonaras may perhaps be suspected of court flattery in saying that Anna Comnena, who wrote this history of her father Alexius Comnenus, used a language aicpifiwg aTTiKit,ovaav, yet Vossius, Dufresne, Peter Possin, and others, who highly commend her style and eloquence, cannot be supposed to speak of her in so favourable a manner from any such motive. But though the style of this learned princess, and of some other Byzantine writers, may not deserve all the commendations that have been bestowed upon it by certain critics, yet cer- tainly it is far from barbarous or contemptible. And thus it continued, till the Turks made a complete and finalf conquest of that empire, by the reduction of Constanti- * Three of the principal causes, irhich Henninius assigns as destructive of a language, did not at this time affect the Greek. Corrumpuntur et mu- tantur Ungues, aut defectu erudkorum, qui istam linguam excolant, atque per Philosophies Literaturesque traditionem perenni memories consecrent : aut in- ducla lingua dominatrice apud Gentem devictam : aut eicisa gente, cui hesc vel ilia lingua est familiaris, interiisse quo- que linguas est observation. Sect. 143. t The language could not suffer much alteration from the removal of the Greek court and seat of empire, from Constantinople to Nice, and then to Adrianople, that is from one part of the empire to another not far dis- tant : this happened in the thirteenth century, during part of which the French or Latin emperors were in possession of Constantinople, continu- ing there for about sixty years, till the return of the Greek court nnder Mi- chael Palaeologus. 134 ESSAY ON nople : then the language, as a living one, sunk with it, but not before. Nor is there any circumstance in the reason of things to make us imagine it should be greatly depraved before that, though somewhat altered. At least, the pronunciation of it seems to have been hardly changed at all among the learned, since the rules of it, as far as it regards tone, given by the latest Greeks, do well agree with those that are given by writers of the earlier ages. " For what we have upon the subject of Greek accents, according to the present system, is con- veyed to us by the Greek scholiasts and grammarians, who copy one another ; and all seem plainly to derive their doctrine from the grammarians of the schools of Alexandria ; many of whom lived before the times of Antoninus and Commodus ;"* those very gram- marians, to whom Vossius refers us for pure pronuncia- tion. But Dr. G. is of opinion that the pronunciation not only of the latter ages, which we have been considering, was corrupt, but even of those which are generally reckoned pure. And he looks for the origin of this corruption in an age very remote, even that of Alexan- der, and opens it with saying,f " it is no improbable conjecture, to suppose, that a corrupt manner of pro- nouncing some words in the Greek language was occa- sioned by Alexander's expedition into Asia. His army might have learned to accent some words according to the manner of the Asiatics." But whatever weight of probability this hypothesis may have with Dr. G., to me I must acknowledge it appears one of the most improbable conjectures I ever met with. Alexander is supposed to have carried about 35,000 Gre- cians with him on his Asiatic expedition. Now it is well known, that an army in a foreign country mix very little in converse with the natives of it, and keep up only a more close intercourse among one another. And accord- ingly the Macedonian army probably attended little to * Treatise against Accents, p. 158. t Ibid, p, 128. ACCENT AND QUANTITY 105 any thing respecting the Asiatics, but what was of a military nature : and least of all to their language. And even, if they had attended to that, the tone is the last thing of a foreign language that is caught. We find that persons, who are long resident in a strange place, and have there leisure, inclination, and patience, diligently to pursue the study of its language, do seldom attain the right pronunciation of it ; applying frequently the tone of their own language to the foreign one, but very sel- dom the tone of the foreign one to their own. Alexan- der's men therefore, circumstanced as they were, were surely not likely to transfer much of the Asiatic tone into their own Greek. But even suppose they did, out of these 35,000, it is hardly probable that 10,000 ever reached Europe again. And could 10,000 men, scat- tered over Macedonia, and the northern parts of Greece, with a few corrupt tones, influence the pronunciation of Greece in general, especially of the southern parts, where the purity of the language was principally con- cerned? Did we find, upon the return of our army out of Flanders at the end of the last war, that our national tongue received any tincture Of the French, German, or Flemish ? Or are we likely, at the end of this war, to perceive any alteration in the English accent, though we have sent out, during the course of it, three times the number of Alexander's army on different services, to countries more various and remote ? We shall not, I dare engage, be able to mark the least trace of corrup- tion in that respect, imported from the Iroquois, Chero- kees, West or East Indians, or Germans. But if the Greek language did " receive a wound" by Alexander's* expedition, it certainly pretty well reco- * If the Greek tongue had been tire to posterity, the vast crowds of much affected by Alexander's con- Ihose that would have come to court quests, it must have been in a manner from the furthest parts of the monar- different from that supposed by Dr. G. chy, would have made the same alte- " If he had returned out of Asia, and ration of the language there, as after- placed the seat of his empire in some wards happened at Rome." (Dr.Bevtl. city of Greece, and transmitted it en- Dissert, on Phul. p. 403.) The altera- 13(> essay on vered from it soon afterwards. For under his succes- sors, particularly at Alexandria, some of the best Greek writers, whose remains we now have, are known to have flourished. But although their language be pure, Dr. G. thinks the pronunciation of it " must* have been greatly corrupted. And that upon P. JEmilius' conquering Greece, the genuine pronunciation and accentuation of the Greek language must have been farther corrupted." How miserably then must it have been vitiated, when Dionysius of Halicarnassus, wrote a hundred and fifty years after this; whose notice however it escaped, as it has indeed the knowledge of most of his readers 1 But if it was so depraved at that time, by a parity of reason, it must have been perfectly barbarous even in the first ages after Christ, before it " received an addi- tional wound by the irruption of the Goths into Greece in the third century ."f How sore that, and some fol- lowing wounds were, I leave to others, with the help of Wolfang, Lazius, to explain ; remarking only this, that after " its last wound, under Heraclius, at the begin- ning of the seventh century,"Jit appears to have lived in a tolerably sound state, at least in Constantinople, for above eight hundred years. I cannot leave these lower ages of the Greek em- pire, to which we are now brought, without remarking the injustice of several reflections that have been thrown on the state of their literature. Some persons, who have formed an imperfect notion of the dark ages (as they are called) conclude that no remains of taste, genius, and sound erudition, could possibly be found in a Byzantine court, much less in Thracian and Bithy- nian monasteries. Concerning the learning, however, tion in tbe language at Rome, which provement. Dr. Bentley here means, was within * Treatise against Accents, p. 129, the .space of about a hundred years 130. from Duilius to Terence; and which t Treatise against Ace. p. 130. therefore was not a corruption, but im- % Ibid. 132. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 137 and real merit of some even among the Greek monks (which is now become a term of contempt) I am not ashamed to own myself of the same opinion with* Vavassor, who appears to me to have defended their cause with judgment as well as eloquence. But if their literary abilities be still disputed, or despised, let them at least not be deprived of the merit of having preserved with some care and fidelity the most valuable writings of antiquity. For certainly to these monks it is principally * Lib. de Epigr. xvi. Equidem facere non possum, quin indigner, siquando in scripta incido, aut sermonibus et querelis intersum eorum, qui in cactus hosce homi- num piorum simul ac doctorum invehan- tur, tanquam in perditores elegantiorum artium et liberalium studiorum : quibus tamen, si verum qucerimus, artes et studio, et optimum quodque literarum, incolumi- tatem, salutem, ac vitam quodammodo debeant, &c. See also Fabric. Bibl. Graec. lib. iii. c. 28. Mr. Home has shewn us, that the general reproach of ignorance, with which the mouks of those ages in our own island have been loaded, hath as little foundation in truth. " The clergy of those times (he says) preserved the precious lite- rature of antiquity from a total extinc- tion. Their writers are full of allusions to the Latin classics, espe- cially the poets. There seems also in those middle ages to have remained many ancient books, that are now lost. Malmesbury, who flourished in the reign of Henry I. and King Stephen, quotes Livy's Description of Cae- sar's Passage over the Rubicon. Fitz- Stephen, who lived in the reign of Henry II., alludes to a passage in the larger History of Sallust. In the ool- leclion of letters, which passes under the name of Thomas a Becket, we see how familiar all the ancient history and ancient books were to the more ingenious and dignified churchmen of that time." History of England, vol. ii. p. 440. MorhofiF, in his Polyhist. lib. iv. 7, says, that Robert Grosthead (or Capito, as he is otherwise called) Bishop of Lincoln, did in the thirteenth century translate all Suidas into Latin, that is within two centuries after Sui- das himself wrote. Bale mentions this, from Matt. Paris, de Script. Angl. Cent. iv. p. 306, and speaks of an- other unpublished work of the same Bishop, by the name of Animadversiones in Suidam. It would perhaps be pay- ing too great a compliment to the old Bishop to suppose there was in his book the same knowledge and skill in Greek, which we find in one lately pub- lished with a like title : but certainly a man, quite ignorant of the language, would hardly think of translating or commenting on that author. Conrad Heresbach says (I know not, indeed, on what authority) that Charlemagne gave audience to Greek ambassadors, and answered them in their own lan- guage: and that the Emperor Otho II. in his Apulian expedition against the Saracens and Greeks, being surprised and taken by the enemy, escaped out of their hands, imposing on them by his readiness and fluency in the use of Greek. (Orat. apud H. Steph. Th. Gr. torn. i. p. 13.) 138 ESSAY ON owing, that we now have any good Greek author extant. It was their piety, not their ignorance, which induced them to bum most of the old Lyric Poems, on account of their impurity. This loss a Christian scholar will hardly object to them. If, however, he does, he should still remember to thank them rather for what they saved, than reproach them for what they destroyed. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 139 CHAP. VII. The popular objection considered against the present accentual marks, on account of their inconsistency with true quantity. Some errors of Dr. G. noted. The true nature of the acute tone stated and explained. I HAVE above allowed the use of our marks, accord- ing to the modern system (as it is invidiously called) as not being injurious to quantity. But a heavy charge is brought on this head against them for corrupting it ; the acute causing any short syllable on which it falls, to be pronounced long by those who attend to these apices, and regulate their reading by them. I acknowledge the fact, and am sorry for this misapplication of the mark ; but think it unreasonable that an imputation brought against the abuse of any thing should be fixed on the thing itself, and the proper use of it. This abuse is en- tirely our own, owing to the nature of our common Eng- lish pronunciation. But Dr. G. goes further, and says, that the acute, not only in our practice and application of it, but in its own nature and universal practice gives length to a sound. He here speaks out plainly, and freely declares (what I find to be the real* ground of many persons' objections to accentual marks) that he looks upon the power of an acute tone and long time to be the same; that he has in short confounded in his mind the ideas of these two very distinct things. Which * When they complain of accent all their instances singly and distinctly, contradicting quantity, and give an in- would be not only tedious, but altoge- stance of it, it is always in a word, that ther unnecessary : for if the doctrine of has an acute joined with a short sylla- this chapter be true, it is a full and ble. And when they say, that the ac- satisfactory answer to what is con- cent of the ancients was agreeable to tained in two hundred pages of the quantity, they exemplify it in words, writings of those who object to our wherein they suppose the acute was present system, joined with a long time. To answer 140 ESSAY ON confusion hath occasioned numberless errors, both in his writings and those of others, on this subject. He asserts then, " that* it cannot be said, that accents only denote an elevation of the voice. For no such elevation can subsist and be made sensible in pronouncing, whatever may be done otherwise in singing, without some stress or pause, which is always able to make a short syllable long." In answer to this, I will allow that such an ele- vation doth not commonly subsist in the English pronun- ciation without a prolongation too. But I affirm, that it hath subsisted ; and doth subsist at present in the voice of the Scots, and of many persons in England. It did most indisputably subsist in the Roman pronuncia- tion, except Dr. G.'s authority is to supersede Quincti- lian's. Let us try this case in some particular word be- tween these two grammarians. We will take the word amas. Quinctilian tells me, in as clear a manner as pos- sible, that the penultima is here acuted : Dr. G. says, that an acute lengthens as well as elevates; consequently, that the former syllable of amas is long. But that it was really short and always pronounced so by the Ro- mans, I have the strongest evidence such a thing is ca- pable of, from the concurrent usage of the best Roman authors who wrote in metre. Again ; let us try this in a Greek instance, Atyt, Ae- ytTE, XeyojLteva. We are assured that each of these syl- lables was a short one, pronounced by the old Greeks with a measure of time less than that of long syllables in words joined with these in a sentence. We are as- sured likewise by Cicero, Quinctilian, and Dr. G. that one of the syllables in each of these words is, and must be, elevated. Place this necessary acute on what sylla- ble you please, you must join it with a short one. Con- sequently, an acute accent is as consistent with a short time, as with a long one. That this is not readily con- sistent in our practice, I allow. But what is that to the real existence and nature of the thing itself? An argu- * Treatise against Greek Accents, p. 68. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 141 ment drawn from our own practical inexperience of a thing against its possible existence, is almost too trifling to be refuted. A West Indian's argument against frost and snow, as impossible and unnatural, is of this kind. But let us see on what reasoning and authority this extraordinary position of Dr. G. concerning the nature of an acute is grounded. " Every accent (says he*), if it is any thing, must give some stress to the syllable upon which it is placed : and every stress that is laid upon a syllable, must necessarily give somef extent to it. For every elevation of the voice implieth time, and * Treatise against Accents, p. 67. t In a bad translation of Lascaris' Grammar, tovo; iv, he says, is long, on account of the acute. An admirable expositor this of a writer on metre! But he is as little consistent with him- self, as with truth: for this very verse he cites afterwards (p. 92.) as an in- stance of the (usi'oufoj, i. e. of an hexa- meter ending with an iambic, and then the first vowel of ctyiv is to be isiiort. It is not my business here to solve the difficulty which appears in the metre of this line. It certainly was under- stood as a miurus by Athenajus (lib. xix. p. 632.) and by Terentianus Maurus, whose authority in a case of this kind is superior to that of most, if not ali, writers. He, speaking of the miurus, alludes to this verse of Homer, and translates it so as to give the same in- stance in Latin: Versus Homericus Ausonio resonans ita vi6do : Quern fAtlougov Achdica gens vocitare snlitu est. Attoniti Troes viso serpente pavl- tant. He describes the miurus thus, Dactylici Jinem versus si claudat iam- bus. And then exemplifies it, Auribus acciderit novitas inopina, melius Versus ut hie resonare potest, ita si cecineris : Ite domum saturas, venit Hesperus, ite satura?, &c. It seems that one of the oldest Roman writers, Livias Andronicus, used this kind of metre. Livius Me vetus, Graio cognomine, s&ce Inserit Inonis versu puto tale docimen : Prazmisso Heroo subjungit namque Hymnum quando chorus festo canit ore Trivtts. Putsch, p. 2425. 142 ESSAY ON time is quantity." And these propositions he strengthens by a passage from a Greek MS.* ovre \povog x w P^ tovov evpiaKerat, ovre tovoq xpig \povov. Now, in answer to this, it may be asked, Is every time a long- time, and every quantity a long quantity ? or does yjpovog signify a long time any more than a short one ? if it does not, this far-fetched testimony proves nothing for our au- thor's purpose. And, indeed, \p6vog signifies no parti- cular measure of time, but expresses the general abstract idea of it, and will signify either a long or short measure, according to the qualifying word with which it is joined. Thus much for his application of the latter part of this sentence. Let us examine now the former, ovte \povog ■\uyp\g tovov 8iiptijjv})v zvovripav Troiovp-tv."^ If DionysiusJ * " Neqne Tempus sine Tono repe- in the same MS. speaks the language of ritur, neque Tonus sine Tempore." all the other good grammarians on this Porphyr. itii\ ireog-xtiiai;. MS. Bib. Reg. subject. "Eo-r« to'voj (says he) i«riVavrjv /laKpoT^pav instead of ivpvripav, it might have been some confirmation of the Dr.'s asser- tion. But till it can be shewn, that tvpvg wide or broad, and ficacpbg long, are the same, the citation proves no- thing in favour of his argument. The truth is, tvpvrriQ relates to a measure of the voice, totally distinct from the height and length of it, though joined with them both, as hath been shewn above in my first chapter, and may be seen explained more fully in Scaliger's book there referred to. This, therefore, by no means dis- proves the consistency of an acute tone with a short time. The possibility and real existence of an acute and short quantity together, is remarked in the Welch lan- guage, as may be seen in some annotations relating to the pronunciation of it, in Bishop Gibson's edition of Camden's Britannia, communicated to him by Mr. Lhyyd : they are there prefixed to the account of South Wales ; among which is a mark given, shewing the ac- cent only on a short vowel.* When Quinctilianf says, that the words Olympus and Tyrannus, had the middle syllable acuted, because the Roman language did not here admit the accent on the first short syllables, when the long ones immediately without any variation, transcribed by saspect and am almost certain that the Gaza, in a passage before cited. The negation is omitted in the former part whole of this passage of Diony sius, for f the latter sentence, and that it should which Dr. G. refers us to the MSS. in De rea ^ « acu t us in correplis non sem- the Medicean library, may be seen at per." the end of Mr. Wetstein's dissertation. f Lib. i. c. 5. in that part of the * There is a passage in Diomedes on chapter, where he is considering the this head, which is, I believe, cor- Roman language as derived from the rupted. Not that I desire to alter it, Greek, or otherwise connected with it. in order to bring it to my purpose, for See Lipsius on this passage, de pro- it equally favours that, whether it is nunt. ling. Lat. c. 20. Servius on Mn. altered or stands as it does at present. i. v. 104. says that Simois is acuted " Sunt vero tres, acutus, gravis, etqui on the middle syllable, because it is a ex dnobus factus est, circumflexus. Greek word : and the same on Periphas, Ex his acutus in correptis semper, in- jEn. ii. v. 476. terdum productis syllabis versatur." I 144 ESSAY ON followed ; does not this imply, that the Greeks did place their accent on the first short syllable, as we now see it in 6\vfnroQ, rvpavvog! I am certain, from the testimony of Terentianus Maurus, that the word SwKpm-jjv was accented by the Greeks in the same manner in which it appears at pre- sent in our common Greek copies. For how otherwise can be explained the difference which he mentions be- tween the times in the thesis of A'ppulos and Swjcparrjv, but on the supposition that the second syllable of the latter was acuted ? Rdmulos si nominemus, appulos aut Ddricos: Sesquiplo metimur istum, quinque nam sunt tempora: *Nunc duo ante, tria sequuntur ; nunc tribus reddes duo, Italum si quando mutat Grains accentus sonum: 'Appulos nam quando dico, tunc in apau sunt duo, 2d>Kparfjv Grains loquendo reddet in QLou duo.\ Part of Terentianus' plan, in his Metrical Essay on Metre, was, according to his own words, quo probarem planius, Et simul quam multa Gratis nostra non respondeant, Quaque respondent, ab ipsis nobis esse tradita. In regard to the acute, even when it is joined with a long syllable, as in contemnit, though the duration of the sound be long, the power and effect of the acute is short and$ quick to the sense. When a high note sue- * Appulos and 2aix.pa.Triv do both form a Cretic foot consisting of five times : these five are divided into two and three, between the metrical arsis and thesis, according as the word is ac- cented. In Cretico nunc sublatio Ion- gam et brevem occupat, positio longam : vel contra positio longam et brevem, Sublatio unam longam : pront syllaba se obtvlerit, id fiet. Mar. Victorin. p. 2483. Putsch. t Apud Putschium, p. 2414. X The word o£u?, throughout the Greek language, implies quickness, as acutus does likewise through the Latin. 'o£u ittti B«f£i (says Suidas) Kara, [j.na- opav liii rnj aKoua-THMS o*u yap Xs- yerai, iiii -n?; a^f, to TAXE'HS inpyouv. oiov to fjiaxa^iov 'OE'Y, ot( TAXE'jlZ XEVrer ay,@\v $£, to 0gu$ia>s hleyovv, Hal oiov oh x-tvrovv, aXX' SoQovV, an; to vittpov outw; oEv x,a\ iiil rZv •^ifyaiv, OE TN ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 145 ceeds a low one, or rises above the grave tone of voice, the perception of it is sudden and instantaneous, before "Kiyoptv tov TAXE'ii2 £pOVTal, 01T- TTEf ra avt^fxaTis-ra. TrXoTa. o"te ol if*,- @pi8ia-T£goi, vai6goi Ttaiq, Sec. Sed acuti, sicut hie, et sagaces ac meinores, ut piu- rimum affectihus etiam celeres smit, et instabiles feruntur, tanquam saburrcc expertia navigia. Gruviores vero tardi aliquo inodo, &;; T?,- Siavoiaj. Critical cases in physic are called o£ia waSn ; by the Romans " vitia prsecipitia.'" And thus, in Sophocles, Philoctetes complains of the anguish which he feels from his wound, 'OEEI A oiTa Hal Ta%ti' afff'pp^ETai. o|u used adverbially, signifies quickly, as in Homer, "n.q i^ar, 'OHT* 5' aHovtrev 'Oi'Xr?oj Tap£u? Ala?. And ofi is therefore explained by Hesychius, TayiooQ, ra- j^L/Spo'jUai; ; by Phavorinus Ta^Ectj, o\f>o- Sp«s; o£uj by Suidas, tayyq. This sense of o£L? and o*ut»? runs through the third chap, of Jul. Pollux Onomast. lib. i. "STEpi tayknx; xa» (JpaSiajj eij ?gya. So Thomas Magister.in the word o£iif to o£u etti ( <*ev (jt.axa.ipat; Hal o^&oXjUaiv XEyo'/^Evov, IvavTt'ov l^« to ay.Q\u' lirl Se fMvic, to (3«pu. to' Se o*ew; i^vuSn, xai O^EOJf a ^" almost in his words, which therefore shall not be repeated here. Johan. Stobaeus in his Eclogcc Physics, cap. 44. ex Plat. TimocO, on the subject of speech and hearing, has these particular words to our present purpose. oXXa; ph ovv 0/V>!V SaJjUEV rr,v oV oitiDV bit aEpo? iynt- fOf, iro- 3»xi)f, Tap^uf." And in the Glossary of Philoxenus, o^imt; cito, raptim. o£t/j o tayui;, Pernix, velox, &c. o|uTaT6f ocis- simus. Peter Victorius, in his Fariie Led. lib. vii. c. 3. where he is consi- dering Quinctilian's figure, (xs-raKn-^ii; transumptio, says, " tropus rarissiinus, etiam improprii usus : Gra?cis tamen frequentior, qui rio-ovq 0oaj o^Eia? dicunt. Homerus autem insulas Soaj, cum acuta; forma; significare vellet, vocavit hoc versu ex xv. libro Odysseae, "Evflsv V cm vhroifo imiteo'wxct So?«v. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 147 ceive,, than I can perhaps express. I can however en- gage to make it perceptible to a common English ear in any Greek word, according to its present accentual mark. The account, which I have here attempted to give, of the true nature and power of the acute tone, is confirmed by what Aristotle, de Anima, in his chapter mpX -^ofyov Kcti. a.Kor\Q, says, to filv '0£i» klvu rijv alaOrjmv Iv oXiyw yjpovty iiri irokv' to Si Rapv, Iv ttoWcJj iir oXiyov.* Acutus SOnus movet sensum in brevi tempore plurimum: gravis vero, in multo paulum. Again, in another place : tov Iv (jxvvy Oc,iog ovrog Kara to 6Xiyov to Si Ol,v Si oXiyoTrjTa, Tayv.f Cum acutus in voce existat breviter — — Acutus, propter brevitatem vel levitatem, velox. It may perhaps receive further illustration from a passage of Plutarch, in his Qucestiones Flatonicce, where he is treating of sounds in general. That author, having mentioned the harmony of sounds, says : 6£uc p-lv yap 6 ray^c yivsTai, ftapiig Si 6 ppaSvg' Sib kcu Trportpov kivovgi Tijv aiadrjcnv ol 6£eig' orav Si tovtolq r/£») papcuvopivotg nai cnroX^yofiivoiQ ol ftpaStlq l7rifia\b)(nv ap-^Ofuvoi, to upaOlv avTwv Si bfiotoira- uetav riSovrjv r»J anorj jraplor^ev, rjv ti)viav KaXovcnv.^ Hanc autem rationem secntus illeno- (3apuj a lower tone, without any consi- mina immutavit, alterumqae pro altero deration of length, through the musical capit, quod boh et o£u sunt imv»yu^f*. writers. l£v autem Grrecis non tantum ostendit, * Cap. vii. p. 641. tom.i. edit. Val. quod velox est in niotu, verum etiam t Probl. sect. xix. p. 767. torn. ii. quod forma iu tenuitatem acutumque So iu p. 765, he joins the two, to SI porrectum est: quare, quod est liuic "rap^u x.a.1 o|u. 0-wsmjfjt.ov, tanquam et ipsuin idem pe- X Acutus enim celer Jit, gravis vero nitus significant, loco alterius posuit." tardus : quare et prius movent sensum Strabo in viii. lib. ywypaaveiri Kai %vr)T(HfAci.Taiy, and neel lyx>uvo- them. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 151 ference which there was between the Roman and G reek practice in accenting their syllables ; and complains of the Latin manner as less harmonious and diversified than the Greek. " Sed accentus quoque cum rigore quodam, turn similitudine ipsa minus suaves habemus, quia ultima syllaba nee acuta unquam excitatur, nee in flexa. cir- cumducitur, sed in gravem vel duas graves cadit semper. Itaque tauto est sermo Graecus Latino jucundior, ut nostri Poeta;, quoties dulce carmen esse voluerunt, illo- rum id nominibus exornent."* Quinctilian, by closing his sentence here with semper, as he does another on the same occasion with nunquam, an adverb, (which the best Roman writers never place at the end of a period, but on particular occasions, where some great stress is laid on the sense of the word;) by this, I say, he seems to point out the very extraordinary in- flexibility of the Roman accent ; and this he remarks as opposite to the nature of the Greek tones: for it is in that part of his book where he draws a parallel between the two languages in point of harmony, and shews the inferiority of his own in several particulars. Here in the accents, " ultima syllaba nee acuta unquam excitatur, nee in flexa circumducitur," as in Dens, Dei, Deo : this being opposed by him to the Greek use of tones, gives me reason to think, that by them the last syllables were sometimes acuted and circumflexed, as in Qtog, Quo; as * Lib. ii. c. 11). Since the Roman Latina est: wide penultima hubebit ac- poets, by introducing into tbeir verses centum. In numero vero plurali, quia Greek words with their proper accent, tropaea dicimus, sicut Greed, nee aliquid intended to give some peculiar grace hide mutilamus [f. mutamus] erit and sweetness to their lines; Aldus, Grtecus accentus sicut apud Grcccos, therefore, did very properly in publish- scilicet tertia syllaba a fine." This ing Statius with a collection of all the agrees with what Victorinus, in his Greek words, used by that poet, ac- Grammat., says, " Gr And M\. Donatus, "Sane gil, are not to be considered by us as Greca verba Greeds accentibus melius mere critical refinements of that fa- efferimus." The editors, therefore, of rnous commentator ; who, on the 542d Latin poets should pay some regard verse of the 10th jEneid, observes to this circumstance in their authors, upon the word tropkcciim, " Declinatin 152 ESSAY ON we see them marked by our present virgula. Then he says, " seel in gravem, vel duas graves cadit semper ;" as in tiger, agri, Animus, dnimi : this being opposed by him to the manner of the Greeks, gives room to suppose, that their accent was otherwise varied, either in different words, or different inflexions of the same word, as in aypbg aypov, ayaObg ayaOov, StvTepog devripov. This variety, so different from the Roman method, we see in the application of our accentual marks; and this application of them perfectly corresponds with what Quinctilian's account of the Latin tones necessarily implies. The particular limitation of the Roman accent to the penultima and antepenultima, and its difference in this respect from the Greek, is taken notice of not only by Quinctilian, but by the other old Roman grammarians and critics after him. Diomedes, in his second book, says, " In Graecis dictionibus cum acutus tria loca te- neat, ultimum, penultimum, et antepenultimum. — apud Latinos duo tantum loca tenet, penultimum et antepenul- timum." Priscian says, " Acutus acccntus apud Latinos duo loca habet, penultimum et antepenultimum ; apud Graecos autem et ultimum." Donatus in like manner : ** Tonus acutus, cum in Graecis dictionibus tria loca te- neat, ultimum, penultimum, et antepenultimum; tenet apud Latinos penultimum et antepenultimum ; ultimum nunquam." So Maximus Victorinus, "Acutus, cum apud Graecos tria loca teneat, apud nos duobus tantum poni potest; aut in penultima, ut prcelegistis, aut in ea quae a line est tertia, ut pralegimus" And in another place: " Graeca nomina, si iisdem literis proferuntur [Latine versa] Graecos accentus habebunt : nam cum di- cimus, Thy as, Nais, acutum habebit posterior accentum ; et cum Themisto, Calypso, Theano, ultimam circum- flecti videbimus. Quod utrumque Latinus sermo non patitur, nisi admodum raro." Sergius likewise on the editio prima of Donatus, " Acutus accentus in Latinis non tenebit, nisi penultimum et antepenultimum." And after these Scaliger: " Latini suis libris omnes testati ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 153 sunt, nullam apud nos supremam syllabam acui."* There is a particular remark of Olympiodorus on this subject. Tore fitv FpaiKOi E/cXjjS'iio-av, vvv St "E\\r}veg. tovto Se to ovofxa ol piv 'Pwpaioi irapolivvovcri, TpaiKOt XI- yovTtg. 17 Se KOivrj SidXtKTog o^vvu. KaS'oXou St ol Viopaloi ttclv ovofxa napo^vvovat Sia tov kojxttov' oS"£v vTnpr\vopiovTtq iK\r)9i)(rav virb rC)v iroiriTwv.'t There seems to be some- thing whimsical in the reason assigned here by Olympi- odorus for the Romans drawing the accent back from the last, that they did it Sia rbv ko/jttov, to give a more stately and solemn air to their pronunciation. " Caste- rum," as Dr. Bentley well observes on this passage of Olympiodorus, " quod hie fastui tribuit, id dialecto JEoliccB, unde lingua Latina partem maximam profluxit, rectius imputatur. iEolenses enim, ut notum est, Bajov- • Cans. ling. hat. c. 58. see also c. 146. To the same purpose also Ser- vius. " Notandum Bucolica vel Geor- gica, cum apud Gra?cos in fine habeant accenlura [Bot/xoXixa, reapyixa] apud nos in tertia a fine habere : nam tit in ultima sit, Latinitas vetat: ut inpenul- tiina non sit, brevitatis efficit ratio." in Procem. ad Virg. Bucolica. So like- wise on JEn. vi. v. 670. " Ergo est sola particula, qua; habet in fine cir- cumflexum. per accentus mutationem in adverbium transit." t In Aristot. Meteora. p. 27. Tunc quidem rjaixoi vocati erant, nunc vero "EXAdvej. Hanc autem diclionem Ro- inani in penultima acuunt, l'^a.lx.01 di- centes: sermo vero communis Grcecorum ultimam ejus acuit. In universum ?o- mani omnis vocis accenium rctrahiuit propter fostum : unde Imgrmoptarrti; sn- perbi ac magnijici vocati sunt a Poetis. If there really is more dignity in a ba- rytone pronunciation, than in another, the KOfj.nro<;, however, of the Romans, which Olympiodorus here remarks, could not be the cause, but the effect and consequence of such a pronun- ciation : the pronunciation itself was owing to an accidental derivation from some particular colonies of Grecians, who insensibly established it among the old Latins, at a time when there was nothing in their civil state and cir- cumstances to elevate their spirit, and give them that air of grandeur, which foreigners afterwards thought they dis- covered in every thing belonging to the Romans, even in the tone of their language. This we find observed by Gregory Thaumaturg. in laudatione Origen. who, speaking of Justinian's Latin Collection of Laws, says, they were drawn up and published if "Pa>- fxainy tycdim, xa-ra'arX jixtix? y.h xal 'A AA- ZO'NI, Jtai fi-y^n^aTt^OjUEVi) airaiv in i^ova-ia. t>) ZatriKutn, " in the language of the Romans, which is awful and so- lemn, and of a nature conformable to the majesty of their empire." Seneca characterizes the two languages, and distinguishes them thus : Latina lin- gua POTENTIA, Greece GRATIA. Consol. ad Polyb. c. 21. On potentia here Lipsias says, Bene, nam hac im- perabat. 154 ESSAY ON tovoi erant; et Gc'oc, avyp pronunciabant, cum alii £reoc> avrip. * * As the Roman language is so in- flexibly barytone, one observation readily offers itself on a comparative view of that with our own, which is, that the English, having a due and equal mixture of barytone and oxvtone words, does, in this respect, appear to bave a great advantage and superiority over the Roman. What debases the English language is the want of diver- sified terminations in verbs and nouns : which is not only a great defect itself, but, since it is unavoidably supplied by articles and auxiliary verbs, leaves room by that means for the admission of other things equally destructive of the beauty of language. But no lan- guage admits of greater variety, as far as mere tone is concerned, than our own. Every Roman dissyllable, and every Greek verb in a, has the accent on the penultimate: the English verbs have it in general on the last, the nouns and adverbs on the penultimate, or ante- penultimate : by which means our tones are as much diversified in their position as the Greek, and more than the Roman. We place the acute some- times on the praeantepenultimale, as in necessary, favourably, &C And so do the Italians, as in stquitano, deside- KtriQ : and even on the fifth and sixth syllable from the end, as portdndose- nela, desideranovici. Caninius mentions two words that have it on the eighth syllable stminanovicisene, edijicanovi- cisene. The Hebrews, on the other band, do not admit the accent even on the antepenaltiina, according to Joh. Simon. [Introd. Gram. Crit. in ling. Grasc. sect. ii. p. 28.] There does, in- deed, seem to be matter of just objec- tion, when more than two graves in one word follow an acute, especially when they are joined with short times: for then the latter sounds are not only low, but rapid, and must be consequently indistinct. We see, however, that many negative rules, in a thing so ar- bitrary and variable as language, are very often found to be contradicted by practice. That rule of Cicero, wherein he says that nature limits the aente to the three last syllables of every word, is here evidently superseded. And therefore the word Natura, which he nses in that passage, must not be un- derstood in an wiiversal, but partial sense, as relating only to the particular nature of the Greek and Roman lan- guages : which, when he was writing that sentence, were nearest to his thoughts. That a wider compass al- lowed to the acute is not unnatural, is certain, because it is found in the na- tural and easy practice of so many millions. Neither can Scaliger see any reason against it. " The Creeks," says he, " did not choose to remove the ac- cent farther from the end : quos etiaui Latini prisci secuti easdem posteris, imitalione potius quam consilio ducti, leges prrescripsere. Nam quamobrem non liceat mihi tollere vocem in quarta a fine, nulla inusica ratio possit per- suadere : possunt enim eodem lenore tarn in voce, quam in tibiaaut in fidibus, deduci multa; vel breves, vel longre." It may be so, as he says, and we are sure it is. But the Greek and Latin method is certainly better : though the mo- dern deviation from it is commended by Scaliger, as the rejection of an un- reasonable yoke. " Sapienter a pos- teris factum est, qui nullum hn- jus putidi servitii jugum ferre volu- erint." Caus. ling. c. 58. 1 mentioned above the great defect, ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 155 Dr. Bentley, in his tract de metris Terentianis, from whence the foregoing remark on Olympiodorus is taken, gives the following verses of Virgil thus accented : 'Arma virumque cdno, Trojte qui primus ab oris Itdliam fdto profugus, * Lavinaque venit Litora ; miiltum ille et terris jactdtus et alto Vi superum, saevce memorem Junonis ob iram. " He that reads these verses properly and tunefully," says he, " will pronounce them according to these ac- centual marks; not as schoolboys scanning them, and placing the accent at the beginning of each foot, as, ' Italidm fato profugus, La — but according to the rhythm of the whole verse, in which not one word has the accent on the last syllable, except viriim; and that properly on account of the sub- sequent enclitic que."f under which the English language la- bours, in not having a variety of ter- minations to nouns, inslead of arti- cles : and to verbs, instead of auxi- liaries. The great importance of this variety to a language perhaps no where more clearly appears, than in the fol- lowing five lines of the Odyssey, t'. 204, &c. T«; S* <£g' axovoixrnt; pit $dx.gva, rrtKBTO 5e 'fit; SI %iiv Ha.'ra.TmiT Iv ditpoizr and in the manner of it entirely agrees with Dr. Bentley. tuut fastigium, et verbi antecedents culas adjunguntur, aecentns tribuilnr, longius positum acumen addncunt et nt mustique, illene, hujusce i" the final juxta se proxime collocant : sic ut, li- ce here being like the Greek yi. Thus mindque laurKsqne Dei : item ve, ut nam is often an enclitic, as in quinam : Hyrcanisve Arabisve parant, et cala- and cum, in mtrum, is called so by thisve Minervae. ne, nt hommtsne fe- Scaliger. ling. Lat. c. 146- Me, Te, Se, ragne." Servius likewise upon Virgil and Rem, are reckoned sncli by Dr. JUn. i. " Pronunciations causa, contra Bentley. See also Bp. Hare de mctr. usum Latinuin, nltiinis, quibus parti- Comic, p. j8. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 157 The reader may, perhaps, on recollecting Quinctilian's rules of accenting, be at first surprised to find that both these learned men have assigned a grave to qui and ab, which, according to the general rule, ought to have had a high acute tone given them. But this is a particular case, and happens to be remarked by Quinctilian, who considers qui so closely joined to primus, and ab to oris, as to form, as it were, but one word.* As Vossius was led into his mistake by supposing that the accentual marks originally referred to quantity, and were, as he says, " a grammaticis suis usibus ac- commodates, ad declaranda tempore, et syllabarum quan- titatem"f (for which he has no authority from antiquity) ; so Henninius likewise, supposing that they related to metre, declares,;); " accentus Groecanicos esse receptos primum pro re metrica in scholis privatis, deinde post etiam publice, pro facilitate discendi Hellenismi." He, as well as Vossius, judging of the true nature of these marks from the barbarous and perverted application of them among their countrymen, is betrayed into many inconsiderate assertions against them. With the same inaccurate haste, of which Vossius was guilty, and with more confidence (as if he had been a contemporary and countryman of Plato and Xenophon, and was risen from the dead to teach the world the pure pronunciation of his fellow-citizens), he assures us,|| " that the pro- nunciation of old Greece, as rational or regular, was re- ducible to four rules of his own laying down, which four rules are of an immutable nature and eternal truth among * "Cum dico, circiun liiora, tan- exaltata intelligetur acuta vel prodwAn, quam unuin enuncio, dissimulata dis- caetertc gravatae." P. 50. Acuta and tinctione : ilaque tanquam in una voce, prod acta with him are synonymous, una est acula : quod idem accidit in illo, || Sect. 163. p. 129. This is his Trope qui primus ab oris." Lib. i. c. 5. grand conclusive proposition, which is t Pag. 140. printed in large characters at the end X Sect. 162. pag. 128. That he con- of his work, as containing the sum of founds tone and time, is plain from the his doctrine, which he has been labour- following words. " Si una syllaba vo- ing to prove through a long series of cis prae caeteris exaltetur, ceteris syl- learned sections, by arguments which labis aequali tono modulatis, ilia syllaba he himself calls Hevculeun. 158 ESSAY ON all nations that have a rational pronunciation." I have so many objections to these propositions of his, that I hardly know which to advance first. An answer to this " natural and rational" pronunciation hath been already given in the second chapter. It may be sufficient here farther to observe, that he proposes, what Vossius did, an accommodation of the Greek pronunciation to the Latin accents : his * rules for its regulation being the * His four general canons of rational and ancient pronunciation are these, (p. 88, 89, 90.) I. Omnis vox monosyllabu modulatio- nem habet in sua vocali : ut <}>£?, mons, §c. II. Omnis vox dissyllaha modulatio- nem habet in sylluba priori : ut o'Jof (quamvis ita notetur accentu iJilJ montes, c\c. III. Omnis vox polysyllaba penulti- mam lungam modulatur ; ut av- Qfiiroi;, TwrSjiiai, jucunda, <5)'c. IV. Omnis vox polysyllaba, penultim a brevi, modulatur antepenulti- mam : ut dominus, aXoyav. He is not satisfied with introducing these rules by the name of regular in- fallibiles, but closes the recital of them with the following words : Et lite qui- dem Qiiatuor regulcr sunt tarn opud Latinos, quum Gracos, sine ulla excep- tione aXernaz veritutis. In these four rules we have a synopsis of his whole book, all the arguments of which are at once refuted by that single passage of Quiuctilian, cited above. To answer them all singly, would not be difficult, but after this quite unnecessary. I cannot, however, leave Henninius without taking particular notice of one argument, which he urges in the most specious manner : it is this . (sect. 119. p. 91.) " Since the verses of both lan- guages are formed on the same rules of metre, therefore the modulation of both must be the same, and consequently the accent." The metre no doubt is the same, the Romans having borrowed all theirs from the Greeks : but the modulation is not always the same, where the metre is. For does not Quinc- tilian say above, " that the modulation of the Latin verse was improved by introducing words with the Greek ac- cent." Here then the metre continued the same, while the modulation was altered by the difference of tone. An instance will best explain this. The following line of Virgil, having a Greek word in it, will serve for this purpose: Castorea, Eliadum pdlmas Epiros equa- rum. So we commonly read it : but Servius here observes, " Sane Epiros Graece profertur : unde etiain e habet accen- tual. Nam si Latinum esset, Epirus, Epiri, pi haberet, quia longa est." Ac- cording to this remark of Servius, com- pared with the foregoing observation of Quiuctilian, the true and better mo- dulation of that verse, as it is sounded to the ear of the Author himself and his Roman readers, was without the least change in the metre, as follows ; Castorea, Eliadum pdlmas' Epiros equd- rum. This, which we have on the best au- thority of the Romans themselves, en- tirely subverts the plausible reasoning ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 159 very same which Quinctilian gives for the Roman lan- guage. But Quinctilian tells me that the Roman accent differed # from the Greek, and in harmony was much inferior to it. What am I then to determine between these two contradictory authorities ? Am I to believe Henninius, in opposition to Quinctilian? No: I will adhere to the latter, though Henninius were patronized by ail the critics, grammarians, and universities, in Christendom. When the Ynca Garcillasso de la Vega was carried into Spain, and there made one of the lords of the bed- chamber to his catholic majesty, he had immediateo c- casion to observe the difference between the Peruvian language and the Spanish, which he naturally was in- duced to learn for his convenience at that time, and, as it appeared afterwards, for his farther use in writing. His own remarks on the difference he has given us at the beginning of his history ; and one of the first that seems to have occurred to him is, " that the Peruvian words never have any accent on the last syllable, but almost always on the penultima, and very seldom on the antepenultima: though there are some persons who main- tain that the accent ought to be on the last."+ These of Henninius, drawn from the similarity remarks worth ournotice. " On ne doit of Greek and Roman metre. The kinds done pas trouver mauvais, que je tache of verse were the same in both htn- de coustrver ma lungue naturelle dans guages : but the degrees of sweetness toute sa purete, et que f ecrive les mots in the two were different, according to lndiens de le meme maniere, que les gens the difference of accent. du Pays les prononce. — Je ne park pas * And thus Servius on Virg. Eel. x. de plusieurs autres choses, qu' on pour- 1. 18. Georg. I. 59. and in many other roit observer sur cette langue, qui differre places, beaucoup de I' Espagnole, de I' Italienne, t I have taken this from Badouin's et de la Latine. Les Motifs et les Orioles, translation : " Les mots n out jamais qui ont tant soit peut de curiositt, y doi- d' accent sur la derniere syllabe, mais vent bien prendre garde; mais je leur presque toujours stir la penultieme, et rends un ban service, de leur montrer fort rarement sur V antepenultierne : (pour ainsi dire ) avec le doigt.de la cour qiwiqu' il y ait plusieurs persons, qui d' Espagne, ou je me trouve, quels sont sontiennent mal-a-propos, que I' accent les principes de leur Langue, ajin qu' ils doit etre sur la dernierey He has other la conserrent duns sa purete. Quel dom- 160 ESSAY ON persons were, I suppose, some Spanish missionaries, and others concerned in American affairs, who thought every language ought to fall under the rules of those which they happened to know. They might as well have said, that the climate ought to be the same in Peru with that of their own country. But reason in both cases is out of the question ; the only inquiry is about a fact. Concerning the Greek accents, Sarpedonius has fol- lowed the steps of Vossius and Henninius, and * left the question, which he did not understand, rather more puzzled than he found it. Mr. Dawes hath just touched on this subject in his Miscellanea Critica, but seems not to have employed much thought upon it, and to have fallen therefore into the popular error of accents being incon- sistent with quantity : though he does not expressly say, the accents themselves are so, but the common use that is made of them. I wish so able a man had thought this subject more worthy of his notice. The trifling decla- mation of a late editor of Callimachus, is too insignifi- cant to be taken notice of. He proposes his question thus, " Whether the pronunciation of the Greek is better conducted by accent or quantity ?" Which is a question mage ne seroit-ce pas de souffrir, qu' une word ay% oixo; was circumflexed on the langue si belle, et si utile a ceux, qui la middle syllable, or acuted on the first, savent, se corrompit, et s' alterat pe.u a- I will not here dispute with hiin. But peu?" The dogmatical position of the certain I am, that all ivords of the same absurd Spaniard, which the Peruvian form had not a circumflex on the pe- laughs at, is exactly in the style of nullima.because Apollonius assures me, Henninius, who applies the words Ana- p. 305. that truvoMo;, wa'jxjixo;, /uirotKo;, logia, Ratio, debet, in the same manner with some other compounded words throughout his dissertation ; and of having a long pennltima, yet had the Dr. G. who continually uses ought, and accent on the antepenultima. should thus, particularly in p. 145. * He states the question thus : " An " I rather think and am persuaded that script! fuerint accentus ab antiquis ? aypoMoq and ayoeaiot;, and all words of 2, deinde, si scripti non fuere, an inter the same form, had originally, as they loquenduin saltern fuerint observati ? ought to have, a circumflex on the pe- 3, denique, si inter loquendum obser- nullimate." Now, whether that single vati fuere, idne in prosa tanluni, an si- ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 161 of a like kind with the following, " Whether in walking or running a man had better use his right, or his left leg singly ?" mul in versibus accident?" Dissert. correspondent Job. Geor. Grsevius, pars tert. cap. 1. Verwey, in his nova part of whose letter on this subject is via (Praef. p. 22. seq.) does nothing published in the preface of Verwey more than copy the errors of Vossius. cited above. This is true likewise of his friend and 162 ESSAY ON POSTSCRIPT TO CHAP. VIII. On the different "Ajs-i; of Accent and of Metre. THE ictus accentuum, of which Dr. Bentley hath given us the marks in his Terence (and which have some- times been confounded with the general accent of the language), are purely metrical, falling on a particular syllable of a foot, or dipodia, and marking the several divisions of the verse, according to the manner of scan- ning it. Dr. Bentley places them in iambics on the latter syllable of the former foot in each dipodia; in trochaics, on the first syllable of the dipodia. But they do by no means always fall on accented syllables. Ac- cording to Dr. Bentley, they fall in the following iambics thus : Ducunt volentemfata nolentem trahunt. Anus cum ludit, morti delicids facit. AovXov ytveadai Trdpatypovovvrog gIgttotov. 'Hko> vcicpojv KtvOfiwva Kai gkotov TtvXag. In the following trochaics thus : 'Irritare est calamitatem, cum tefelicem vocas. Eta $tj, %i$6g irpoKWirov irag rig Eurp£7ri^£Tw. But the marks of accent will fall on the preceding lines thus : Ducunt volentemfata, nolentem trahunt. 'Anus cum ludit, morti delicias fdcit. AovXov yzviodai irapcuppovovvTog §£ia-i xctTa 7ra0o{ yiW5ai nus per passionem fieri proparoxjto- 7rpo7rapo£uTova, dmb rou ovTa.try.evoi; nal nas, ab oiracr/xEvo; et £\r,\atr[*hos, sed IXuXao-jUf.voj, dX\' alio t*> si? ju7, toS te a verbis in fu, nempe oStd^i et eX>jX>]- oJthjui xai IXwXhjUi. xai Eia-iv evecttSte;, (ju : et sunt praesentis temporis, ut i; "o-r>iy.i, irrufjuu, lo-ra, pivot. " Scien- tg-rvfju, ia-ray.ai,lirrd.{xevoi;." Much the dum quod vox 'A.x.a^/j.tvo;, quoniam same is in Phavorinus, on the same aa- [si esset praeter. particip.] deberet in thority. V. ax«xf*«v»;. penultima acui, ut ne7roi>i/xEvoc, ideo ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 173 evident from his observing, immediately after having mentioned the name of Numa, " that the second sylla- ble of it is to be pronounced long and with a grave ac- cent," * Kar ovofia Nov/xav' \prj St rrjv dtvripav ,. !.,/. " v v . ' a ^ , ' tyxXtTMa., id est, inclinativa apud illos stmt, ut eTSe'v /ai, lXttX7)3-£v pot. Discre- Onwbich the Schol. Victorian. well ob- tiva sunt, qua. egent adjunctione ob- serves : Mo; l%e.w ofioroveTy, ha. avrih- Tum persouarum, qua o^oroyovfuya vo- tto-TEXX^Tot 'Ayay.ip.wn. For Achilles cant, ut, {thy e>e, ovk IxeTvov. Apud here says to his friend and governor nos autem pronomina eadem et absolata Phoenix: " You ought not to shew this et discretiva sunt. Putsch, p. 1062, S. regard for him [Agamemnon] by which See also the Hermes of Mr. Harris, to yon. may lose that love and regard whom we may justly apply his own which I have for you." words on Apollonius, declaring him t Synt. lib. i. c. 3. lib. ii. 13. 15, 16, " one of the acutest authors who ever 17, 18. lib. iv. c. 1, 2. etseq. wrote on the subject of grammar." X See the tracts wEpi t£v lyn'Xtvoy.ivM B. 1. c. 5. 176 ESSAY ON circumflex being only joined with long syllables, have not met with the same objections, but peaceably enjoyed the place assigned them by grammarians. On this head, however, I cannot but add, that this circumstance of the circumflex mark being affixed only to long syllables, is a thing that much favours my opinion. Had this, which consists of an acute and a grave, marking an ele- vation and sinking of the voice on the same syllable, and, consequently, requiring a double measure of time for that purpose ; had this, I say, been ever found placed on a short syllable, I should immediately renounce it as inconsistent with quantity, and deny its right and claim to antiquity. But as it always is joined with a long time, its strict propriety and consistency in that respect is at least one inducement to think well of the two other parts of the accentual system, the acute and grave. Again : as we are assured by Cicero, Quinctilian, and other old writers, that the ancient acute tone did al- ways lie within the compass of the three last syllables of words ; had the modern marks ever exceeded that com- pass, by being fixed on the fourth or fifth of polysyllables from the end, that would have been an insuperable ob- jection against them in such a place. But since they are actually now seen in a position that is strictly con- formable to the oldest and best accounts of the tones themselves, which they denote, they have from that cir- cumstance in their favour a presumptive proof of their propriety and faithfulness. But it appears from some Greeks of later ages, that the accents of some particular words have been different at different times : and, therefore, we have no certainty that the marks of any words at present are faithful. But how is this inferred? Suidas and others say that certain words were accented differently in their time from the manner in which they were some ages before. That is, the actual pronunciation of those words was altered in a course of years, as it is in some words, I believe, in all languages: the accentual marks, which followed the actual pronunciation, consequently were ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 177 altered with it: and in both positions were true and proper. Among ourselves the word ally was four or five years ago pronounced as an oxytone ally"', and any grammarian, who had then fixed the acute mark on the last syllable would have done right : now, by many persons of very good sense, the same word is pronounced as a barytone, ally ; and a grammarian who should now place an acute mark on the first syllable would do right too. The variation of the tonical apices does there- fore no more disprove the existence of the varied tones themselves, than the main stream of a river shifting from one side of the channel to another disproves the real existence of the current at different times on both sides. Had the variation of the accentual signs ever been such as to have fixed a circumflex mark on a short syllable, or an acute on any syllable beyond the antepe- nultimate, that being contrary to the nature of the Greek tones themselves, as founded partly in reason, and de- clared by Dionysius, such an alteration would have been just matter of objection against our virgulce: but the al- teration,* circumstanced as it is, affords none at all. The accent might vary not only at different times, but at the same time in different places, as hath been men- tioned in a foregoing chapter, and may be more fully seen in H. Steph. Dialect. Attic, c. 15. de Orthographia Attica. I acknowledge that Eustathius and the author of Etymologicum M. say, that polysyllables in oiog and oiov were once circumflexed on the penultimate, though the * The Latin accent varied in like without donbt, just and right when he manner. In the word Valeri it was made it : nor does Gellius mean to changed between the time of Nigidius dispute his authority, for he calls him and A. Gellius. Nigidius said it was on this very occasion " hominem in aculed on the first syllable : Gellius disciplinis doctrinarum omnium prae- afterwards says : " sic quidem Nigidi- cellentem." Noct. Att. xiii. 25. And us dici prascipit : sed si quis nunc Va- Dr. Bentley, on the same subject, lerium appellans, in casu vocandi, se- speaks of him by the name of " Ro- oundum id praeceptum Nigidii acuerit manornm a Varrone doctissimus," not. primam, non aberit quin rideatur.'' ad Ter. Andr. ii. 1. 20. And yet the remark of Nigidius was, N 178 ESSAY ON later Attics acuted the antepenultimate : I know that the same authors, with Suidas and the scholiast on Aristo- phanes say, that the old Attics circumflexed the penulti- mate of some words in aiov, which others acuted on the antepenultimate. I will not dispute the truth of these observations, and will agree with Dr. G., that the accent was by those old Attics placed agreeable to quantity. But then I must insist, that it was equally agreeable to quantity, as used by later Attics on the antepenultimate, and that this latter method was not a corrupt one. For who are these pieTayzviaTtpoi and vewrepoi twv ^AttikCov ? not writers of a low age and baser note, but those of the highest character ; and though posterior in age, yet equal in authority with ol vaXaiol 'AttikoI. Among the later Attics are found the great names of Plato, Xenophon, Aristotle, Isocrates, the Orators, Menander, and after them Dionysius Halic, Josephus, Phiio Judaeus, Plu- tarch, Diogenes Laertius, and others. We surely must not call their Greek corrupt, though differing in some respect from that of the old Attics, Thucydides, the great tragic writers, and some authors of the old comedy. Persons, when they meet with the words ol vzwrtpoi, perayeviarepoi, or "EXXtjv£c> are apt to annex some idea of barbarism to them, especially when opposed to the ol iraXatoi. Thus Dr. G. calls the ptrayevicnepoL 'AttikoI * moderns. But this is a mistaken notion : since some of the best writers, whose works are now extant, belong to this class. Which thing is clearly explained by J. Pierson, in his preface to Mceris Atticista.t I think it a matter of indifference to my argument, * Page 145. Adde eundem in AiawwixiVai. Moeri- t P. 26, 27, seq. Dr. Taylor also in dem inTLXCvm. Aeivuo"(. XoAa'S^. et scbol. Ind. Attic, ad Lysiam, speaking of the Arisloph. Plut. 514. 553. Ita ladem style of bis author, says, after Dionys. novara et antiquani meminit aliquoties Haliearn. " non eo uti Attice scribendi schol. Apollon. Rhodii ; Doricam dupli- genere [Lysiam] quo Thuoydides cem Prolegomena ad Theocritum." See verura dialeeto recentiori Atticam also Valcken. ad Phamiss. v. 1395. and novam meraorat Laertius in Epiraenide, Bernard ad Thomam Mag. V. AvyUvq. Suidas in "AWTEsrStti, utramqae (novam Dr. Bentl. Dissert, on Phal. p. 401, sc. et antiquiorem) idem in Tpiwaia. &c. ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 170 whether the old Attics did circumflex those long penulti- mates mentioned above, or no. But certainly it was not universal. The word spvpog, though circumflexed in Homer on the penultimate, was acuted on the antepe- nultimate by the * Attics. Porphyry, as cited by Dr. f G., says the same of ofioiog. And one of much higher au- thority, Mceris J says, FeXoiov, fiapvrovwg, 'An-dcwc* Te- \olov, TrpoirtpiGTrojpivwg, 'EXXrjvticojc. I cannot dismiss this subject of the variation of ac- cent in particular words, without observing, that the very mention of it by the old grammarians as a peculi- arity, is an implicit proof, that the main part of their language both among the old Attics and the later Greeks was in tone the same. It is taken notice of as a singu- larity, and therefore no argument can be drawn from it to the variation of the tone in general. To return to quantity : so far are the present marks from being inconsistent with it, that their position is in most cases regulated by the quantity of the subsequent syllables, of the ultimate in Greek, as of the penultimate in Latin (the reason of this difference I shall no more inquire into, than why the Pallium differed from the Toga): so that these marks are frequently of use in lead- ing us to the knowledge of quantity, by tracing the cause through the effect. That the accent of the Romans is regulated by the quantity of the penultimate, hath been shewn above. That among the Greeks it was directed by the ultimate, I may affirm on the authority of iElius Dionysius, to whom Vossius refers us for information in these points : who, in § Eustathius, says of nouns of the second declension ending in a pure, ol Trakatol 'Attocoi Hiiruvov rag tiov tolovtwv bvofiaruyv \r]yovaag. ATO teal 7rapo)^,vvav avra. dyvola yap tXzyov, kcu nj tvicXda, k. r. X. " The ancient Attics made the final a of such words long; Wherefore they acuted their penultima : and said dyvola, tvicXrfa" &c. And it would be difficult to assign a rea- * Etymolog. Mag. in the word egu- t Ed. Pierson. p. 109. y.oi. § Odyss. H. p. 284. See also Schol. t Page 115. ad Eurip. Orest. v. 261. n2 180 ESSAY ON son, why the quantity of the ultimate should not be as much regarded in this case, as that of the penultimate. I offer not this use of our marks in discovering the quantity of the following syllables as a thing of any great utility, but only as a fact : neither do I choose to mention another use of them, which has been sometimes urged in their favour, that they serve to distinguish the different senses of homonymous words ; because it is certain this difference may be discerned without any such helps. Other languages have words, which ex- press at different times, without any difference of ac- cent, not only different, but sometimes opposite ideas : and yet the particular meaning of them in a sentence may with common attention be collected easily from the context. The consideration therefore of accentual marks, as being necessary * on such occasions, I readily wave, * The best Greek grammarians themselves do certainly distinguish very often the different signification of homonymous words by their different accent. Ammonius has done this in a great number, Moeris in some, and Eustathius in many. H. Stephens has printed in his Gr. Thes. Append, a large collection of such words from Cyrillus, or Philoponus. In his tract " de bene instituendis Gr. ling, studiis," p. 53, he gives a particular instance of amislake, occasioned by not attending to accen- tual marks, in confounding the three words Sia0a\aiv, 8(a(3aX£y, and Sia/3oX£v in a passage of the Euthyphron of Plato : and observes upon it " tanti refert discrimen, quod tales notulae hie constituunt, novisse." — See also p. 54, 55, of the same piece. The famous Alberli in Peric. Crit. p. 57. has in- geniously corrected Hesychius in V. ttivov, by pointing out the passage in Odyss. *. HO.which the authorquotes : from whence it appears that the person, who inserted that article in the lexicon, was led into an error by not knowing the different accent of aTvo;, and aivoy, and so confounded together two words of a different signification. But still, as Apollonius with his usual good sense observes, y^n /uevtoi tov vovv vm^ia-av- Titf, (A.r) Sia tov to'vou Ji&aVxEa-Sai, Jia $£ tou Tra^Trofxivov Xoyou. naBcfme Kai ait' aWtuv aittigaiv cLfA.' OVTt aviBTCll TOV yjj)QlOV tovtov rrXuov hr\ to fiaov. By Stacrrrjjua here is meant the difference or distance between any number of sounds in lowness and height. Aristoxenus % in his first book of harmonics defines Smor^a as distinguished from v, tw tlprifjihriv xivwiv. o£y ya£ Jtai @agb SJjXov, if iv afxtyoripoi'; toutikj eo'ti'v. etlrri Se Icttiv h xara. toVov, xaQ' ijv o£v tl xal $aoxj ytvtrai. aXX' ou to.vto ei'Soj t»J? xivhtrlwt; ixarega; linlv. loTi[Ai\S:g S' ou- Jevi ttoiotots ytyivnrai vrepi tovto SiojtVai, Tif hxarigas airSv h Jiaoja. xai nroi tov- tov fxh Siojio-Qevtoj, 0v OTaVU ptt'JtOV ElTTSlV TTEpt $>6oyyou, ti wote eVtjv. Harmon. lib. i. p. 3. "First then we must deter- mine the movement of the voice in re- gard to place, or tone. The manner of it is not in all cases the same. For it shifts its place, as hath been said, both when we speak, and when we sing : high and low evidently taking place in both these cases. Now the place of the voice is determined by its particu- lar situation iu regard to elevation and depression. But the manner of its movement is of two kinds. No one hath yet with sufficient accuracy re- marked the particular difference of these two motions. And yet except this is distinguished, it will not be easy to treat clearly of sounds." After Aristoxenus, the difference be- tween the tynvn Siaa-T»i|UttTi)ti) and avEfaj 'iyjivo-a. h [aiv ovv truv- eyjig ia-riM y ^laXiyo/Asda. " Moluum vero, hie quidem continuus, ille vero intervallis discretus. Conlinua igilur vox est, quae et remissiones ad gravi- tatem, et intensiones ad acumen laten- ter ac celeriter facit : intervallis vero discreta, qu.ne tonorum dislinctionem manifestam habet Coutinua au- ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 185 vocal tones used in singing and discourse in such a man- ner, as to ascertain the particular number of them com- monly used in speech, as Dionysius hath done. But this exactness was certainly the business of the rhetorician rather than of the musician. Aristoxenus, however, and those who wrote on the same subject after him, speak of the high and low tones used in common speech, by the name of XoywEeg fiiXog, XoyiKoX raaug. AiaXejOfxivwv •yap i)fj.u)v ovt(i)q 17 0a>v>) Ktvurat Kara roVov, wars nrj^afxov Sokuv 'tGTaaOai* And in like manner the other musical writers. The application of all this to our present pur- pose is obvious, and hath been already made. As there are but three places in which the accentual mark at present appears, so there may be three cases put, to one of which every exception, that has ever been made to our accents, may be referred. And if the po- sition of the mark in these three cases can be explained and justified, every objection to them is answered at once. I. It appears often on the last syllable, as in Otog. This is disliked by many of my opponents. Henninius tem ea est, qua loquimur." — De Music. lib. i. p. 7. And to the same purpose Porphyry, Hypomn. ad Harm. Ptolem. c. i. p. 194. The flexibility of the voice, I am in- clined to think, was meant by Virgil in his expression of" udce vocis iter," (iEu. vii. 533.) and I therefore rather follow Germanus on the passage, explaining it Jiexilem et circumactilem, than Ser- vius when he says, " Hoc est u urn vocis iter." In thus applying udus, Virgil might intend to follow the Greeks in their sense of i>yfc$, which signifies flexible as well as moist. 'Ty^ov, {AaXaHw. Heysch.Tryphiod. v. 79. calls the back of the wooden horse Lye,w, Jiexilem, where his learned editor observes that Piudar thus uses iygov v£tov, Pytk. i. 17. and Theocritus kejh? vyg&v. xxv. 206. It is certain Virgil understood vyooy axavdoY of Theocritus thus, for he trans- lates it, " fiexi vimen acanthi." The flexile ingenium of Hyperides is cha- racterized in Longinns by the words vyqh •GTveZf/.a, Kal ya.% f^a^axi^erat Hal oh indvra i^nt; xal MONOTO- NJ2Z XsyEi xttl iv 'rrVSli vrviv- (Aini ^n^oiiva-ai eti E'rX.AMTi'HZ aHoait;. " Etenim mollis est, neque omnia uno ac simili tenore dicit — et cum facili versatilique spiritu ad digrediendum maxime_/Zex(7is." Sect, xxxiv. See also Mr. Heath on Soph.Antig. 1250. Eurip. Phocn. 1448. * Lib. i. p. 9. " Loquentibus eriim nobis ita vox movetur secundum locum, ut nullibi vidcatur consistcre." 180 ESSAY ON roundly declares it wrong, and says it should be ac- cented thus, Otog, according to his (i. e. the Roman) rule, " that dissyllables should be accented on the former syllable." But let us now consider the position of the Greek ac- cent on the last, either simply as -a fact, or as grounded in reason. As a fact, it is necessarily implied by Quinc- tilian, and expressly declared by other writers of the best note, Athenseus,* Trypho, Ammonius, Mceris, fApollo- nius, Herodianus, and others. And to judge of it by reason or the nature of vocal sound, do we ourselves perceive any reason X against it in our own language, where oxytones are very numerous, or in the French, where they are almost general ? But though we are sure, we do now pronounce a great number of words with the accent on the last, yet perhaps a thousand years hence, when our language may be read and studied as a dead one, some Henninius of those later ages, who shall form rules of general pronunciation on those of a parti- cular language, may say, " it is impossible the old Eng- lish should pronounce the word regret with an acute on the last, when it is so much more natural, for obvious reasons, they should have pronounced it as a barytone, • * See what is cited from him above it stands now, has variety and har- in c. vi. Again in lib. xiv. p. 644. we mony. have, 7rs£«r7rao-T£ijv Se "Kkyovraq TIKclkovi; f " Illud tainen miror, quid ita Fa- tw J)o,(w7Twiiv. Posterior vocis TlXaxovt bius et Rornani omnes acui vocem fu- syllaba,nominandicasu,accentucircum- gerint in fine. Grreci aliter, ut scimus; jlexa notatur. sed et riatura. Quae enim res, aut ratio t He (ells us (Synl. p. 105. c. 5. me vetat vocem tollere finientem, aeque lib. ii.) that pronouns used feiKTixZs ac ordieutem i Nulla, nee illi ipsi prae- with the final i added, as olrorl, ixsivoa-j, tores nostii causam iuterdicli sui aliam have ihe last syllable acuted. Sop.329. attulerint, prater noluisse." Lipsius de he says, adverbs ending in it are cir- pronunt. ling. Lat. c. 20. The reasoning cumflexed, as itou it£, alrou alrei. of Scaliger (ling. Lat. c. 58.) against Herodian Tnpi fxiyaXov pii^aroj (p. 191. a final syllable being acuted, on the sup- Ald. Tkes.) inquires, hart to ao-i (a,i- position that the rising of the voice re- tcj^ #a.puvETa(, to l\ pnpa. qatrh l^uvtrat. quired a fall in the same word, is con- st, t. x. I can never believe that Ho- tradieted strongly both by the nature mer (Iliad. X. 57". ) would write Tfwaj of vocal sound, and by practice. xa.1 Tgvof : but Tp£«< xa) T§a>a?, as ACCENT AND QUANTITV. 187 regret." This is the style of reasoning among many persons on the Greek language. II. The acute appears often on the short penultima of a polysyllable, as in Sevrfyov, SwtcpaVrjv. And our reformers would in all these cases bring it back to the antepenultima, Sevrepov, Swicparrjv, as in Latin mdximos, dominos, Socratem* But its former position is attested, not to mention numberless other authorities, by Teren- tianus Maurus above, and by f Apollonius, who says TrXrjmog is acuted on the penultima. But is there then any reason against it ? Dr. G. says, that as there are allowed to be three times in the thesis after the arsis, " two of these three may be either in the penultimate or the last."$ Agreed. But though there should be no more than three times in the fall, must there be no less ? There surely may be only one, as in defende. If there must be three, wherever there can, and two of these three may be either in the ultimate or penul- timate, then I may as well say to him, in objection to his Latin accent, " why should not defende be acuted thus, defende ? there are but three times in the thesis here, and according to your own account, two of these three may be in the penultimate." Thus I might use his reasoning : but I will not, being convinced, that to argue from one language to another is in many cases a most * Not but even in Latin we have wrote. — Noct. Attic, xiii. 25. and instances of the short penultima being Bentl. not. ad Terent. Andr. II. 20. in this case accented. So Servius says, t Synt. p. 60. edit. Sytburg. And and he well knew. " Mercuri, Domiti, Athenaeus, lib. ix. p. 388. on the word Ovidi 1 tertia a fine debuit habere ac- * Avrayaq. ntgij-TrZo-i Y ol 'Attixoi iraea. centum, quia, penultima brevis est : tov ojflsv Xoyov rovvofxa. ta ya= £i? aq sed constat have nomina apocopen per- ykywra. ixTBrafAivov, vTrsp Ju'o 3-tAXa|3a?, tulisse : nam apud majores erat iaem ore sp^si to a. iraoctKr,yov, @ag{,Tova is-nv, vocativus qui et nominalivus; ul. hie oiov, axaSaq, adafxag, aH.ay.ai;. Circum- Merciirius, o Merciirius. unde cu licet Jlectunt in ultima hanc vocem Auiciprce- brevis sit, etiam post apocopen, suum ter justam rationem. Nam polysyllaba servataccentum." ad Ma. I. 451. Thus in a.% tongum desinentia,cum habent a. in we learn from A. Gellius that the se- penultima, barytona sunt, ut ajtaJaj, cond syllable of the vocative case, a$a/*a;, ax.dfj.a~s. Valtri, was acuted in his time, though f Dissert, p. 43. the first was acuted when Nijjidius 188 ESSAY ON fallacious method. At present we pronounce the words contriver, sollicit, as paroxy tones. A future reformer may say, " it is absurd to suppose, that the ancient English placed the accent on the penultimate of these words. Do not contriver, sdllicit sound as harmonious ? Certainly they do. And besides, the accent in the ante- penultimate here is more agreeable to quantity. The accenting therefore of these and other such words on the penultimate cannot be founded in the rules of reason, harmony, analogy, or quantity." III. The Greek acute is frequently seen on the ante- penultimate, when the penultimate is long, as in aeiSe, Tvpawog, agovga, ofioioQ. In all such cases our oppo- nents would (in order to make the accent agree with quantity, as they call it) remove it, according to Quinc- tilian's rule for the Roman tones, to the penultimate, ati^e, apovpa, rvpavvog, b/tioiog. But what occasion is there for this? Its position on the antepenultimate, though followed immediately by a long syllable, is cer- tain as a fact from Apollonius, * who says anovpoe was acuted on the antepenultima. And if we consider it according to Dr. G.'s rules of reason or harmony, we may justify it even by them. Since he appeals to these rules, I am very ready to try the case by them. Kai 0»J ToXaVTM jUOUfftK?) ,iia-ra.. words to draw back llieir accent, lie ACCENT AND QUANTITY. 181) to remove the accent from the first to the second sylla- ble of such words as ytAotoc, aypoiKoc, iToifiog, &c. ? They have nothing more than he has before admitted. At present we pronounce cruelty, Mnesty, sepulchre, as pro-paroxy tones. Some future reformer of the Eng- lish old tones may say, " it is hardly possible to con- ceive the old English should accent the first syllables of these and many other such words. Is it not more har- monious to place the accent on the second syllables, cruelty, honesty, sepulchre ? it certainly is ; and there is no doubt, but if we could recover, what the gramma- rians under George the Third wrote on this subject, we should find that all such words were accented on the penultimate." This is exactly the language of Vossius and his followers. To argue against the present position of the Greek accent from its want of harmony at first to our ears, which have been accustomed to the Latin accent, is in- deed a plausible and popular, but very treacherous kind of reasoning. The harmony of all pronunciation is a relative thing, depending much on habit. What is habi- tual and therefore harmonious to a French, will often be unharmonious, because unusual, to an English ear. It may be so at first with the Greek accents in respect to us. I well know, that Scaliger, who admits them, ac- cording to their present marks, as genuine, yet thinks that in some cases their position is absurd. But the proper way of examining this thing is, not to consider what it should be, but to find out, if possible, what the pronunciation of the Greeks was: if we can find that, we may be sure it was harmonious to them, and will be so to us after some practice. I say, to us, though fo- reigners: for the Romans were so ; and to them we are sure, not only that it was agreeable, but even more pleasing than the accent of their own language, accord- ing to the testimony of Quinctilian himself. Some have endeavoured to prove it unharmonious by reasoning on the proportion of times in the arsis and thesis. It is known there are allowed three measures of 1.90 ESSAY ON time in the thesis after the arsis. In Greek, according to present appearances, two measures out of these three are not admitted in the ultimate (except in a few parti- cular cases, as in (piXoyeXwg and some Attic words), in Latin the two are there admitted, as in ammo. Dr. G. can see no reason, why the two falling measures should be any more excluded from the ultimate of the Greek, than of the Latin. # I can only say, they are excluded, and am satisfied with it without a reason. But if he insists on having - a reason, I will engage to give him one, when he will assign one to me, why XWog and not Xd-n-ig is Greek for a stone. If the languages are two, they must differ somehow. And accordingly wherever I find a difference, I acquiesce in it as a thing expected. ^rptTTTrj yap yXwae lari (iporiov, TroXhg c tvi fxvSroi UltVTOlOl' £7THi>V St TToXvg I'OfXOg tvSd KOI %V%CL. HotTl. His reasoning on the two falling times in the penul- timate has been shewn above to turn against himself, and to support that system, which he endeavours to overthrow. 'Ap' ii) tclv loiav rag apfioviag lfiirpr\ai'»v tis pleuissimam earn esse putabant : toIj o-wiTovi;, o« av linmnras bv fiovXtviia rag iroWag Xupag vikcl. che dovrebbe cosi leggersi : u>g tv (TO(j)bv j3ov\£ujuci rag iroWag %£tpac viicq. Questo e un verso di Euripide citato da Polibio I. 35. E ne'frammenti delV Antiope, v. 77. nel Barnes. ~2i0(j>bv yap iv fiovXtvfia rag 7roXXac X*P a G Nuca. Concerning this inscription, Dr. Taylor, in a letter of June, 17G2 r writes to me thus : — " The inscription at Herculaneum, I hear, is going to be disputed, on account of the small characters. That will be difficult: because under the statues of the Muses found there, we read TPArwAIAN. EPATw, &c. &c. in the same manner as we do in the following inscription at Rome, the age of which is high and cannot be dis- puted ; on a marble monument there, In front, ATIMETVS PAMPHILI TI. CAESARIS. AVG. L. L. ANTEROCIANVS. SIBI. ET. CLAVDIAE. HOMONEAE CONLIBERATAE. ET. CONTVBERNALI, ITALIAN INSCRIPTION. 211 H nOXY CEIPHN^N XirYPaTEPH H nAPA BAKX»I KAI 0OINAIC ATTHC XPTCOTEPH KTnPIAOC H XAXIH 4>AIAPH TE XKXEIAONlC ENQ OMONOIA KEIMAI ATIMHTart XEIITOMENH AAKPYA Tart nEXON ACnAClH BAIHC AIIO THN AE TOCAYTHN AAIMoiN AIIPOI$HC ECKEAACEN cflXIHN. On the left side, Ty qui secv'ra' proce'dis mente farvmper siste gradvm quaeso verbaqve pavca lege illa ego qvae claris fveram praelata tvellis hoc homonoea brevl condita svm tvmvlo cvi formam papiiie' charites tribVere deco'rem qvam pallas cvnctis artievs ervidllt nondvm bis de'nos a'etas mea vIderat anno's inie'cere manvs invida fa'tamihi nec pro me qveror hoc morte est mihi tristior ipsa MAEROR ATIMETI CONIVGIS ille meI. SIT TIBI TERRA LEVIS MVLIER DIGNISSIMA VITA cp e(p££opevog, E* o' ccys vvv x,a.Tct£vi§i, Xnzruv xopov cvqolviuvuv, 5 'Ej yocv yvxo(pvuu sloB(ri^ 7rrepvyuv' Ko» Xu^sv To£e revxog, Z,coxpa.TiK7Jv octpunuv "Afjctpig £%£<, xoci arrjg ksovoc ytvs^Xoc (ppevog' XI* evi KotrfjLOTSxyyjg oktoo TTTD-^ocg ovXvpt,7roio, 'E<£ ioiuv eXkuv ctpxervirov iffpasiriow , 10 AeiftotTO zocp'srocXi^ug' vtfcitv}V (rsXueoriv ctTreipoig Aa,idocXXuv 9 tyjv ttso ytXzlofjizv aTtXuvia.' Taj «y utpe^eiyg povotpeyyec&g Ifceropevirsu v. 4. Ti-rnvx Ji'pa I^e^o'^evoj.] Totns tonis, ad quae aMusuro in hoc exordio hie locus adumbratur ex Platonis Phae- alluditur, sunt, Timaeus, Pliaedrus, dro, p. m. 275. 'o ptv S>j /ulj/aj hyi- Phaedon, de Republica, et forte de Le- f*iv h ovgavS Zei/j, nrwov ag/xa i\a.vyoov, gibus. — Markland. TtrpSroj ito^virai, Siaxoa-|uav •Bravra. nal v. 9. oxri] Hacc dicunturde Plato- t'!rifx.i\ovfA.tvog' r£ $' tnitai o-Tparja nis Physicis,quae ccelorum formationem ©e£v ts xai Acuftomv, xari jvJex* /ulfii per multiplicem sphaerarum concava- x.Bnoa-y,riy,ivti. Vide Maximum Tyrium rum, aliarum aliis interiorum, ordinem Dissert, x. 4. et doctiss. Davisium ad explicant : quorum dogmatum partem locum. Faciles jam intellectu sunt hi Ptolemaeus in sjstema suum postea quatuor versus, et wtwvov a-opa. versu transtnlit. — Fost. ultimo. Opera vero parlicularia Pla- v. 10. 'e£ i&i'a>v I'Xxan] Hie versus MARCI MUSURI E L E G I A. DIVINE Plato, comes Deis et Semideis praestans Magno agmine summura Jovem stipantibus, Cum ille per coelum amplum equos concitatissimos Agitat, alato cumii insidens : Age nunc descende, choro ccelicolarum relicto, 5 Ad terrain spiritualium remigio alarum, Et accipe hoc volumen, quod Socraticos sermones Continet, tuaeque honestos foetus mentis. In quo Mundi fabricator octo sphaericos sinus coeli, Ex suis trahens exemplar prascordiis, 10 Condidit celeriter: summum luminibus infinitis Distinguens, quern quidem perhibemus Fixum ; Reliquos autem ordine subjectos uno lumine splendentes ccelavit, ex illo Praxitelis epigrammate desump- Ibid. s^STopsus-fv] f. Ittt' iro^vnv — tus videlur, quod apud Athenaeum ex- " cui subjecti sunt septem, qui versan- tat. Statuarius iste ad exemplar Phry- tur retro contrario motu atque coelum." nes, quara amavit, Cnidias Veneris si- Cic. sotnn. Scip. c. 4. Non vero ex toto mulachrum finxit, et in basi stataas necessarium est sttt' Ito'^uo-ev, quia Cupidinis, ad theatri scenam posita;, voces -raj l^^lrtt;, reliquos ordine, <\aem- versus hos insculpsit : vis numerum expriment. sic illi, qui _■».««••■ » 10 » octo irTuvaq nominavit, et unam exce- ITpa§(TEXi)f, ov£7Tttirys, SinHnZaig-iv t^ana, , « , »» »„■. , v «. . > *< P ll » a ' u&sFeujc per se erunt septem, E§ itfm; eXxoiv afytrvmov xpajujj. , ..... . sine ulla numeri istius mentione. Sus- Atben. lib. xiii. p. 591. — Idem. picor vero hie Musurum confudisse v. 13. ixfs^ei'i)?] Kara vox. usitalior I^E-ropii/crfv et s^iro^nvtrtv, et hoc ulti- »i|eiif. — M. mum voluissc. Dislinctionein verbo- 220 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. Avto-jEV axpoTctT'/ig olvtkx. kivv [x,svug 9 * V H clipu TifjcqevTa. oioovg kcci "WoXvoXf3oc yipot,. E£o%a o old 7rspi wqpi (piXei duo, tov (/,ev atp ip^g 55 'EXXolfiog, ov% evoc rcov, 01 7reXofzeo~§cc txvuv, 'Pccpoiiot Tpocmoi re xo&XEupevoi, aXXoe, TsruXutoTg 'ArQfiog, 4 ^Lirocpryig siksXov v\[A&£otg, Acto~Kctp£uv yeveqg Ipixufieog uzpov ccutov, Ka; Tpi7T(>ocru7ro(pccvovg ovvof/, f/ovTot, vsou. 60 v. 39. 'A|W4>oT£gov, a-of'mg « wfo'juov] Vid. D'orvill. in Chariton, p. 580. qui Allusnm ad Homeri notum islud, citat ex Nonno, ITavToi'ai; afttycri /xi- fjinXorig, et vertit, Omni virtute praditi. Ibi locutionem explicat. — M. V. 57. 'PdlfX3.~0l TpaixoiTE] f. 'Pt»f/.Ct~Q- v. 43. T»Xe6o'ov] Munckerus habet V^aiKol yt. — M. ©hXeSoov ; nescio unde : et interpreta- v. 60. Tpwf t>a-(ii'7ro$a.voZi\ f. Jearpoa-ai- tur, Longinquum. notymovt;. Nam Janus biceps et bifrons v. 49. avajtTogov] Bene Lie avaxTo- saepe occurrit. etiam quadrifrons : Ser- {ov; cujus vocis notio duplex est, et vius ad iEn. vii. 607. et Macrob. Sa- divinum et regium aliquod complec- turnal. 1.9. Quaero, ubi trifrons. Facile tens. 'AvttJtTojaiv, va£y n oixojv Qaa-ihioiv. quidem fieri poluit, nt Musurus, Grae- Hesych. — F. cos, non adeo accurate versalus faerit t. 51. Tla.vToiai<;a.£fra.l!cri(A.tfj<,Kk6rct(;.~\ in Historia fabalari Latina. Sedmirum MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 223 Cui tunc similem videre virum frustra desiderabas ; Utrumque, et doctrinae antistitem, et Pastorem popu- lorum Quotquot totam Europam incolunt ; 40 Laurentii filium, amcenae Florentiae stellam patrias Splendidam : Mediceorum autem celeberrimorum Virescentera pulchrum surculum, semper -florentem, dul- ces fructus edentem, Nuper Joannem, nunc vero infinitaruni 44 Gentium dominum, Leonem, qui praestantissimus cceli Claves habet, cujus nutum ut Dei veremur : Quern rex quisq; veneratur supplex, neq; aliquis illi Audet sceptra gestantium se conferre. Ingressus verofaustumsanctumq; palatium, statim ama- tores Tui, Plato, multos cernes in aedibus, 50 Omnigenis in virtutibus versatos, et sermonis socios Amabiles ac sapientes terrestris Dei, Quos ipse undecunque accivit, et ipsis gaudet Honorifica donans et amplissima munera. Prascipue vero ex animo diligit duos, hunc quidem ex sacra 55 Graecia, non unum multorum, quales nunc sumus, Romano-Grasci vocati, sed antiquas Atticae aut Spartas Semideis similem, Lascarinae gentis illustris summum florem, 59 Et triplices vultus gerentis [Jani] nomen habentis Dei. est Aldum Manutiuni hunc errorem (si mensis divisionem in Nonas, Idas, et error sit) non correxisse. Quod et de Calendas : Alii etiam apud Pierium versu 152. dictum sit. — M. Valerium de Hieroglypbicis, indigitari Ibid.'] Hoc unum est ex illis Musuri putant tempus prsesens, praeteritum, et vocabulis, in quibus satisfacere sibi se futurum. An forte ob hoc triplex posse negat Phil. Munckerus. " Quis tempus etiam Janus TgiTrgotrtuirtxp amt praeterMusurum (rffrontem ilium appel- appellatur, et inde slatuae ei erectse lavit ? Apud Hesiod. Theog. v. 287". sunt tricipites, quales non raro se vi- pe* TjwajJivw ropwvtt quidam inter- disse narravit aliquando nobis Nob, pretes Lunam intelligunt, ob triplicem Heinsius ?" Prasf. p. 10. 224 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y, Og \L £Tl TVT&OV eOVTOi, TtTOCTVip CtTZ (ptXTOCTOV ViOP. $ Lrepyopevog, irep^i oy\ crrep^ev u,7T0 Kpccoiyg' Ka,i poi creTvog ocov, nroog A^ocuooc pcovcrccv ocyovtrvjg, Aet£ev ocpiyvurug povvog e r rtio~Toc^evog. Tcv d erepov TpnrXouo-i xexoco-yJvov evesrivio-i, 65 Kat nrXoca^evroc rpioov X £ P jof] In animo habuit Sopliiiclem tur ; afflicta demum bellis Venetorum Q5dip. Tyran. v. 199. " h^ta. te tov pa- republica, Palaviuin deserere coactus "Ktfov, of vuv ap^aXnof ao-rri\syei jj.i, est, et Venetias se conferee : ubi eas- &c. 'AXXo7rp3s-aX\oLi"Aj>)i3f est ex Iliad. dem literas magna cum laude docait. E. 831. — M. Annis post paucis, scilicet aim. mdxvi. x. 83. Fvyanai^ Cum Musurus Pa- Romam a Leone X. auctoribus Alberto MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 225 Qui me, cum essem parvulus, ceu pater filium charis- simum, Dilectus, plurimuin dilexit ex anirao ; Et mihi angustias viae, ad Graecam Musam ducentis, Ostendit egregie solus sciens. Alterum vero triplici instructum facundia, 65 Et formatum trium manibus solertibus Gratiarum, Bembum praestantissimum. Magnus autem participes ouinium Arcanorum fecit aures hujus Pater, Omnia ei declarans consilia revolventis plurima Animi, explicansque cor funditus totum. 70 Illi vero te conspicati, ducent in conspectum Patris : et ille amicissime excipiet : sed tu utiq; Qua fas, sanctum apprehende pedem : " fave propitius (dicens) O Pater, O Pastor, fave propitius tuis gregibus. Et accipe benevolus donum, quod Aldus optimus, 75 Subactis haedorum inscriptum pellibus, Libens tibi mittit, nobilissime : vicem autem Huic beneficio petit ille vir, Non ut sibi aurum et argentum, non ut mittas Plenam palliis arcam purpureis : 80 Sed ut extinguas perniciosam flammam mutabilis Martis, qua nunc omnia deperdita Jacent. Nonne audis, ut Patavinis in arvis Omnia sint plena casde, omnia plena cadaveribus? Puerorum lamenta et mulierum ululatus 85 Pio, Carporum principe, et Joanne Monovasiensis, Manilio Rhallo jam Lascare, accilus est, ibique benignis- nuper mortuo, factus creditur. Euga- sime exceptus. Anno vero jam ante nei vero sunt inter Alpeset mare positi, tertio, quam Roraam commigraverat, et srepe pro Veronensibus, Patavinis, opera Platonis ab Aldo priraum edita, &c.memorantur. Liv. init. lib.i. Plin. prajstanti hoc carmine ad Leonem prae- lib. iii. c.20. Juv. Sat. viii. 15. Mar- muniverat. Cujus qnidem poematis tial. xiv. epigr. 155, et alibi. — F. gratia Arehiepiscopus Epidaurius,sive Q 22G MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. OXo^ £iryovTtxg xpxrepcx. y s^sXourucri /3iyi 9 135 AvTijpo&p o~u §so7g Iwivixtov vuvov ccsiouv, Koci pceyocX^g xaipcov sivskoc xoLfjLpoviyjg, Avdpouri viKyjrccTg, o-TEtpavYjCpopiz koccoct s^ovo-iv, Acrioog a.(pvsi7jg ttXoutov kit e ipso- iov, v. 115. nae-uc S'J f. ITas-Jif t*. — M. Turcas praelia secunda fecit. Inde v. 120. TovgKaom al'fjiart huojj.ivoi{\ Crojam, praecipaam Epiri (quae nunc Hoc ad Alexandri ducis Epirotarum, Albania est) urbem, Aruurathe oppug- sive (lit a Turcis et vulgo vocatur) nante, parva inanu defendens, mirabilia Scanderbecbires gestas videtur refeiri : virtutis exempla edidit ; per qua; Tur- qni, cum ab Amurathe defecisset, pa- cis, alibi victoria elatis, magnum quoad terua ditione reccpta, mulla adver.sus vixit terrorem incussit. — F. MARCI MUSURI ELEGIA. 229 Ad hos quoque Britannorum copias bellicosorum : Et omnis Italian quot fugerunt reliquiae fatum, Neque penitus fractae sunt hastis exterorum. Alii terras longas emensi 115 Vias, per montes et per medium continentis telluris, Et per fluviorum transmissi semper-resonantes rivos, Hostibus mei generis cladem ferant, Thoracibus muniti, simul cum Paeonibus curvos-arcus- gestantibus, Jam saepe Turcarum sanguine madefactis : 120 Sed mille navibus Venetorum mari imperantium Densum agmen, velocibus navigiis pugnans, Et naves Hispanorum praegrandes, montibus similes, Quae cacumina malorum inter nubes habent, Protinus ad Hellespontum (in summisq; ipsarum an- teimis Semper attollatur Crux salutifera) 125 Impetum faciant. Si enim urbi Byzantinae principi Redux affulgeat lux libertatis, Ipsum frangas immanis Draconis Contusum caput, aliaque ipsius membra 129 Facile dissipentur ; quoniam populus animos tollens Graecus, servitute nunc attritus, Antiques virtutis, ut libertatis diem cernat, Reminiscetur, vulnerans hostem usq; in viscera. Cum vero interfecerint Furias hasce, vel ultra Tndos Fugientes valida abegerint vi, 135 Illo die tu Deis triumphale carmen canens, Etmagnam gaudens propter victoriam fortiter partam, Viris victoribus, capita coronata habentibus, Asias opulentas gazas immensas, v. 121: Avto.% yiXiovauj] Connec- v. 107. recensentiir copiae terrestres, tuntar haec cum praecedentibus ; ideo- quas contra Turcas mitti Masurus to- que non plene distingui oportuit post luit : hie marine, nempe Veuet* et huiftim;. v. 120. In superioribus, a Hispanac naves. — M. 230 MAPKOY M0Y20YP0Y. Tovokcicov afpsvog te, gwj Xepct Too'7Tuio\}'x t oiq $itt.occca9"' o<5oV Ttrcttrjovoc, ztu tfpVhtp 07rXoig 'Opxy^ovTUi, oka $ U XP ayocXXopcEvot. 145 Koc) tots $q irari youocv cctt oupocvou euqvooeiccv TlrvjcrsTcci 'Acrrpotlov TrpzcrQcx, Amy vWy&Trjfi, MyxETi {AVjVtov(r 'Pcopvi xocTccvoio~o~ov, E7ri(TTYi(rug (Ttpuriv ocvdoocg, 160 Oi (Tto^ovcri Xoyoov ^uTTvpov coyvyiuv. v. 141. 'EfixovTas-nic] Sexagintaanni I. 136. qui, ut et Apollodorus Blbliotli. a ConstaDtiuopoli capta jam elapsi fue- I. 2. facit eum unnm ex Titanibus. ran t. — F. NotaiH istud Ovidii Metam. I. 149. — v. 144. wpiJXiv] Callimachus Hymn. terras Ast ™ a reliqidt. H*c alibi ve- in Jov. v. 52. catur J" 181 ' 1 ' 3 ' P ast> *• 249, Hunc lo- cum Musuri non intelligo. Scripsisso o5x* Se Ks&ptrif te TTBfl wpiX.v i^gfe potnit— AflTgafo «rgli«v, ovr ap o& K7iXovp£vog. 'AA AA' TOI upa YlTqVOV BUVTl §BUV CtpfACC KCi9l7TTOCf&evUt. v. 186. ffapo^Eow] Hoc ipsum quo- nemo enim ad singulos apices ila es>t niodf/ vertere debeam, hactenus ignoro. Lynceus. Mancker. praef. p. 12. Musuro significare videtur, incitans. v. 190. 'EXiJt&waSwv 'EXXwov aX^o;] Sedego mallem pro eo ^ita^fxxy, con- i. e. ' E\iy.tuna$uv seu Mov/rZv 'EXXw&aiv tractum nempe ex wa^y.acuv. nago^sa) aXirof, Musarum Gratcarum nemus. enim est, eadem statione utor, ab op/Aot; 'Ogwtixeevi yvrwv, &c. alludit ad Aca- statio navium ; sed wago^aa) est incito deniiam Grsecam, quani Leo modo in- ab ogfjiri, impetus. Si retineas nagop- stituerat. vid. ad v. 165. Hesycb. (Aioov, et sic metaphorice interpreteris, KwVkei, t)\w' 6aXfioiaiv iSiadai) 'Ev St •PA EI kcu 6X( aaov. Let his positions and arguments be set in a clear light, • Introd. to Essay. t Essay, p. 159, and in many other t Second Diss. p. 81. places. SECOND DISSERTATION. 241 that I may be sure I understand them ; and to the force of them (should it even be to my own confutation) I will readily submit. Truth is my object in this inquiry, not triumph : and truth I shall gladly embrace, whether I am indebted for it to my adversary's discovery or my own. And, indeed, when I published my thoughts on this subject, it was with the hope, not that I should establish every thing, which had occurred to me upon it, as right ; but that, after having cleared the question from some intricacy with which it had been perplexed, and shewn what was false, I might perhaps be more fully informed by others in what was wholly true. I should therefore have thankfully received any farther lights thrown on those points which I had not rightly seen. But this ad- vantage of better instruction in some articles, which I hoped to derive from my opponents (if any should arise) I have not yet received ; having met indeed with some censure, but very little information. But this displeasure of Dr. G. is not, it seems, so much on account of himself, as of the University, for whose injured name he cannot help feeling much resent- ment, though little for the confutation of his own opi- nions. The name of the University is therefore the first thing urged against me. In doing which, he hath endea- voured to divert in some degree the public attention from his own mistakes (most of which he hath prudently by his silence acknowledged and renounced, though a few he still maintains) and attempted therefore to blend the cause of the University with his own : which how- ever I know not that either the University itself, or the public, doth conceive 10 be one and the same. But it may be convenient for him, that the inquiry should now be, not whether his principles or mine are right, but whether the authority of a great University should not outweigh that of an humble individual. And so Dr. G. steps aside, and in some measure evades the question between himself and me, by leaving me to another with the University. R 242 REPLY TO DR. G.'S This question with mc he hath in another sense like- wise evaded, as far as he can, by shifting it from one point to another totally different. For let it be remem- bered, that his original position was, " that the present system of accents is not founded on the genuine pronun- ciation of the Greek language, which was agreeable to quantity, but on a corrupt pronunciation, which began and increased in later ages."* My position, on the other hand, was directly opposite : " that the present system was fixed in an age of pure Grecism, was agreeable to quantity then, and may be so now." This was the main point in dispute between us : and, not to mention se- veral other articles wherein we widely differed, a very material one this was ; though any one now upon seeing the state of the controversy, as lately represented by him,f would imagine that our sentiments on this subject had all along coincided, and therefore wonder why I should have been at the trouble of writing so many pages in combating a shadow. But most of those for- mer points appearing to him at present no longer defen- sible on his side, he now agrees with me, and would have it likewise supposed that he agreed with me before. However, his present agreement with me, or rather renunciation of his former opinions concerning the genu- ineness of our present system, I accept, with observing, that he now turns the question from the faithfulness of our marks to the modern use of them, from the authen- ticity of our system to the expediency of its practical application in England : which are questions entirely distinct from each other. I foresaw that an opponent, when pressed hard on the article of their authenticity and right position, would be very likely to give that turn to the controversy, which Dr. G. has now given it: and accordingly, that two different points might not be confounded together, I carefully premised the limitation * These are the words iu which Dr. Dissertation, p. 145. G. draws up his conclusion from the t Second Dissert, p. 77, 78. premised arguments, in his former SECOND DISSERTATION. 243 gf my former subject of inquiry, by declaring that my main object of discussion then was, to find out, " as a fact, what the ancient pronunciation was :* and whe- ther our present marks were faithful notations of it."f But since that is now settled, and by silence conceded to me, I am not unwilling to follow the question in that direction, which Dr. G. has now given to it; having indeed already touched on this part of the subject in the last chapter of my Essay, and being ready to ad- vance much more, than will probably be required of me, upon that or any of those points, on which he has in- sisted in his Second Dissertation. The first thing which there appears against me is the name of the University, on which, however foreign from the merits of the cause between us, Dr. G. has written (and perhaps, because it is foreign) with more zeal than on any thing respecting our question. To this part I no more decline an answer, than to any other of his book ; acknowledging, that the authority of an University must, in every literary case, be allowed to have great weight, and is not wantonly to be disputed. But on this occa- sion I conceive the far weightiest authority to be on my side. I say nothing of arguments and reasons: I mean here authority of persons ; the authority of every emi- nent scholar, except that visionary man Isaac Vossius, from the age of Aristarchus down to the present time. Particularly in respect to modern grammarians, I shall not, I trust, justly give offence to any man, if I place Budasus, H. Stephens, Salmasius, Grotius, Casaubon, Hemsterhuis, Wesseling, D'orville, Alberti, Valckenaer, (not to mention some very respectable names at home) in a rank of learning and judgment superior to those modern teachers and editors of Greek, with whom I am now concerned. And if therefore they charge me with rudeness for questioning themselves, I will retort the same charge on them, for questioning their superiors. For, to * Essay, p. Ib6. t Ibid. p. 181. R-2 244 REPLY TO DR. G.'S depart from the uniform and established practice of those great scholars, is at least calling the propriety of it in question. If they do not dispute it, nay, if they do not disapprove it, why reject it? The more weight is allowed to the authority of an university, the more necessary it becomes to point out any thing that is really defective in its practice : be- cause the sanction of such a name may propagate and establish the defect. Had maimed Greek copies come from a press at Birmingham, at Norwich or Gloucester, or even at London, it might not have been worth regard- ing. And this, perhaps, was the reason, why Dr. Twells took no notice* of the suppression of accentual marks in that edition of the Greek Testament which was inaccurately published at London, in the year 1729. Such an omission, authorized only by a common press, may be confined to those particular copies so printed : the credit of the press is not sufficient to influence others to follow such an example. But that of a great uni- versity, (the credit of which is, at least ought to be, the highest in ancient literature) if it adopts an error, is sure to spread it ; plus exemplo, quam errato nocet, its influence is powerful and extensive: and on that ac- count, whenever its example is not right, it more parti- cularly requires reformation. The charges, which I have drawn upon myself by my manner of mentioning the university, of self -conceit ,f opprobrious language, % indecency, § acrimony, \\ and great assurance,^ in falsifying a testimony, are what I should be as unwilling to return as to deserve. The four first of these being general charges, and urged in the common language of controversy, I shall leave to themselves ; especially as I perceive that I share in them with a better man** than myself on a like * Pref.to Second Dissert, p. v. || Ibid. t Ibid. p. v. and Dissert, p. 89. IT Ibid. p. 18. t Ibid. p. 11. ** Some of the terms of reproach, § Ibid. p. 14. in which Bp. Gardiner enforced his SECOND DISSERTATION. 245 occasion : the last being particularized by a fact does, on that account, better admit an answer, as on account of its severity it certainly requires one. I am accused " of citing Mr. Cheke's declaration on my side, which he not only did not make, but which cannot even be* inferred from any thing which he has said on this subject." How is this gross charge against me supported ? Why thus : " Accents came not within that professor's proposed subject of inquiry in his ' exposition of the forma totius rei,' and I myself acknowledged that they had no share in the dispute be- tween him and Bishop Gardiner." I did so : they could not be disputed ; for no scholar, that I know of, engaged in that controversy, dreamt of their being wrong : but though they were nota point in dispute, nor included with- in the proposed subject of discussion, they yet occasion- ally were mentioned in the course of it, as appears from two passages cited by me,f where Mr. Cheke's declara- tion is notinferred,butexpressed, in favour of my cause. A man of Dr.G.'s erudition is surely not to be told, that the contents of almost all books exceed the outlines marked by their authors at their entrance upon the subject ; and that it is impossible therefore to judge of what may occa- sionally arise from what is professedly laid down as the general argument. This I have myself found to be the case in every book which I have yet perused. Which shews only, that a person, before he asserts what a treatise doth, or doth not contain, should know somewhat more than its title, introduction, or first chapter ; which may, edict, in answer to Mr. Cheke's re- me the honour to join my name with monstrance, are these : arroganiia, p. Mr. Cheke's in the charge of unhand- 163; ■philautiu, 165 ; inanis loqiiacitus, some and contemptuous expressions, ibid. ; irreverens illusio, ibid. ; lingua seems to think that the professor was virulentia, 213 ;arrogans liceniia, ibid.; not only smartly, but justly repri- supi'.rbia et petulantia, ibid. ; auducia, manded by the bishop in that answer. 214 ; temeritas, 217. Dr. G. in Sc- * Pref. to Second Diss. p. xv. cond Dissert, p. 89, where he does t Essay, p. 199. 203. 246 REPLY TO DR. G.'s indeed, acquaint him with the forma totius rei, but not with the tota res. Whatever Dr. G. may conceive of the professor's work, from the premised exposition of it, certain I am, that, before I published my Essay, I did read, and do read there now, the following words : Ne- que video quid doctis relinquatur ut mutent, non in verbis, non in sonis, non in spiritibus, non in accentibus, deni- que in nulla ne minima quidem lingua parte.* In which words, if I am capable of interpreting them rightly, Mr. Cheke declares, that " he sees not what is now left for scholars to alter in the Greek language, either in the words, the sounds, the spirits, the accents, or any the minutest part of the language." He speaks of that artificial form of the language, in which he received it, and of which our present visible accentuation made a part.f And he not only here says, that this part is to be kept inviolate, but in another passage affirms, that it was actually applied to its proper use in pronunciation, consistently with quantity, by his friends and scholars. JDe multis, qui hodie Juijus lingua studiosi sunt, asseve- rare possum, illos omnem hanc pronunciations formam ita tenere, ut verum literarum sonum, quantitatem, accentum, summa cum facilitate ac suavitate eloqui possint:^ By these words I have supposed that Mr. Cheke says : " I can affirm of many Greek scholars at present, that they are so far masters of my method of pronunciation, as to be capable of expressing the true sound of the letters, their quantity, their accent, with the greatest ease and sweetness." If, in this con- struction, I have faithfully followed the sense of my author, the reader will see, though Dr. G. cannot,§ upon * De pronunc. ling. Grae. ad Steph. video quid doctis relinquatur ut inu- Episc. Vinton, p. 258. edit. Basil. tent," &c. id. ibid. He speaks of the Ann. 1555. language here, as being no longer a t " Nunc autein lingua hfec a popu- popular one, but subsisting only in lariloquendi forma ad artificium quod- material characters, and therefore set- dam deflexit, et certain habet formam, tied and invariable, propriamque ideain suarc, ad quam $ Ibid. p. 284. edit. ead. consequendam laborant docti. Neque § Pref. to Second Dissert, p. xvii. SECOND DISSERTATION. 247 what good foundation Mr. Foster could produce Pro- fessor Chekefor an advocate in his cause : nor will he, I presume, think that I have, by a too hasty inference, and with a good degree of assurance, given this [testi- mony ' of Mr. Cheke] to my readers for a certain fact* I did give it as a fact, and a most certain one it is. If those words, cited above, are not in Mr. Cheke's book, I am guilty of forging them ; or, if they are retracted, or contradicted by him in another part, I am inadvertent in not comparing them with that part: but if they are there, and not retracted in any other place, I am unjust- ly accused, with more haste than a good and consi- derate man ought to use in so heavy a charge, of impu- dently asserting a false fact. When Dr. Bentley wrote his famous epistle to Dr. Mills, he did not formally propose to write upon the Greek accents : but yet a sentence relating to them ac- cidently came from his pen, which Dr. G. has given us in his title. I will not say to him, " that this declara- tion about accents is not in Dr. Bentley's epistle, be- cause they are not comprised within the forma totius epistolai." I read it there, and accept it as Dr. Bent- ley's, with all the deference which is due to that great master of ancient learning. But I doubt, whether by the ratio hodie prcepostera atque perversa Grcecorum accen- tuum, he did not mean the absurd and perverted modem method of using them: if that was his meaning, I am entirely of the same opinion, my declaration of which I have very often repeated. But if he meant otherwise, and really intended the present system of Greek accentual marks, I should be glad to learn what his reasons were for that opinion : if his reasons were the same with those assigned by the common followers of Isaac Vos- sius, and he had even published them, I should have ventured, perhaps, to examine them ; and, after exami- nation, should certainly have rejected them. If, how- ever, Dr. Bentley's sentiments, concerning our system, * Preface to Second Dissert. i>. xviii. 248 REPLY TO DR. G/s did really, at the time of his writing to Dr. Mills, agree with those of my adversaries, it is evident that he changed them afterwards : for, in another piece, written by him in his later years, professedly on a subject of metre and rhythm, he considers the Greek accents as certainly differing* from the Latin (the accommodation of which two is the consequence of every alteration proposed by the scholars of Isaac Vossius), without hinting the least suspicion of their present visible sys- tem being vicious or corrupted. Undoubtedly he did not what my opponents have so frequently done, consider the mark of an acute as at all concerned with the quan- tity of the syllable on which it appears; and laughs at Le Clerc, on the supposition that he had made a mistake of this kind in placing IWoroc, as aCreticfoot, at the end of a trimeter iambic.f Dr. Bentley's authority, therefore, in this cause will hardly be allowed to conclude any thing against me. But still less will the words of Scaliger, produced by Dr. G.J be found to conclude against any thing which I have advanced. He hath not, indeed, so much pro- fited as he might have done by that admirable book, to which he was directed by my Essay, and which he owns he had not read when he published his former Disserta- tion. For, observe now, what an use he makes of that book. He finds in it a passage (of which he thinks I was ignorant, though I referred to it in my Essay§) * De metr. Terentian. p. 16, 17. is beside our present question." On t " Ohominem eruditum, qui sena- the same passage, to which I then al- rium claudi posse credidit vocabulo luded, I have more freely remarked in txa/rrog : mirum ni verba, non quanti- p. 358 of the 2d edition, which was tate syllabarum, sed accentuum ra- printed before the publication of Dr. tione metitur." Emendat. in Fhilem. et G.'s Second Dissertation. And when Menand. §lxiii. I declare that I wrote those remarks X In Second Dissert, p. 5 — 11. long ago, I appeal (if it should be ne- § First edit. p. 174. " He (Scali- cessary) for the truth of it, to the ger) says, indeed, that if the nice to- learned Dr. Taylor and Dr. Barnard, nical pronunciation of the ancients who kindly perused those papers of could be expressed by a modern, it mine, which contained them, in the would be disagreeable to our ears. It middle of the last summer. might have been so to his. But that SECOND DISSERTATION. 249 wherein Scaliger attempts to prove that the Greek ac- cents are, in some of their places, improper ; and from thence he takes occasion to shew the falsity of an asser- tion of mine, which I never made, viz. "that the opi- nion concerning the impropriety of the Greek accents was first started by Isaac Vossius." This was never in my mind, nor on my paper. But Dr. G. often imputes to both what never belonged to them: as in this case. For I knew that Scaliger had long before (as I have shewn) called in question the propriety of the accents themselves in certain positions. And what I said of Vossius was, that, " as far as I was able to discover, the faithfulness and propriety of the* accentual marks was never much doubted before his time." Which is true,f at least as far as Scaliger is concerned. For Scaliger acknowledged the faithfulness and genuineness of the marks (which Vossius afterwards disputed), and argued against the tones themselves, on the very supposition that they were truly denoted and represented to us by their present marks. The difference here is this : Sca- liger took it for granted, that the old Greeks did apply their tones to those syllables on which the virgulce now appear ; Vossius thought that they did not so apply them, but to other syllables. Here then Dr. G. is guilty of the old mistake of confounding the word accents with their visible marks: into which he ought not to have fallen, after having been so particularly cautioned^ against it ; nor so soon to have forgotten that distinc- tion, which he acknowledges I made with a very good * Inlroduct. to Essay. doubted before Isaac Vossius. And so t There may have been some learned Henninius : " Viderunt equidein viri men of the same opinion with Isaac doctissimi,sedpaucissimi, Gracismum Vossius, before his time, whom I do male subinde pronunciari ; veruntamen not know. But whoever they were, nemo unquani eruditorum illud inquisi- they had not sufficient credit and au- vit — solus Vossius V. CI. ante annos thority to recommend their opinions: hos forte decern mascule hauc corrup- and that made me say, that the authen- telam notavit, sed strictim et paucis." ticity of our marks, as far as I was Praef. p. xii. able to discover, was never much $ Introd. to Essay. 250 REPLY TO DR G. S design, viz. to guard against ambiguity.* But that am- biguity doth here furnish him with the means of making me, by the help of altering my written words, appear ignorant of the history of my question. This method of serving a controversial purpose, by changing an au- thor's words in a sentence quoted (as hath been done here), or by suppressing that part of them which is not convenient to an hypothesis (as hath been done by the same person in a passaget from Alexander Aphro- disiensis), I must not, perhaps, call disingenuous ; for the expression is unhandsome. May I be allowed to say, that I think it wrong ? My foregoing words, concerning the younger Vossius, have fared in a like manner with the next which Dr. G. produces % from my Essay, and applies to himself and his own arguments ; neither of which did I mention in those pages, or had in my mind : for I was there con- sidering what had been inferred from Dionysius by an- other objector. That passage of Dionysius did indeed lead me to another || which Dr. G. had twice cited : and which, as it now stands, explained in connexion with the context, carries a sense very different from that which it appeared to have, when given before in a de- tached form. Another passage of Dionysius, no less perspicuous than curious, which I truly did § apply to him, he thinks f that I have mistaken. But to that interpretation of it which I have given, and which to Dr. G. appears forced and unnatural, I find myself obliged to adhere for the following reasons, which readily present themselves from the context. I before, indeed, in order to avoid an unnecessary prolixity, omitted to produce them ; which now, however, as they seem to be required by Dr. G., I will explain. But first let it be observed, that * Second Dissert, p. 81. || Essay, p. 85. t Essay, p. 6. 98. § Essay, p. 2. note. * Second Dissert, p. 13. cited from 1 Second Dissert, p. 20—27. Essay, p. 82. 85. SECOND DISSERTATION. 251 the two things, compared in it by Dionysius, are now allowed to be, as I stated them, " Oratorical or common discourse with musical expression," not as he before stated them, " Prose with poetry." This correction then he admits. Let us see whether he will not now find rea- son to admit the other. Dionysius, inquiring into the par- ticulars which constitute agreeable and sweet composi- tion, says, * " the consideration of oratorical or common language hath been looked on as having somewhat of a musical nature; differing from vocal and organical music, not in quality, but degree. For even in discourse, the words have melody, rhythm, variation, and grace." Here then they both agree tw Ilotw, in quality. How do they differ in ™ Uocno, in degree ? The particulars of their difference in this respect, in degree of fxiXog, he proceeds to shew very distinctly. " The melody of discourse is measured by one diastema or interval called the diapente, us lyyiaTa, at a mean computation. But organical and * Mous-iJtr) yap ti?3v Xttl h t£v TroXiTixSv 7\6ycov \'KlfJ,n, to ITocrw SiaAXaTTOUirtt T«j Iv w'SaTj xai opyavoj?, oip^i w IToiffi. Kai ya£ ev TauTji xa.) fj.t'koq 'i^ovriv ai Xe£ei?, kcu pvQ[j,ov, xcu fj.ira,@o'khv, Kal ffps'wOV. 0)T7t Kttl £7Tl TaUTllJ h aXOr) TEp- tusrai fj.lv toI's jU.eXeo-iv, ayirai Se to~; (vQjj,o~<;, as-tta^nai Ss Taj fj.sra.lSo'Kas, itoQlt S' ETTi ttovtojv to oikeIov. AiaXEXTOD fj.lv ouv fjiKo; svi fJiTpsirai ^laa-rfifjart Ta> "Ktyofj-ivxi AIA V nE'NTE, oij lyyuna, xai OllTE EWlTEiVETa; fffpa t5v Tpi£v tov»jv Hcu nfAlTOVlQU E7TI TO o£u' o2t£ dviETttf TOli yjM>- ptOU TOUTOU %\l~0V E7Ti TO /3agu H Je lfya.vi.im te (cat aJSiJtfl fjova-a. ^iaa-rn- fjaa-'i te J££>rrai ttXeioo-iv, ou to; AIA* nE'NTE jUo'vov, aX x' affo toD AIA' ITA2 ft~N a^afjivn, KttX to AIA v nE'NTE ^eXsjJei", xai to AIA V TE22A'PJ2N, xaj to AIA* TO- NON, jtai to 'HfJlToviov, &>q &£ tive? oiWaf, nai Trjv Aieo-iv altrfltiTiS;. Sect. xi. WEgt 2w9. Dr. G.'s friend, Isaac Vossius, in Lis book de Poematum cantu, hath explained this passage, concerning the number of tones used in discourse, which is in that respect different from music, in the following manner: " Vox in communi sermone ut plurimum intra diapente subsistit, ita ut neque plus tri- bus tonis cum dimidio iutendatur, ne- que majore intervallo infra conimunem loquendi modum deprimatur." He says in another place, " in Cantu latius eva- gari souos, quam in recitatione aut com- muni sermone, utpote in quo vitiosum habeatur, si vox ultra diapente, sea tres tonos et semitonium, acuatur." Mr. Upton hath quoted this on the fore- going passage of Dionysius. Vossius and Upton do both therefore interpret it, as I have done, and refer the whole to the wider compass of tones used in music than in discourse. If how- ever it should mean this, " that music uses more kinds of intervals, than com- mon discourse ;" this sense would equally suit my general purpose, and favour my main argument. 252 REPLY TO DR. G/S vocal melody [to which lyric pieces were set] uses more diastemas, not confining itself to the diapente, but taking in the diapason as well as the diapente, the diatessaron, the diatonon, with the semitonion and diesis." Whoever understands the meaning of these technical terms (and any one may understand them by looking into Dr.Wallis's Ptolemy, or the collection of Meibomius, and probably a hundred other books) well knows that they relate to tones considered numerically in their ascending or de- scending, with their division of semitonion and subdivi- sion of diesis. This is my reason for supposing that the word IIoctw above signifies, in number. I well know that JJogottiq doth signify any other, as well as a numerical, degree : but I think not here ; because the illustration of our UoaoTrjg in this passage is made by words, which belong to number only. I therefore still imagine, that I have the authority of Dionysius for saying, that oratorical or common discourse differs from music, not in the quality, but number of sounds. Every thing which Dr. G. in quar- relling with my word number, says in opposition to it, amounts only to this, " that there is a greater quantity of fxiXog, pvdfioq, &c. in music than in discourse." I never denied it ; and now say the same. But the differ- ence between us lies here : he stops short, and says not in what this greater quantity of melody, this more con- sists : whereas I try to shew from the following words of our author, which he overlooked, that this more consists in a greater number of tones, or in more kinds of intervals. But in whatever manner, or degree, the AioXIktov piXog may differ from that of music ; whether it has five, fif- teen, or only two tones ; the particular number is indiffer- ent to me and my question. Let me be allowed but one and a half, and that will admit elevation and depression enough for all the purposes of my argument. This was all which I desired to deduce from the words of Diony- sius ; and this Dr. G. readily grants to me.* Why then * " Both sides allow that each ac- two modifications in point of time ; and cent, consideied of itself, is capable of may be varied to the compass of four SECOND DISSERTATION. 253 dispute with me the interpretation of the passage? He is unwilling-, that too much assistance should be " bor- rowed from music to explain the doctrine of accents;* because this will confound vocal utterance with singing."f I will rid him of those fears ; because I can engage to explain my whole subject, on the scanty allowance, which I mentioned above, of but one tone and a half, for a Grecian voice, out of the $ia irivre of Dionysius : and there cannot be much danger from thence of common pronunciation being so modulated as to become a song. But after all, what so great assistance hath been, or need be, derived from music on this occasion ? The chief and almost only help from musicians which I have had, or required, is an explanation of those terms, which gram- marians borrowed from them and used on this subject. Yet this I ought to own has been an advantage. For if I had not defined and fixed the sense of them on such incontestable authority, my question, I am persuaded, would have been still embarrassed, and many points still disputed, which are now % given up. He is therefore displeased with the very mention of a || musical term, and five notes." Second Dissert, p. 78. this purpose I have recourse to the This is one of the points in which he musical writers, and shew from them now agrees with me, according to the that it signifies a high tone without sense of the word agreement explained any consideration of length, I am then above. told (Sec. Diss. p. 84.) that vocal utter- * Pref. to Second Diss. p. i. ance is not singing, and every thing mu- t Sec. Diss. p. 42 — 46. 84. Which sical is not music. When then I shew, pages if I were to transcribe, many that this word in its original and conse- sentences in them would make such quential, its common and rhetorical, its an appearance, as those concerning ordinary and figurative sense, constantly metre and rhythm given from his tormer implies haste and quickness, I might then Dissert, in my first chap. have spared myself the trouble of proving i Second Dissert, p. 77, 78. what nobody doth or will deny. It can- || As the word oguj, with its deriva- not well be denied now, but the nega- tives, is invariably used by the best tion of it was implied before, and is so Greek writers to express the acute tone still by those who annex length as ne- in common speech, it seemed highly cessarily joined with the acute. But neoessary in this question to determine if the foregoing method of finding out very exactly the sense of it. When for what ideas were by the ancients affixed 254 REPLY TO DR. G.'s because the clear musical explication of such words as fj>96yyoQ, tovoq. raaig, liriTUvofxai, aviE/nai, o^vtjjc, fiapvTiig, didcTT^fxa, k. t. A. hath greatly tended to the confutation of his doctrine. But if I should go a little farther than the mere ex- planation of these grammatical terms, why should I be debarred the means of illustrating a few positions by arguing from the power and use of a musical instrument to that of the voice in speaking ? Dr. G. seems to for- get, that Scaliger, in that very passage which he cites,* and much commends, has taken the same method. And with good reason. For as all musical sounds within a certain compass may be expressed by the voice, so there is no common pronunciation, which may not be ex- amined musically, and set to musical notes. Every sen- tence uttered at the bar, on the stage, in the pulpit, or in conversation, is as capable of musical notations, as that line of Virgil which Scaliger has represented by them.T And yet, because all vocal utterance may be set to notes of singing, it is not therefore a song, as Dr. G. thinks.^: As long as the voice, in rising or sink- ing from one syllable of a word to another, exceeds not the diapente, which Dionysius assigns to discourse (or whatever other compass may be assigned more exact), it may rise and fall within that compass, without the least appearance of chanting ; and every word will at to their words, is not the right one, ling. Lat.c. 58. apnd Second Diss. p. 8. what other way will Dr. G. point out ? t Essay, p. 156. Quid deml Quid non dem? Are there J " What may be expressed by mere a set of authors still unexplored among sounds, cannot equally be expressed in the Florentine MSS. by which we shall the pronunciation of words and sylla- find that magnus signifies little, y.ay.eoq bles. On this is founded the differ- wide, supuf and l^vq long ? ence between vocal utterance and sing- * " Quamobrem non liceat mihi vo* ing. When words are set to music, cem tollere in quarta a fine, nulla ratio then they are sung, and the modulation musica potuit persuadere : possunt e- is strictly musical. But when words nira eodem tenore tam in voce, quam are only uttered, then the modulation in tibia, aut fidibus, deduci mul- is only said to be musical." — Second tae vel breves vel longse." — De cans. Diss. p. 42. SECOND DISSERTATION. 255 the same time admit a musical notation, its sound may be considered in a musical light, and referred to a mu- sical instrument, as well as the words of any song set by the wildest Italian composer, to an air in the most excursive strains. Whether the UoiKiXia attributed to the Greek accents by Dionysius, in a passage cited by me,* be understood in that plain sense which I have given, or in Dr. G.'s more comprehensive signification, which he with the help of a conjectural alteration proposes, I must leave to the judgment of the reader ; who yet must perceive, how- ever he may determine this point, that the UoiKiXia either way will ultimately come to the same, and equally fa- vour me. For if " composition is to be diversified by combining words together with various accents," there must be, I presume, a variety in the accent of words be- fore they are combined, which consequently supposes, in the general tones of the language, that UoiKiXia, which I have imagined to be different from the Rigor et simili- tudo of the Roman accent, as described by Quinctilian. And this general variety will be a good reason, why Dionysius should advise writers properly to avail them- selves of it; which direction he would not perhaps have given, had there been in his own language the same stiff- ness and uniformity of tone, which Quinctilian per- ceived in the Roman, confining the accent to two places instead of three, and those two subject only to two or three simple rules, while the Greek is hardly reducible to twenty. Be this HoLKikia however accepted in whatever sense any one shall prefer. I am not in the least solicitous about the success of that word (whatever stress Dr. G. * Essay, p. 86. 'Pu9fx.nl ts aX- at the same time to disjoin it from its Xot6 oXXoi, x.3.1 o-^jUttTa navroTa, xaX present subject raa-si? and npoa-wSi'at Tao-Ei; <{)wv?? ai KaXoifXBvett npoo-wJiat with which it now stands immediately Ziatyopoi Mhiitrovcru.1 rn noixtXi'a tov xogov. and solely connected, and to refer it In the last clause of this sentence, Dr. equally to all the preceding nomina- G. proposes from conjecture to read tives. Second Diss. p. 34. xXt'ETTowi instead of x\i7tTove-at , and 25G REPLY TO DR. G.'s may imagine * that I lay upon it) in my application of it to account for that arbitrary and preposterous irregu- larity " in placing and changing* the places of accents, which the present system prescribes." f For the whole of this preposterous variation is defended by positive proofs, some of which are produced in my Essay, from the ancient grammarians, and admits of one general so- lution, which I have likewise there given, and on which I own I do lay great stress. For what is this irregularity objected to them? Irregularity, if it means any thing, signifies a deviation from rules. But from what rules are the Greek accents said to deviate ? From none, that I have ever known alleged, except the Roman. And from the Roman rules they must depart, if the ac- cents are Greek. Because the testimony not only of Quinctilian, but of the other old Latin grammarians, ex- pressly asserts, " That the Greek accents differed in their position from the Roman." What is to be done by my opponents with this ancient testimony, which so straitens them ? They will not ad- mit it. The Latin grammarians, it seems, are not com- petent judges of this difference, which they think they observed in two languages, which they every day heard. Dr. G. boldly £ rejects the testimony of Quinctilian, as cited by me.§ It is a pity he cannot entirely exclude that distressing passage from Quinctilian's book, on ac- count of its not being included within that author's forma totius operis ; or shew the sentence is wanting in some Medicean manuscript, or alter it by a conjectural emendation. While it stands as it does, it is untoward, stubborn, and utterly unmanageable by the followers of Vossius and Henninius. Dr. G. is much out of humour with it, and determined it shall not pass without some stricture ; he therefore gives it an ugly name, and calls it " very dimcult,"|| though it is as perspicuous a sen- * Second Diss. p. 11, || " This passage hath considerable + Ibid. p. 29. difficulties" Seoond Diss. p. 36. But i Ibid. p. 38. yet how soon does Dr. G. himself clear Essay, p. 151. up these difficulties, when he inimedi- SECOND DISSERTATION. 257 tence as any in that author's works. It is not easy, it seems, for Dr. G. to conceive, how the difference be- tween the Greek accents having three places, and the Latin having only one less by being limited to two, could occasion a difference in the harmony and sweet- ness of the two languages.* Now whether I could con- ceive this or no, I should believe it as a fact (as I do a thousand other facts on proper authority, though I form not clear conceptions of them) upon Quinctilian's word ; because he certainly understood both languages better than we do, and knew the sound of both from the mouth of Greeks and Romans. But I not only believe it on that account, but conceive it very clearly from my own ear: because in our own language, which admits the ac- cent on the last, as well as on the other syllables of words, if in reading any well-turned sentence I remove the final accent from all oxytones, and so make them barytones, I perceive that I invert and confound the mo- dulation of the whole sentence. To say there is none, or not much, difference between the Greek and Latin ac- cent, is saying there is but little, if any, difference in arithmetic between three and two. The real difference of Greek and Roman modulation, agreeable to Quinc- tilian's remark, is briefly and strongly characterized in a late work by a very celebrated prelate, where he distin- guishes between " the pure and flowing sweetness of the Attic modulation, and the strength and grave severity of the Roman tone."f Before Dr. G. had disputed the truth of Quinctilian's assertion, he should first have proved the falsehood of that position of mine, " that as the affair of the ancient ately adds; " It would not be an easy never did, and that, upon this account, matter to say what Quinctilian meant the Latin accents were not so sweet as by a Similitiulo of accents, if he had the Greek." P. 36, 37. proceeded no farther. But he hath ex- * Ibid. p. 37. plained himself by saying, that the f The Doctrine of Grace, vol. i. p. Greeks placed the acute and circumflex 74, first edit. upon the last syllable, which the Latins S 258 REPLY TO DR. G.'s tones was a matter of fact of antiquity, the ancients themselves were the proper evidence of it." * I might have added, too, the only evidence. I was aware, that if my Essay should meet with opponents, they would probably endeavour to evade the force of ancient testi- monies, by confronting- them with some modern, to which they might appeal : and, therefore, I premised that caveat above (the reasonableness and truth of which is not as yet questioned) against all such appeals. Our f Gataker was an admirable scholar, and, perhaps, the best critic our country ever produced, before the great Bentley. But he never heard a Greek or Roman pro- nounce their own language anymore than Dr. G. or my- self. But Quinctilian heard both : for Rome, when he lived and wrote there, was full of Greeks. And all tes- timony in a case of sound depending on the sense of hear- ing, he who delivers this testimony from his own sense, must be allowed to have more weight than another who has not that advantage ; and this according to the ac- knowledged principles of Mr. Locke. £ There are, in- deed, some points in which a modern grammarian may deserve more attention than an ancient, even in what concerns that ancient's own language. The modern may compare the ancient grammarian with himself and with other ancients, and by those means detect an error even in Cicero or Quinctilian himself. And this, I think, has been done, in some cases, by a few accurate modern scholars. But then this detection depends on the examination of one old authority opposed to an- other. Let this method of confuting an ancient be tried in the case before us. " Quinctilian was not infalli- ble.'^ True; he was not. And, on that account, if his testimony had on this occasion contradicted that of the other Roman grammarians, I should by no means have urged it as decisive. But when it is in this article confirmed in the fullest manner by their universal con- * Introd. to Essay. t Human Under, b. iv. chap. 11. §. t Dr. G. appeals to him against 5. and chap. 15, 16. Quinctilian. — Second Dissert, p. 40. § Second Dissert, p. 40. SECOND DISSERTATION. 259 currence, I cannot but acquiesce in his authority on this point, without acknowledging his infallibility in all. Those who agree with him in affirming the Latin accent to be different from the Greek, are Diomedes, Macro- bius, Priscian, Donatus, Sergius, Maximus Victorinus, Servius. Some of these I cited, * and more might easily have been produced in confirmation of the differ- ence of those two things, which every alteration of my opponents, if it were to take place, would make the same. This difference, which is universally asserted by the ancients, is likewise acknowledged by the best mo- derns. Does not Dr. G. see this is admitted by the two Scaligers, in those very passages f which he cites from them in his answer to me ? If he overlooks it, I will not, but will take their testimony, and add to it, if it should be required, the suffrage of many other learned moderns. On this single point of difference I am willing to rest my defence against all the objections of Henui- nius, and most of Dr. G.'s : because those objections, if they were valid, must end in abolishing this difference, and leave the accents of both languages the same. But Quinctilian, with all the train of Roman gram- marians after him, was mistaken, in thinking there really was that difference between the accented Greek, and un- accented Roman, ultimate, which he suggests. For if this point be accurately considered, no such difference will be found. % I shall be glad to join with Dr. G. in any accurate consideration which he shall propose. Quinctilian then was not subtle enough to see that this difference he speaks of is, after all, only nominal. Why ? " because Qebg is, in effect, a barytone, as well as Deus ; and so is Qeov as well as Dei: in Qebg the grave mark no doubt denotes a grave tone ; and the circumflex of Qeov, when resolved into its constituent parts, i. e. an acute and a grave, makes the word end, as all Latin words do, in a grave, thus, Qwv." It does so : but still an acute is on the last syllable of Owv (which never is on a Latin * Essay, p. 152, seq. t Second Dissert, p. 5 — 11. and p. 71 — 73. j Ibid. p. 38. s2 260 REPLY TO DR. G.'S ultimate), though followed by a grave on the same sylla- ble. The word is indeed closed with a grave sound, yet not with a whole grave syllable, for half the syllable is acuted. And thus Quinctilian is justified in suppos- ing that there is a real difference between the tone of such words as Geou and Dei. The same essential dif- ference subsists between Qtbg and Deus. Those words, whereon we now see a final grave mark, as Oebg, Xpiarbg, dvijp, whatever Dr. G. may conceive of them as having a final grave tone, had certainly their elevation on the last syllable. Words of that form are called btyrova or bZvTovovfxtva by the Greek grammarians, from Aristo- phanes of Byzantium down to Lascaris, who always denominate words by the accent of their last syllable. Thus Aoyoc (or more properly \6ybg) is termed TrapoZv- tovoq or fiapvrovoQ : dvi)p (or more properly avi)p) is termed bZvrovog. Now in those which they call b%v- Tova, as dvfjp, if the acute tone was not on the last, where was it? It must be somewhere ; for " nulla vox sine acuto," except enclitics and atonies. If in dvrip it is said to be on the former syllable, what distinction then between the old d^vrova and (daovrova ? For the fiapvTova have it there. It therefore must be on the last of oxytones ; and that not only at the end of a sentence, but in avviTTH^ too, in any part of it. It might have a greater degree of elevation at the end of a period than in the middle of it; but in every position through a sentence, it undoubtedly had an elevation which raised the tone of that final syllable above the tone of the other syllables in the same word. And this is not my opinion only, but that of many scholars. * Still, therefore, after all Dr. G.'s refinement f in order to set aside the testi- mony of Quinctilian, an essential difference between a Roman barytone Deus and a Greek oxytone Otoe, or Qeog, doth certainly subsist. And my argument, built * Gumprecht in Floril. Gramm. Hoffmannusderaodulatione ling. Graec. Grsec. p. 81. Aactor Gramm. Graec. p. 45. Nouv. Methode de lang. Gr. Halensis. p. 15, 16. Chr. Griineber- par Mess, de Port R. L. ix. cl). 6. §. 4. gius in Gramm. Gnec. P. I. c. 3. Cl. t Second Dissert, p. 58. SECOND DISSERTATION. 261 on this difference, is therefore admissible, and if admis- sible, conclusive. But the affair of the final circumflex and acute is not the whole. The Greek method of leaving the acute on short penultimates, as in Sw/cpaVrje, and drawing it back from long penultimates, as in rvpawog, so contrary to the Roman method mSocratem and tyrannus, must have caused a farther difference between the tones of the two languages : and from this difference must result a dif- ference of modulation between the two. And since Quinctilian * says, " this difference of harmony engaged the Roman poets to introduce Greek words into their verse whenever they were desirous of giving it a pecu- liar sweetness," who shall now doubt it ? especially since the Latin grammarians f after him take notice of the Romans having preserved the Greek accent in Greek words Latinized. The remarks of Servius, therefore, on £ Sinwis, Periphas, ' Evandrus \ and of Dr. Bentley § on the Greek terminations in Horace, are far from being idle. * " Itaque [i. e. ex Accentuum di- See him on this passage, and on v. 100. versitate] tanto esl sermo Graeus La- of the same book, and on Mn. iii. v. tino jucundior, ut nostri poeta?, quolies 308. See Servius also on Eclog. x. dulce carmen esse voluerunt, illoram v. 1. and 18. and in other places, id nominibus exornent." lib. xii. c. 10. § Circa Epod. xvii. v. 17. "Sane t See Essay, p. 152. 159. observavi in Iambis, sermonibus, et | " SimoVs. nomen hoc integrum ad epistolis Lalinas declinationes libeu- nos transiit, unde suo accentu profer- tius adhibere nostrum; jn canninibus tur. Nam si esset Latinum, in ante- Gracos. In illis Cretam, Helenas, Pe- penulthna haberet accentum, quia se- nelopam habes ; in his Creten, Hele- cunda a fine brevis.'' ad iEn. i. v. 100. nes, Penelopen. Quippe in illis pu- " PeripJias. Ultima accentum non ha- ram et nativam orationem sectatus bet, nefasmininumsit: nee tertia a fine, est; in his plus exotici nitodis et quia novissima longa est : Erforiha- tranbmarink eleganti* aflecta- bebil accentum." ad JEn. ii. v. 476. vit." Dr. Bentley does not indeedex- " Evandrus. Aut non servavit nominis pressly mention the accent, but termi- dcclinationem, nam Evander facil, si- nation only: but the accent is neces- cutipse alibi, Pallas, Evander in ipsis: sarily implied as following the termi- aut Grace declinavit, o EilavJ^oj." ad nation, according to that of Donalds ; iEn. viii. v. 185. That Evandrus here " Sane Graca verba Gnecis accenti- is the true reading, is shewn by that bus melius efferhnus." Putsch. 1741. diligent and exact scholar Pierius. 20'2 REPLY TO DR. G. S Dr. G. defends his former explanation of a passage from Dionysius Thrax (which I rejected) * by still sup- posing- the word evpvripa, when joined with Qwvt), to sig- nify the same as /xaKporipa : f and asks what else it can there mean ? I say, it can not mean length without the greatest perversion of language. It is the business of the person who cites the passage, to ascertain what it does mean : it is enough for me to shew what it does not. And I cannot think that Dionysius intended by those words to assign length, as necessarily annexed to the acute tone (which is the thing that Dr. G. labours to prove, and wants to deduce from those words), because the same author, in the same MS. piece, applies to the same Tovog such words as express height and lowness alone. "Eon Tovog (he there % says), 'Eni'TASIS rj "ANE- SIS, rj ii£gotv)q (TuAXa|3(I»v tv(j) Q> ( on which account Plato # reckons <£ among those letters which he, with the greatest propriety, calls irveviiarwdri) it is gene- rally termed aspiration; when it is made to a whole word, to part of a single sentence, or of a whole dis- course, it is commonly called emphasis, or spirit: but the adflatio, the additional profusion of breath, is of the same nature in all these cases. For a fuller illustration of which, I refer the reader to the latter part of my first chapter. Dr. G.'s interpretation of Dionysius Thrax, brings me to the consideration of that point; "which, indeed, is the main foundation of the present controversy ;"f the true nature of the acute tone : which I think by no means necessarily connected with a long time, though some- times joined with it. Dr. G. on the other hand, is of opinion, that a delay of the voice or addition of time must attend that stress which belongs to the acute ac- cent.;]: I entirely agree with him in considering this as the main point in the present disquisition : because, if his hypothesis is true, our accentual system must fall at once, since the acute mark appears over as many short as long syllables, the true quantity of which must con- sequently suffer by our expressing the lengthening acute. On this head, those who have read my seventh chapter, will not perhaps think it necessary for me to add much here. But since Dr. G. supports his opinion by two authorities (which are indeed much more in his favour than those of Dionysius Thrax and Porphyry, unfortu- nately alleged before), I will here examine what he now farther advances in support of this strange doctrine, so repugnant not only tc antiquity in general, but to the powers and practice of millions of voices at this day in * In Cratyl. torn. i. p. 427. edit. not only by the letters in the syllable, Serran. but also by the stress that is added to t Pref. to Second Dissert, p. i. it, or by the delay that is caused by t " The pronunciation of a syllable the acute accent. And every such de- depends upon the body of the syllable lay is /SpaSurn? ri; tov xpoW. Second sounded. Now this body is made up, Dissert, p. 55. 264 REPLY TO DR. G.'s Europe, which not only can, but frequently do, elevate the sound of a syllable without lengthening it. The first author, whom he produces in defence of his opinion, is the * scholiast on Hephaestion (whoever he was), who says, " that the acute lengthens a short vowel :" and gives an instance of it in this line of Homer, Tpwec S' Ippiyrjaav, £7ra 'ISov aloXov odjtv. Here then the first syllable of 6(f>iv is lengthened by the acute. But let me ask, if so, how comes the first of i'Sov not to be lengthened too ? How does that escape the protracting power of the acute ? Does the acute operate by prolongation on one short syllable and not on an- other? This I cannot understand. Neither does the scholiast, or collector of the scholia, himself; or if he does, he thinks it not worth remembering ; for a few pages f after, he forgets the protraction of the acute, and gives the foregoing line from Homer, as an instance of the /mdovpog, i. e. of an hexameter ending with an iam- bic ; according to which the first syllable of 6i y.6vov kwixeifxivt) h J£e~a eViicei^evh tivi t£v ppcepgivy v @ga- tTneLvtc figa-xslas, y.nxvv£LV avrhv, a\\a xtu •/ytofxhioiv Si^ovtuv, fjwxvvsr wq liil rov, <5tjo*ei j wev«, xa\ fjLiTctxufjiivn, JuvacrSai t!j v > >>> ' v ... ,. „ (Spayzia. vpivov yapti~o-6a.i. Tfceef S zppiyricrav, emit iSov aioXov optv. ' „ A ",. ,-, t Pag. 92. edit. Pauw. h oil/ IQtHa. Toiat/rnv e^ei \ Eustath. ad Odyss. K. v. 60. V. iii. SECOND DISSERTATION. 265 the acute is capable of lengthening not only the short vowel on which it lies, as in aloXov o$iv, but likewise the short vowel preceding and following it." A round declaration this, extending the power of the acute very wide indeed over the adjoining syllables ! In conse- quence of which, not only the second syllable of Xsyo- ftzva is or may be long, but likewise the first and third too, and so the word, instead of being, as most scholars imagine, a proceleusmatic foot, Xtyufuva will become the fourth epitrite Xlyoiulva. Dr. G. I am persuaded, is too well acquainted with ancient metre, to swallow doc- trines, on the credit of the foregoing sentence, clogged with such inconsistencies, and so utterly subversive of all true quantity, for the preservation of which he is justly solicitous. Such solutions of a difficulty will very well serve such critics in metre as Joshua Barnes and Ralph Winterton, who, to save themselves the trouble of farther inquiry, hastily snap at them, and hurry on to the next difficulty, which is to be cleared up in a like manner. But they are laughed at and despised by every schoolboy, who has but looked into Dr. Clarke's notes on Homer. But how does Eustathius himself apply these principles ? the penultima of AloXov, he says, is fol. 1647. Edit. Rom. Second Dissert. the indifference and licence, which was p. 60, 61. more allowed in the quantity of proper names than of other common words. Bw £if Aio'Xou n\vra iuy.ara This should have been produced ; be- cause it is at least as good an account of AttyapoTH? Ii-Tfv, an; rov Aio'Xov avTi fA.au- the matter as the other : though neither paz expvrog TW TragaXnyovo-av — ■ 6sga- of them satisfactory and right. If Dr. G. itila S= tou /xtrptxoZ TrdQovi; fxaXierra h read to the end of this note of Eiista- Ifyta., Suvctixim Ixte/veiv, o>j aKXa^oZ thius, he there found in the remark on Ipplfli), ov [aovov B^ayy tjg vvv TVLTTirai cvvaptiog' aXXd icai ore ti)v St^doyyov ciaarj- paivu, cia tov 6 ypa(j>ovcn.-f Ut adeo AloXov hoc in loco * His famous abridger, Hadrian. Trpo'stXaj-ro; xa; tne pronunciation was 0T. Ho- sages in Homer, which generally are mer) a str anger to diphthongs, wrote passed over disregarded and without t jj e following words, OlXopsvnv. NoZe-ov, being understood, by all such who are & c# w i ta tne simple element thus, OAO- strangers to the circumstances of Greek MENHN. N020N.— Upon the whole, a literature at the time when Homer wrote. ma u that sits down to Homer, must —A scholar and a critic is bound to see read him in his own alphabet, and not a language in its first principles, ^n scrutinize his text by powers and cha- what I think philosophers call the racters, by those helps and conveniences Ratal form. For it is in criticism as of language, which were introduced in physic. No medicine can be applied after his age, and of which it is not successfully, without some knowledge possible he should have any idea." Dr. of the constitution. The O for a G. I a:n convinced, will think this while denoted the diphthong OT.— worth his attention in the case before Thus we need not be startled at A£§a us.— See also Dr. Taylor's Comment, •wag kliKov /j,iya\r)TO£CQ. Biv il; AiiXou ad Marmor Sandvic. p. 7. 9. AKuta. Zc*fA,a.Ta. For the writing was t Second Dissert, p. 55. 268 REPLY TO DR. G.'s that quoted by Dr. G., wherein i\og is acknowledged to be * acuted on the first syllable, which is short. In urging this point concerning the acute giving a length as well as elevation to a syllable, I am surprised he does not perceive that in consequence of this he must prove the first syllables of all such words as dnimos, legeres, legas to be long, and thus must lengthen near half the short syllables of the Roman language. He does and must allow the foregoing acuted syllables to be short, i. e. to have been actually pronounced by the Romans with one, or a short, measure of time. What is to become here of the lengthening acute ? I am al- most ashamed of dwelling so long on the proof of so very clear a point. These Latin syllables then had the acute, and yet were short : and why not the Greek have it in like manner? But why should I labour to evince by reason, what is granted to me by Dr. G.'s own con- cession ; or why allege any authority against him but his own; which allows " that each accent, considered of itself, is capable of two modifications in point of time,"f i. e. if I interpret these words properly, " ad- mits two different measures of time, a greater and a less?" His singular doctrine concerning the lengthening power of the acute is, I must own, introduced^: by him with some diffidence and a seeming unwillingness to affirm, that it absolutely gives a long time to a syllable. He says therefore it gives an addition of time, a /3paSvrrjc rig tov x?v vov > a kind of delay in time, a TrpoaOijKi] aKovj rga^yoiaTOcoi? rng sed solum Syllabam in genere dividunt atroplat;, aW' avro y,6mv etf B^ay^itav x.a.1 in brevcm et longam, von aqiium est /xciHgav Siat^oufA.mt; nvyzvuhv c-vKhu&nv , ignoscere. Adversus Grammat. i. owt 'ia-ri a-iryyiicefA.on'iv Sixoiov. Rlusici cap. 6. quidem fortasse poterunt relinquere quce- * De Metr. Comic, p. 62. 270 REPLY TO BR. G.'S from a low tone, in as easy and discernible a manner, as I can shorten the grave penultima of mdximos. The difference between the two to me is, that Kvpiov sounds much more agreeably to my ear, than if it were Kvpiov . I do therefore, in answer to Dr. G.'s queries,* declare, that " I speak upon a supposition, that an acute accent may be founded in such a manner, as will not make the short syllable, upon which it is laid, appear long." And let this then be called, as Dr. G. requires, " the standard accent ;" by which I mean only an ele- vation of sound, connected commonly with a long time in modern languages, but frequently separated, and always separable, from it in the Greek and Roman ; separable not only by the ancients, but by us. And when therefore we do not separate this acute from a long quantity in places where the ancients did, that I call an abuse. Dr. G. seems to think it strange, that " I would have our own language pronounced by one accent, and the Greek by another." But this I would have done, and shew it may be. If to the Greek lan- guage we are to join our own lengthened acute, because we are Englishmen, why not join to it likewise our own letters and characters, and thus thoroughly modernize it at once by giving it English types 1 Which, if done, however ridiculous this supposition may appear, would not so much affect the true sound of that language, as the application of an accent to it different from its own. Dr. G. complains,f that my account of the acute was obscure and hardly intelligible. I had said that "accent is not only distinct from quantity, but in the formation of the voice really antecedent to it. The height or pitch of the sound is taken first, and then the continuance of it is settled.";}: Agreeably to this, after having shewn that every acute sound operates quicker on the sense than a grave (which is as well proved by modern philosophy * Second Dissert, p. 7">, 76. 78, t Ibid. p. 83. 85, 8(5. 80. * Essay, p. 7. SECOND DISSERTATION. 271 as by those passages collected by me from the * ancients), I said, that, " even when the acute is joined with a long- syllable, though the duration of the sound [when elevated] is long, yet the power and effect of the acute [*. e.-of the elevation itself] is short and quick to the sense ; f which can perceive the effect of this elevation, before the con- tinuance of the note is determined one way or the other for long or short." If he really does not understand this, I am sorry that 1 am not more fortunate and clear in my expression; but comfort myself with the hopes, that it ap- pears not unintelligible to other readers. His complaints of the obscurity of my writing in some places, and his perversions of it in others, do now convince me of the expediency of that advice, which I offered to certain readers, from Gaudentius, and prefixed to my Essay. I have great reason to think that Dr. G. is not duly n)v aicoriv yzyv/uLvaaiLilvoz, hath not an ear lightly disciplined to the question ; since he seems not to distinguish be- tween the mere elevation of a sound, and the duration of it after it is elevated. If he could have distinguished this, he would not have written some of the latter pages of his Second Dissertation. When the acute accent, as described by me to be quick and rapid, is by him called mine,% he gives to me what has many owners, who have at least a joint property in it with myself, and indeed a much better ; I mean || Aris- totle, Cicero, Plutarch, Macrobius, Suidas, J. Pollux, Stobams, Pet.Victorius, Salmasius, Lipsius, and Bishop Hare. For all these writers described it before me in the same manner. As he diverts § himself so much with the confession which I made, of my inability fully to express to my satisfaction some things which I had conceived ; I could amuse him, since he is so easily pleased, with a hun- * Essay, latter part of the seventh |j Essay, latter part of the seventh chapter. chapter. t Ibid. p. 144. $ Second Dissert, p. 87, 88. t Second Dissert, p. 86. 272 REPLY TO DR. G.'s died passages out of Cicero and all the best writers, who frequently acknowledge the same inability. They all, on several occasions, own they cannot find expressions adequate to their ideas : and ray own incapacity in this respect, I am neither ashamed to perceive or to acknow- ledge. I often conceive things in my own mind, which it is not in my power to communicate to another. Particu- larly in a case of sound, it is frequently very difiicult to convey in a precise manner the idea of it, except by sound, or by characters appropriated to it, i. e. by musi- cal notations. Of this, no doubt, Michaelis was sensi- ble, when in writing upon this very subject he says, that he " cannot express himself so clearly to the reader, as he might, if his paper could speak."* Are we to con- sider these words of Michaelis as a ridiculous confession of inability, or as a proper apology of diffidence ? To those many difficulties, which Dr. G. confesseth f do attend the defence of his system, let me add a trifling one which perhaps he doth not see, arising from the different representations he hath given of me. For if I was capa- ble of writing such despicable jargon, as he, by a mis- interpretation of my words, imputes to me % in some places, I must be so far from having those literary qua- lities,|| which his unmerited complaisance hath attributed to me in others, that I should be the most dull and illiterate of mortals, and deserve to be debarred for the future from the use of a pen on any subject, after having so egregi- ously abused it upon this. But why should I complain of being misinterpreted by Dr. G. when in this respect I suffer in such reputable company, as (not to mention other authors) Porphyry ; whose rovog, and yjoovoc too, have been wrested and tortured by a more perverted § in- terpretation, if possible, than my poor acute ? * See the note in Essay, p. 200. sion of my words arises from his not t Second Dissert, p. 87. distinguishing between the effect of X " This is the same, as if Mr. Foster the mere elevation of sound, and the had said, that though the sound of it be duration of it when elevated, long, yet the sound of it is short." || Second Diss. p. 2. 93, Pref. p. xv Second Dissert, p. 85. This pervei- § Essay, p. 142. SECOND DISSERTATION. 273 The conclusion of his work doth at length clear up that ambiguity, of which 1 complained in the beginning of it : for he closes his Dissertation by declaring, that the main point, which he had in view, was to shew that the ancient Greek language cannot be pronounced accord- ing to accents, i. e. according to that [lengthened] acute accent, which we use, without spoiling the quantity.* I wonder it should be his main point, to shew what I had myself shewn, and disapprove what I had condemned and endeavoured to correct. But why was this exposi- tion of his main point thus postponed, and not given ra- ther in the first than the last part of his Dissertation 1 The reason of it is perhaps not very distant. Had this declaration appeared in the title or first page, instead of the last, the reader would hardly have turned to the se- cond, or chosen to be at the trouble actum agere. But we will take his explanation where we find it. And the amount then of his argument, as it now stands, is this. The present Greek marks of accentuation are, by his silence, allowed to be antique, genuine, and faithful, which he denied in his former Treatise. But they are now, it seems, to be neglected and erased from the book of learning, because we cannot in all cases express those very tones which they denote. My opinion on the other hand is, that they are to be preserved, not only as au- thentic and curious remains of antiquity, but as appli- cable also to their proper and original use. But allow- ing, for the sake of argument, the contrary to be true, " that we can not so apply them in expressing the old tones ;" yet, if on account of misapplication we are to reject them, we ought, en the same principle and charge of abuse, to expunge from our present Greek alphabet all those letter's, the ancient sounds of which we do not properly express : which should we on that account an- nul, we should leave the alphabet in as scanty a state as Palamedes found it. This kind of reasoning therefore proves too much, and is not to be admitted. But what • Second Dissert, p. 94. T 274 REPLY, &C. if we can express the old tones more truly, than we do the ancient sounds of many single letters? And this we certainly can. There is therefore less reason for sup- pressing the tonical marks, than for cancelling those single letters ; though no good or sufficient reason for either. If in any of the preceding pages there should be found expressions, which may have escaped me in the warmth of argument, appearing unhandsomely to reflect on those from whom I am by rational conviction obliged to dis- sent, all such indicta sunto. Every thing of that kind I should always wish to have as remote from my papers, as it is from my intention. DISSERTATION AGAINST PRONOUNCING THE GREEK LANGUAGE ACCORDING TO ACCENTS. vouj, ouJe /M.6TaTi'9>)3-iv. aXX' o\'a$ TeaptiXn^i -rn tyuru raj a-uXXa#aj, raj re ftaxgaf xcu toi |3gaj(Eia?, roiauTa; <£uXaVrEi. Dionys. Halic. ITejJ 2w8e9\ Ovo/t-wtr. §. 11. t2 PREFACE. BY the Greek language, which the title-page setteth forth, the reader is to understand the ancient Greek lan- guage, and not the modern. This I look upon as a dif- ferent language from the former ; as different perhaps as the Italian is from the Latin. We indeed call it the modern Greek ; but the modern Greeks themselves call it pwfia'iicfiv. Simon Portius was the first, who published a grammar of this language at Paris in 1638, which he entitled rpa/xfxaTiia) Trig pw/xaiicrig yXuxraag. And Joh. Tribbechovius, in the year 1705, published at Jena an- other grammar of the same language with this title, Bre- via Linguce pufidiicTig Elementa. *" Appellator vero vulgaris Grascorum lingua ptDfidiKfj sive Romaea, quia Christiani Grasci Constantinopolim suam novam Romam pridem dixerant." Consistently with this, by accents the reader is also to understand those, which are commonly used in writing and pronouncing the ancient Greek. It is now about seventy years since Henninius and Wetstein wrote upon the pronunciation of the Greek language : and the same subject was moved again in Italy not many years ago. fMirtisbus Sarpedonius wrote against the accentual pronunciation, and $ Sta- nislaus Velastus wrote in favour of it. If what these * Mich. Langii Meletema de Ori- Romje, 1750. gine, Progressu, et variis Fatis Ling. J Tho. Stauislai Velasti Disserlatio Graecse. Sect. xx. Noribergaj, 1708. de Litterarum Groecarum Proiiuncia- t Mirtisbi Sarpedonii Dissertatio de tione. 4to. Roraae, 1751. vera Atticoruin Pronunciatione. 4to. 278 PREFACE. authors have said had been, either way, satisfactory to me, the following papers might have been spared. But, if I am not greatly mistaken, they have not gone to the bottom of this subject. This I am certain of, that the method which I have pursued is quite different from any which I have yet seen. However, the reader is free to consider what hath been, or may be said on both sides, and then to judge for himself. DISSERTATION AGAINST GREEK ACCENTS. A right pronunciation is necessary in all languages. And the more harmonious a language is in itself, the more will it surfer by a wrong pronunciation : as, there- fore, the Greek language recommendeth itself, above al other languages, upon account of its harmony, it must be well worth our while, if we would be acquainted with its real beauties, to know how it ought to be ~ pronounced. The use of accents in the ancient Greek language was one thing, and the modern use of them in the same language is another. The Trpomodim were musical, trpoa- ty$ia, fizT opyavov wdi). Hesych. irapa to Trpbg avrag (kl- Oapag) acuv ripag raxg (fxvvalg' ij irapa to irpbg avTag a^ea- Oai to. Trou]fxa.Ta. Etymolog. Mag. — And so * Alexander Aphrodisiensis, amuchmore ancient writer : irpoowSia, 6 Tovog irpbg ov aEopsv. f Henninius and others have argued against the modern use of accents in the Greek language, chiefly from ancient manuscripts, inscriptions, and medals ; in none of o which any accents appear: and this argument is cer- * Ad sophisticos Elenchos Aristo- t 'EXXwcr^of opMi;, telis, c. iii. 280 A DISSERTATION AGAINST tainly very strong and conclusive. For as to that part of the argument, which is founded upon ancient inscrip- tions and medals, if it should be said, that no accents appear in them because they could not be conveniently placed there, this cannot be said as to that part of the argument, which is founded upon ancient manuscripts, where they could have been conveniently placed. The main force, therefore, of this argument ariseth from an- cient manuscripts. And it will appear to have a still greater force, if it be considered, that no manuscripts that are a thousand years old and upwards have any accents : which is a full proof, not only that accents, as they are now used in the Greek language, were unknown to the an- . cient Greeks, but also that they are of a very mo- dern date, and were not in common use but after the abovementioned period, i. e. since the seventh century. * Nor were accents generally written in manuscripts immediately after that time : for there are many, and good manuscripts too, written since the seventh century, which have no accents at all. But the practice began in the seventh century, and by degrees prevailed. In the library of St. Germain des Prez there is a manuscript of St. Paul's Epistles, which was copied from a manuscript ofPamphilus, the martyr; as is said in the last lines of the said copy. The original manuscript was destroyed when the library of Cassarea was burnt; and, r consequently, the copy must have been made before the year 800. In this manuscript there are accents which are placed as accents are now placed ; and these accents appear to be as old as the manuscript itself; for the letters and accents are written with the same ink. In some places, indeed, the accents have been re- touched ; but yet so, that it still appears in these very places that the original accents (which are not quite obliterated) were placed just as they are now placed. This, I believe, is the oldest manuscript extant that hath * Montfaucon's Palseograpliia Gncca, p. 215. GREEK ACCENTS. 281 original accents. But even this manuscript carrieth with it a proof that accents were not then in common and general use : for it hath, not only many words, but even many lines, without any accents ; which must have arisen from the copier's being used to write indifferently with or without accents. When I considered this subject, many years ^ ago, I thought one might argue more effectually upon it in a manner that may be called a priori, i. e. from the nature of syllables, and even from the analogy of the doctrine of accents. Upon this principle I drew up some observations, which I have since put together, and now submit to the judgment of the reader; premis- ing this, that, by the analogy of the doctrine of accents, I mean a conformity to those general rules of accenting, which profess to have a regard to quantity, and to keep as much as possible the accent of the first word, or words of the same form, in the same place. My design is not to write against all use of accents ; some accents are and must be used in all Ian- » guages, for there is no harmony in continued mono- tones ; and therefore * Alartianus Capella very justly saith, that accents are the soul of words, and the found- ation of music : Anima vocum et musices seminarium. But my design is to shew, that the modern way of placing accents in the ancient Greek language is wrong, because it is, 1st, Very arbitrary and uncertain ; 2dly, Contrary to analogy, reason, and quantity ; and, 3dly, Contradictory to itself. The truth of these propositions will appear from an induction of particulars ; and it will be almost impossi- ble to keep them so distinct but that they will sometimes run one into another. The doctrine of the Greek accents is so perplexed a thing, that what is a rule in one o case, sometimes becometh the foundation for excep- tions to a rule in another case. And sometimes also the rules and the exceptions may be fairly transposed : so * Lib. iii. c. de Fasligio. 2S2 A DISSERTATION AGAINST (hat the exceptions may be converted into rules, and the rules may become exceptions. However, I shall endeavour to keep these things as distinct as the nature of them will allow. PROPOSITION I. The modern use of accents in the ancient Greek lan- guage is arbitrary and uncertain : I. Accents are not placed upon words of the same form by any uniform and constant rule, but words of the same form are accented differently ; and words ol dif- ferent forms are accented in the same manner. A polysyllable, whose last is short, and penulti- mate long, by nature, may be accented three ways, viz. on the last, penultimate, and antepenultimate ; as rtyovaa, rvrroixra; rairuvoq. And sometimes one and the same word of this form is accented two ways : as dviaai, ascendimt ; and dviam, sursiim mittunt ; diriam, abeunt ; and d(j>Lum, dimittunt; Mam, transeunt , percurrunt ; and liiam, transmittunt ; timaoi, or tviaot, introeunt ; and tlmam, or Iviam, intromittunt ; KarUun, descendunt ; and KaBuiai, demittunt ; lurtatn, persequuntur ; and fxtQCaai, omittunt. All these are third persons plural of iqpt, eo ; and "jfjut, mitto ; and, as they are all of the same form, they are capable of being, and so ought to be, accented in the same manner : whether they come from trjjut, or Ufu, the sense will sufficiently determine ; and, therefore, the rule prescribed in this case must be quite arbi- trary. " Hoc tamen sciendum est, in eundi significa- tione penultimam, cum simplicis verbi, turn composito- rum, utrumquerecipereaccentum posse : sed proparoxy- tonam habere desinentiam, quum prima singularis est tlfu (i. e. irjjuj) ; properispomenam, quum prima singula- ris est "rifii."* This rule, I say, is arbitrary in itself: and * Scot. Uirivers. Gram. Grseo. p. 320. GREEK ACCENTS. 283 what further evidently sheweth it to be so is, that, in fact, there are, as* Caninius hath observed, many variations from it. " In compositione (ab In/xi) Iviaai, at dalam. avviaai vero et avviuai. Trpoaiaat, noil Trpoaiaai : at iaai, ab slfu, sic componitur, Trpo'iaoi, non irpo'iacn- at avium et aviam. Kariaaiv et kotuuti. Suaariv et Biiacri. periatnv et -.^ fxtTictat" The first in fiia hath an acute upon the penultimate, though its a final is short ; pia being- excepted from the general rule, by which nouns ending in to have the a final long. But the last in piag and put hath a circumflex, though they are both capable of having an acute upon the first, becausef the last is long. The case of tag, i$, and pt)$epiag, p-qdepiq, is the same. And so in aptyw, and Suw ; which have an acute upon the first, and a circum- flex upon the second in aptyolv and Svolv. Aoyog hath an acute upon the first, but 6$6g hath an acute upon the last; though both of them are 19 words of the same form. And so Ikwv, volens, is an oxytone, but okwv, nolens, is a barytone. Monosyllables, long by nature, should be circum- flexed ; as>lv, rig, r). They are indeed circumflexed when they are contracted, but when they are uncontracted, they are oxytones by the general rule ; and so wv and ov are accented in the same manner. But this distinc- tion is quite arbitrary; for if a syllable be long in its nature, no possible difference, as to its sound and pro- nunciation, can arise from its being originally long, or from its being so by contraction. And, besides, as it is laid down for a rule in the doctrine of accents, that, when the last syllable of a word is short, and the penultimate long by nature, this, if ii is to have an accent, must 1q be circumflexed ; by this analogy, all monosyllables, long by nature, should be circumflexed, because it is sup- posed that they are to have an accent; and because, by being long by nature, they are as capable of being circum- flexed, as if they were penultimate syllables. But the • Helleuism. edit. 4to. p. 279. t V id. Etyiuol. Mag. Voce Eif. p. 30a. 284 A DISSERTATION AGAINST rule is otherwise, and the exceptions from it are the only monosyllables that are rightly accented. Verbal nouns ending in tog, ia, £ov, (which answer to the gerunds of the Latins) are accented with an acute upon the penultimate, though the last is short, i. e. they are accented in the same manner as if they were words of the same form with those that have the last syllable long-. Verbal nouns ending in rog are accented upon the 14 last ; as oparog. But when they are compounded, the accent is drawn back to the antepenultimate; as aooarog, i. e. *if the composition is made after the derivation. But if it is made before, i. e. if these nouns are derived from a compound verb, then they retain the accent upon the last; as scWo?, eiriOvfinrqg. But what sense is there in this 1 and what purpose can it serve, but to perplex things, which are very simple and easy in them- selves ? Verbal nouns ending in roc are sometimes used in different senses ; and grammarians are not agreed how to accent them according to their different senses. — 5 Ammonius saith, that apr\Tog, with the accent upon the antepenultimate, signifieth the harvest, i. e. the fruits of the harvest ; but that apnrog, with the accent upon the last, signifieth the time of the harvest. "Apnrog ttqo- TTapo^vToviog ar\paivu avTti tcl ^ipiapara, tovt \}<. nal 'ttyrtf. v. 382. j?3. un\ lire passages which he refers to, t Ubi supra. 2S6 A DISSERTATION AGAINST the accent for this third sense. For instance, aprjrog signifieth the fruits of the harvest, the time of the har- vest, and the reaping, or act of getting in, the harvest. But upon the whole, Moschopulus ingenuously con- fesseth, that in all the words of this form, there is no reason for placing the accent differently, according to the different sense which they bear. And, as what he saith on this subject is very full and express, I shall produce it here : apiiTog b Kaipbg ore apCxn, kcu 6 Kapirug 6 apwpevog, ical r) Ivipyua, i'ryovv avrb to apav. Sxrnrep aXorfTog b Kaipbg ore aXouxri, kcu 6 Kapirbg b aXoiLpevog, kol to aXoav. kcu b rpvyriTog b Kaipbg ote TpvyCom, kcu b Kapwbg b Tpvywpi- vog, kcu to rpvyav. aporbg Se b Kaipbg 6Ve cipiomv, kcu to apovv. coKOixTi £>£ b£,vv£ liraivtTog, vot)Tog, ayaTn)Tog, StuTog, vpv^Tog, kcu cnrXwg iravTa to. eig bg cnrXa. baa ano 7raS"rjrtKwv TrapaKtip£vii)v yivtTai 7repiairu)ptv(i)v avZ,v- yitov. curia cl ov (paivtTai oi rjv fKCtarov tovtwv IttI rowSe plv tov ar\paivopivov o^vTovTjS^CTCTat, ItrX ct tovc)z n poirapo^vv- SfocTai. "Eoy. kcu r H,u. ver. 386, &c. Edit. Heinsii, p. 95. II. The accent of the oblique cases varieth often, " and without reason, from the accent of the nomina- tive case both as to nature and place. Oxytones in tvg circumflex the last syllable of the vocative in eu ; as fiamXzvg, w fiamXzv : though they might retain the acute of the nominative case. And so contracts of the fourth ; as Xeyw, w X^x 01 '• which also might retain the acute of the nominative case. The genitive plural of the first declension is to have a circumflex on the last syllable ; as tcuuwv, reXtoviov, juouawv, Tifijjy. Now in most of these cases, the last syl- lable ought to have no accent at all ; but the penulti- mate should be accented with an acute ; both because the last syllable is long, and because the accent of the first word is upon the penultimate, rapiag, teXw- vt]g, fxovaa. Qvya.Tr\p hath an acute upon the penultimate. But in the oblique cases this accent is shifted about in a strange manner. It is upon the last in the genii, and GREEK ACCENTS. 287 dat. sing, and dual, and in the genit. plur. Svyarpbg, %v- yarpi, Svyarpoiv, Svyarpwv. It is upon the penultimate in the dat. plur. Svyarpaai. And in the other cases it is drawn back to the first ; and so as to all nouns ending in r\p. III. All dissyllable prepositions (except ova and Sm), when they are placed after the case, which they govern, draw back their accent; as Seov trapa, tovtwv irtpi. This is quite arbitrary, and very absurd ; for in such cases there is no change either as to quantity, or signification. The reason of this, I suppose, is, that these preposi- tions are, in this case, considered as if they were, in a manner, enclitics. But this is introducing one absurd- ity, to support another: for the rules by which the ac- cents of enclitics and synenclitics are directed to be moved, are as absurd and arbitrary, as those which re- late to the accents of words, which are not enclitics. If an enclitic is to be considered as so connected with the preceding word, as to make a part of it so far as ac- cent is concerned, there is more reason to alter the ac- cent of the first word, than to remove the accent of the dissyllable preposition ; as in the foregoing instance, 3-£ou -rrapa. For a circumflex bears upon its follow- ing syllable ; and so this cannot have another ac- cent. And it cannot bear upon more than one syllable, and this too must be a short one : whereas Ztov iraoa would be agreeable to the general rules, and have its proper accent. When a preposition goeth before its case, and is joined with it as one word, then the preposition loseth its accent, and the accent of the compound word is placed according to the general rules; as irapaxp^fia. AVhy then should not dissyllable prepositions, when they come after the cases which they govern, be considered in the same manner, and have their accents regulated according to the general rules, by which compound words are accented? For as these prepositions are, in 288 A DISSERTATION AGAINST both cases the very same, they ought to be pro- nounced in the very same manner. IV. As to the doubtful vowels a, t, v, they may be considered in three respects : 1. As being long or short in the same word. 2. As being always short in the same word. 3. As being always long in the same word. Now in those words, in which the doubtful vowels are always long, this consideration (in respect to the effect which it hath upon the accentuation) taketh place only as to the last syllable, but not the penultimate. AVhereas it would be of equal, if not more service, in the latter case, because here the reader is in greater danger of pronouncing wrong. For instance ; in ay- X v 9 a > yt, with an t subscribed, are contractions of the diphthongs at and 01 : q1 I mean only as to the writing of them, for they are the same as to time ; * or rather, they are the very diphthongs at and ot, having the t written under them after the modern way, instead of having it written at the side after the way of the ancients, who were strangers to the t subscribed. And yet a and 10 are never considered as * Dativus casus, qui, in Vocibus in vectum esset. — In Inscriptione Farne- o*, per a>, subscripto i, exaratur horlie, siana dativus casus in fet w per EI et bic (i. e. in Inscriptione Baudelotiana) 01 exaratur, ut in Baudelotianis Mar- per o exprimitur, s una serie adscripto, moribus. Similiterque dativus in a, ut animadvertas in illis vocibus EN TOI subscripto i, per AI. — Montfauc, Pa- rTOAEMOI : idque anteqnam <» fxiya. ad- Ictogr. Grac. p. 138. 141. GREEK ACCENTS. 291 short in the placing of accents ; which manifestly shews, that the modern doctrine of Greek accents is not founded upon any analogy or quantity, but is contrary to both. From this rule, however, some exceptions are - made. For ai In the tenses of the optative mood ; as fyiXfom. For ot 1. In the tenses of the optative mood ; as rervfyoi. 2. In contracts ; as So7r^o7, A?jrot. And some perhaps may be disposed to think that more exceptions may be made from this rule. For instance : For at 1. In the nominative cases plural of nouns, which have an acute upon the penultimate of the nominative case singular ; as rafxiag, ra/xiai ; Alvdag, Alveiai. 2. In all infinitives ending in eu, which are accented upon the penultimate ; and which accent is acute, if the penultimate is not long by nature ; as Ttrvfyi- vm, TvirivSuL, excepting the first aorist of the middle voice in atrial ; which, still making its last syllable short by the rule, is therefore always accented upon the antepenulti- mate ; as TvipaaSai. For ot 1. In the nominative cases plural of nouns, which have an acute upon the penultimate of the nominative case singular ; as rerv/xfjiivoQ, TBrvfifxivoi. 2. In adverbs ; as oucot. To distinguish it, it is said, from otKot, iEdes. I could indeed wish that these, and more particulars, might be admitted as exceptions from the rule ; because they would bring things nearer to the standard of quan- tity : but this is not to be done. For though it followeth that the last is short, or • considered as short, when there is an accent upon the antepenultimate, yet it doth not follow that at and ol final are considered as long, because the foregoing sylla- ble hath an acute ; for a penultimate may, according to the doctrine of accents, have an acute, whether the last u 2 292 A DISSERTATION AGAINST syllable be short or long. The truth of the case is, that the rule, with all its exceptions, be they more or fewer, is contrary to reason and quantity. For how can a syl- lable be considered as short or long, but by the actual pronunciation of it, or giving it one measure in the for- mer case, and two measures in the latter ? Now this is a thing which can be determined only by the length or shortness of syllables themselves. But the doing of it merely upon the account of accents, and in so ar- bitrary and inconsistent a manner, is dealing too freely with quantity, which is not founded on arbitrary principles, but in the nature and reason of things. The considering the diphthongs at and 01 as short in respect to accents, seemeth to have owed its rise to a corrupt pronunciation of the diphthongs, which pre- vailed among the Romans in the times of Claudius and Nero. And if the Romans introduced this pronuncia- tion into Greece, as it is probable they did, for the Greeks knew it not before Greece was subdued by the Romans, then this part of the doctrine of accents will evidently appear to be modern, and the time of its com- mencement may very nearly be pointed out. Isaac Vos- sius hath spoken very fully concerning the facts, from which these consequences follow. * " Eas (scil. diphthongos) integras fuisse, et vere diphthongos, ita ut utraque vocalis exaudiretur, quamvis vel ipsum testetur vocabulum, certius tamen colligitur e scriptis illorum omnium, qui floruere antequam Graecia Romanis serviret. Claudii et Neronis temporibus mutata demum fuit pronunciatio, tunc quippe praecipue usus invaluit ut diphthongi absorberentur, quod ipsum quoque Latinae contigit Linguae, utpote in qua bivocalium usus maxima ex parte cessarit jamdiu ante aetatem Ciceronis. Non tantum insolens quid, sed et vastum et rusticum prae se ferre videbantur diphthongi AI et 01, nee defuere, credo, qui fauces non satis patere, nee sine dolore in tam latos sonos diduci et explicari posse adhrmarent. * De Poeinat. Cantn. p. 16, 17. GREEK ACCENTS. 293 Sine mora itaque a Romanis transiit vitiosus hie pro- nuntiandi ritus ad Graecos, gentem adulandi peritissi- mam, frustra reclamantibus doctis, et antiqui moris stu- diosis ; qui licet aliquaindiu restitere, brevi tamen et ipsi quoque in mollius loquendi genus concessere; et adeo quidem ut Trajani et Adriani seculo bivocalium usus penitus cessasse videatur. Hinc est quod in illis Marmoribus, quorum lnscriptiones factae sunt post ea tempora, mira diphthongorum confusio occurrat, cum tamen in vetustioribus lapidibus Orthographiae ratio optime sibi constet." This soon became the case of all the diphthongs. For * Sextus Empiricus lived under Comrnodus, or soon after ; and he expressly saith that the sound of the diphthongs at, a, and ov, was simple and uniform, i. e. they were pronounced as mere Vowels. 'O tov ai tcai a X 6 ?^'; an( * a circumflex is placed upon the last syllable of the genit. and dat. dual, and of the genit. plur. ; as \eipoXv, x £l 9^ v ' And, besides this, the penul- * Fab. Bib. Grace. I. iv. c. 18. 294 A DISSERTATION AGAINST timate, if it be long by nature, and is followed by a syllable, is circumflexed in the accusat. singular, and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative dual and plural, as x il P a > X £l 9 £ > X tl 9 a ^- Whereas the accent of the first word might have been kept upon the same syl- lable in all the oblique cases ; viz. either an acute or a circumflex : for the quantity of the penultimate and last syllable would, in all cases, allow of one of them. III. The general rule for placing accents on verbs, is to remove them as far back from the last syllable as possible. And yet in the motion of verbs through their moods, tenses, numbers, and persons, the accent is not always kept back as far as possible, but it is moved for- wards when the nature of the syllables, and even the analogy of accents, do not require so forward a motion. Example. TVTTTh) active. 2d ftrt. indicat. tvttw, rvTreig, tvttu. TVTTUTOV, TVTTUTOV. TVTrovfxev, TU7rar£, tvttovgi. Optat. Tviroifii, TVTroig, tvttoi. tvttoXtov. 41 TOTrOlf-ltV, TVTTOlT'c, TVTTOUV. Infinit. TVTTUV. Particip. TVTTtOV. Middle Indicat. TVTTUV fiat, TVTTIJ, TVTTUTai. TVTTHOSSOV, TVTTUG%OV. TV7TU(T%t, TVTTOVVTIU. Infinit. TVTTU(t5(U. GREEK ACCENTS. 295 So also the 2d aor. infinit. and particip. active, rviruv, tvttwv ; — the perf. and plusperf. infinit. and particip. ac- tive, TtTvfyivai, TtTV(j>w(; ; — the two aors. subjunct. infinit. and particip. passive, Tvpvg, rtfxicTvg, aTpat bt,vvtTai to. apatvuca, 7rpo- 7r£0£(T7rarcu to. SrjXuica. According to this rule, tXax^ia. ought to have a circumflex upon the penultimate ; but yet both tXaxeia and Xiyeia from Xiyvg are directed to be acuted upon the antepenultimate. And the reason given for this is, because there is another rule, contrary to the former, for accenting some of these feminines, which directs an acute to be placed upon the antepenulti- mate, when the word cometh from a present tense. Ta o£ curb IvtGTWTog wapriypiva Sta tov tla S'rjXvica, irpoTrapo^v- vtTaC olov ju/;Sa>, Mi'joW* Xiyw, Xlytia' and SO lXax£ia> be- cause * kXaxvg is, by them, made to come from tXw, as Xiyvg is from Xlyw or Xtyw. But the grammarians would be very hard put to it to prove that these nouns come from those verbs, if something more were required of them in proof of it than bare assertion. However, the * Etjmol. in Vocibus 'iXassm et Aiyuj. 298 A DISSERTATION AGAINST rules manifestly contradict themselves ; and, instead of paying a due regard to quantity, one would think, were made on purpose to oppose it. TL An oxytone becometh a barytone in a continued discourse, except in the case of enclitics ; and the acute r ^ accent, when so changed, doth not seem to be either a proper acute, or a proper grave. Not a proper acute, for if it were there would be no change, and it would have the same effect upon following words that all final syllables, which arc acuted, have upon enclitics, i. e. to draw them as it were into one word. Neither doth this accent properly become a grave, for there can be no grave upon the last but when there is a circum- flex upon the foregoing syllable, or an acute upon one of the two foregoing syllables, which cannot be the case of an oxytone; so that in pronouncing such a word, the last syllable is not to be uttered as if it were accented with either an acute or a grave : not with a grave be- c-i cause it is originally acutitonous ; and not with an acute for the reasons abovementioned. * " Le grave ne se marque jamais que dans la suite du discours, et a la fins des mots, ou il y auroit naturellement un aigu, montrant qu'alors ces mots ne relevent pas tout a fait leur finale, mais la soutiennent seulement un peu. lis la soutiennent, dis je, parce qu'il est de la nature de la voix, de soutenir to uj ours quelque syllable en chaque mot, et qu'autrement elle fondroit trop : et ils ne l'ele- vent pas tout a fait, parce que cet elevement paroistroit tellcment au respect du mot suivant, qu'il sembleroit l'unir a soy, ce qui ne se peut faire qu'aux encliti- ques." The making oxytones become barytones in such a manner that they are not to be pronounced either as c oxytones or barytones, is really monstrous. But besides this, it is a great absurdity, and contrary to the nature of all languages, that the same word, when pronounced separately, should be subject to a different * N. Meth. Grec. p. 546. CREEK. ACCENTS. 299 modulation from what it, must have when it makes part of a continued discourse. Indeed the nature of accents hath not been sufficient- ly considered : it is evident that every word must have an accent ; and it is, I think, as evident, that there is, and can be, in nature but one accent, viz. the acute. The grave is not an accent, but the privation of an ac- cent : and all polysyllables which have an acute in the middle, must have, or be supposed to have, as many graves as there are syllables in those words besides the acuted syllable. For the syllables which precede the acute, are to be pronounced with a privation of ac- ~n cent, i. e. with a grave, as well as those which fol- low it. But the tone with which the syllables, which precede the acute, are to be pronounced, is not deemed an accent ; and, therefore, as the reason is the same, the tone with which the syllables which follow the acute are to be pronounced, cannot be deemed an accent. The circumflex, as it consisteth of an acute and a grave, can be deemed an accent only in re- spect to the former part of it : but this cannot make it a distinct accent. The figure of it, indeed, is one, but the nature of it is double; and if it be expressed according to its constituent parts, as it was originally expressed, it will evidently appear, that the latter part of it is only the privation of an accent, i. e. no accent at all ; and that the former part of it is what only can be deemed an ** accent. This must be the meaning of Quinctilian when he saith : " Est autem in omni voce utique acuta :" as is farther evident from what nearly follows : " Praeterea nunquam in eadem, flexa, et acuta, quoniam eadem flexa ex acuta." From the former of these passages it is easy to observe that it destroyeth all that part of the doctrine of accents which relateth to atonies : " ea vero quae sunt syllabae unius, erunt acuta, aut flexa, ne sit aliqua vox sine acuta." histii. lib. i. c. 5. 1 will not pursue this any farther : 1 mention it only to shew how contradictory the doctrine of accents is to 300 A DISSERTATION AGAINST itself, and to all manner of reason in this instance. For when, by this doctrine, oxy tones become barytones, the patrons of the system of accents never tell us where the acute is then to be placed ; and yet it is evident that they must have one, for every word must have an accent, and every grave supposes an acute. III. Many Greek words have an acute upon the ante- penultimate, though the last is long, contrary to a funda- mental rule in the doctrine of accents. Of these there are four classes : 1. The Ionic genit. cases in ew for ov, as Alvdeoj. 2. The Attic genit. cases of contracts in ig and i, as utytw-r, 6(f>au>v ; mvi'iwtioQ, aivijirewv. 3. Nouns in wg and iov, which do not increase in the genit. case, as zvyziog, avuyzwv. 4. The compounds of y£\wg, as KarayeXwg. r-,. These, indeed, are introduced as exceptions from the general rule, but the words which are compre- hended under these exceptions are so numerous, and of such a nature, that they must be allowed to be a mani- fest contradiction to the general rule. And, besides, I have this farther observation to make upon them, that they all prove what I have before advanced, viz. that there is nothing in the nature of syllables, or the ana- logy of the doctrine of accents, to hinder an acute from being upon the antepenultimate when the last is long. For the reasons given for the accents continuing upon the antepenultimate in these exceptions, will equally prove that it might remain upon the antepenultimate of all words which have it upon that syllable in the nomi- £- native case ; and, consequently, that Kvpiov and kv- piu>, and all words of the same form, may, according to this analogy, have an acute upon the first, because they have it upon that syllable in their nominative cases. IV. One general rule in the doctrine of accents is, that the accent of the first word remaineth on the same syllable in declining when no particular rule requireth it to be removed. Now, 1. The rule itself is contradicted by all those in- GREEK ACCENTS. 301 stances in which the accent of the first word is removed in declining without any particular rule ; as fxia hath an acute upon the penultimate, but a circumflex upon the last in juiac and fiiq. So ^urj§ejuta, jui)8£/xtac, /iTjStjUtu ; and SO afi(j)w, dfxtpoXv ; Svw, dvoiv. 2. This rule, when observed, is, in many cases, con- tradictory to another general rule, which requireth r o that an acute should be placed upon the antepenul- timate when the last syllable is short, and the penulti- mate is not long by nature ; for when a masculine par- ticiple hath an acute upon the penultimate, this acute will, by the present rule, remain upon the penultimate of the neuter gender. And so hjidZ,ov hath an acute upon the penultimate, because ayidZ,wv hath an acute upon the penultimate, and a neutral participle doth not draw back its accent ; though it ought not to have an acute, as the last syllable is short ; and it cannot have a circumflex as the penultimate is not long by nature, but its proper accent should be an acute upon the antepe- nultimate. And so, likewise, in the imparisyllabical declension, when the last syllable of the nominative ^ Q case hath an acute, this remaineth on the penulti- mate of the oblique cases, though the two last syllables are short, as Xa/jnrag, XafxiraSog, XajLnraSi. 3. In contradiction to the abovementioned general rule, the place of the accent on the first word is directed to be removed by three particular rules : 1 . One particular rule, which requireth the accent of the first word to be removed, is this : that the last sylla- ble of the genitive plural of the first declension is to be accented with a circumflex, as rafiiuv, reXwvwv, povatov, although their nominative cases are accented upon the penultimate, as rapi'iag, Tt\ww\g, fiovaa. This particular rule, so far as it goeth, is a contradiction to the present general rule ; and what is farther observable upon it is, that it is subject to many exceptions which yet are r() all agreeable to that other general rule,which placeth an acute upon the penultimate when the last is long. The exceptions are, that the genitive cases plural of \Xovvr)g, 302 A DISSERTATION AGAINST Xprjcrrrtg, 'Er>>mt, avti, and of the feminines of adjec- tives in og, are not to be accented with a circumflex upon the last, but with an acute upon the penultimate. Now these instances shew the absurdity of the particular rule for placing a circumflex upon the last syllable of the genitive case plural of nouns of the first declension ; and the particular rule, so far as it goeth, contradicteth the rule for retaining, in declining, the place of the ac- cent of the first word : for all nouns of the first declen- sion, which have an acute upon the penultimate, are ca- Pj pable of retaining it in the same place in the geni- tive plural ; and it would be more agreeable, even to the analogy of accents, for them to do so, without perplexing the doctrine of accents by rules which are perpetually contradicting one another. 2. Another particular rule, which requireth the ac- cent of the first word to be removed, is this ; that mono- syllables which increase in declining, acute the last syl- lable of the genit. anddat. sing, and of the dat. plur. and circumflex the last syllable of the genit. and dat. dual, and of the genit. plur. ; as x^ l P> X H 9°^> X H ?' l > X f P ffl '> X ei P°* v > yzioCov. And yet in all these cases, the accent of the first word may be preserved upon the same syllable of the increased word, viz. an acute when that syllable is not long by nature, and a circumflex, when it is long *~ by nature and the last syllable is short. So the cir- cumflex is placed in the accusat. sing, and in the no- minat. accusat. vocat. dual, and plur. of words of this form ; as \upa, x&pt* X £ V £ C> X^ l P a ^- And so tne acu ^ e * s placed in the oblique cases of all monosyllable partici- ples ; as %£vrog, aruvTog, cuvrog, ovrog. 3. A third particular rule, which requireth the ac- cent of the first word to be removed, relateth to femi- nines ending in ua, which come from masculine oxy- tones in tvg or i]g. Those which come from a masculine oxytone in tvg, are to have an acute upon the penulti- mate; and those which come from a masculine oxy- tone in rig, are to have an acute upon the antepenulti- mate. The reason given for this is, because in (he for- CREEK ACCENTS. 303 nier case a filial is long, but in the latter it is short. But this is no reason at all as to the present point ; for a final, whether long or short, is capable of being acuted. And therefore all the instances of this kind are, in both cases, equally contradictory to the rule for keeping- the accent of the first word upon the same syl- lable as much as possible. V. As the first in rt^r\ptt, iarijfu, didw/ni, tzvywfii, is ac- cented, this accent should remain upon the first of the third pers. plur. as it remaineth upon the first of all the other persons, whether the penultimate be long or short. And yet, contrary to this analogy, the penulti- mate of this person is circumflexed : TtSrsim, icrra£)t(TKErCU, OUT£ TOVOQ \OV. For tlliS reason Dionysius Thrax saith, that a tone or accent giveth a greater extent or quantity, t tovoq irpog ov aSo/jiEv Kol 7i)v (pwvijv tvQvitgav ttcuoujuev. Even a rough breathing is able to make a short vowel long for no other reason, but because it layeth a greater stress * ne«upiou Trs^i TTfOtrajSiet;. Ms. Bib. t Ms. Bibliotliei 1 . Me *ai /xciKpa p.aicpag, kcu ovte rrjv avTi)v S^st Svva/Mv, ovte tv Aoyoig xpiXotg, out Iv ironjfjLacnv, rj /niXem $ia pvS/xiov r) fiiTpu)v Ka~a(TKtvaZ,o}iivoiq Trcicxa [ipa\da, koi iraara fiaicpd. — When a short vowel is followed by another vowel, it is shorter than when it is followed by a mute and a liquid, though it be also short in this position. And a long vowel is not so long when it is followed by another vowel, as when it is by one or more consonants. Far- ther still, the ancients were so nice upon the subject of quantity, that they made a difference in the degrees ma of the quantity of the same vowel, in respect, not only of the letters which followed, but also of those which went before it. f Dionysius Halicarnasseus, to illustrate this, produceth the words 6S6g, poSog, rpoirog and aTp6(\>og ; in all which the first syllable is short, and yet it is longer in poSog than in 6Soe, longer in rpoirog than in poSog, and longer in orpofyog than in rpoTrog. Ac- cents can, and do take no notice of this. But quantity can, and doth. And so did the ancients in reading or repeating both poetry and prose; and made the differ- ence sensible to the ear. So in the foregoing instances, Dionysius saith that the first syllable of the last word, though it still remaineth short, yet becometh longer than the shortest by the three sensible additions, which are made to it : rpLcnv aurjj Trpocr^fiKaig uKovcFTcug p.a~ * Dionvs. Halicnr. Tlifi ZvMa\ua< And from hence he raaketh this conclusion : * therefore these four differences in a short syllable, which have or produce a correspondent sensation, are measured or estimated by the addition, which is made of one, two, or three consonants to the first short syllable. Indeed all the different kinds of writing, so far as the judgment of the ear is concerned, arise from the differ- ent manner in which writers dispose letters, syllables, and words. As there is no mystery in this, one would be disposed to think there could be no great difficulty in the right management of it. And yet how few writers are there, who have succeeded in the execution so well, as to deserve and leave to posterity an established character? Their ill success could not proceed from any ignorance of an art, which, in its nature, is so very plain and simple, but from their want of that prin- ciple, which alone can secure success ; I mean a want of taste. This, when we have it, is an inborn principle; which cannot be acquired, though it may be improved. But the present accents, being founded upon a wrong taste, cannot give or improve a true one ; but directly tend to spoil our taste, if we have any. For true taste * I give tlie sense of this passage other makelh still greater alterations as I think it ought to be read. The in the text. But if, instead of t?? original is certainly corrupted. OuxoZv i<; ha.- paXXayns /xBrpovvrat, the emendation k will be easy and natural, and the sense 7rapa.XXa.yng ftirpov. Victorias (Var. agreeable with the context. For then Lect. 1. xiii. c. 6.) instead of avaXoyov /^.e-T^ovvrai will be the verb, to which read aXoyov. But the difficulty doth not ha$opa.L and txova-ai refer, and the sense consist in this word. Whether we read of the passage will be what Dionysius avaXoyov or aXoyov still the grammatical certainly meant. For the additions construction is imperfect, there being no that are made to the first syllable, be- rerb to answer to the nominative cases. ing the causes of the differences in the Dr. Hudson saw this; and therefore quantity of it, those additions must he he read rhv avaXoyov 'i-xov iroiw. Kai yap Iv ravry kcu (jUaoq Z\ov(tiv ai \ r c£,£L£, K(i\ pvS/wv, Kai /xeTaj'inXtjv, kcu Trpt- ttqv. Ottc kcu E7TI Taurrjc i} dKOrj TipTTirat jxlv rolg uCkzmv, 310 A DISSERTATION AGAINST aytrai 81 rote pvSpoTg, acriraZtTai 8e jit£raj3oXac, iroSu o iirl iravTwv to oIksIov. Dionys. Halicarn. ELept SuvStV. 'Ovo- jucir. §. 11. Metre differeth from rhythm as the species doth from the genus. For which reason the * scholiast upon Ari- stophanes calleth rhythm the father of metre, Traxrjp p&pov pvSfiog. Metre ariseth necessarily from syllables; but rhythm may arise from mere sounds. Metre therefore must produce one rhythm; and accents, if they differ from quantity, must produce another. What rhythm is, and how it differeth from metre, is well explained by Lon- ginus in those -f scholia upon Hephaestion, which are as- cribed to him. Aiacpepn fiirpov pvOpov. uXrj plv yap rolg pirpocg r\ <7uXXa/3?), koL X wo ^ avWafirtg ovk ay yivoiroptrpov. 6 Se pvSpbg yivtrai plv kol Iv <™XXaj3y. ytvtrat St koi X W P*C . The prepositions avd and $ia have an acute upon the last syllable, to distinguish them from 3 ava rex and tov Am Jovem. But a reader must be very stupid, if he can- not distinguish a preposition from a noun without the assistance of an accent. 2. Accents may be useful to distinguish the quantity fia of syllables. But then to do this they ought always to be placed according to quantity ; which, in the modern use of them, they are not. And therefore, as accents may sometimes lead us to the knowledge of quantity, so is it certain that they may sometimes mis- lead us. The accent of TrtpiKaWta, being upon the pe- nultimate, may induce an unknowing reader, who judg- eth of quantity by accent, to think that a final there is long. And the rather so, because he may, perhaps, have observed, that the penultimate of ftaaiXia hath such an accent, and that the a final here is long. Whereas a final in (iaaiXia is long, because it is long in all the Attic accusative cases of this form ; which, in this re- spect, follow the analogy of the Attic and Ionic genitives in wc. But a final in -n-epiKaXXki is short; and the accent is upon the penultimate only because it was upon that syllable in the nominative case -rrepiKaXX^g. And so, for much the same reason, in 'nrrroTa, and words of the same sort, i. e. whose ending in rig hath been changed by the Macedonians into o, though the o final GREEK ACCENTS. 313 is short, yet still, notwithstanding this alteration, the accent is kept upon the penultimate. " Apices, (saith * Scaurus,) ibi poni debent, ubi iisdem Uteris alia atque alia res designatur, ut venit et venit, aret et aret, legit et legit, caeteraque his similia. Super I tamen literam apex non ponitur. Caeterae vocales, quia, eodem ordine positae, diversa significant, apice distinguuntur, ne legens dubitatione impediatur." This relateth to both uses of accents, when the sense varieth, and the quantity is different. But this will not, by any means, support the modern doctrine of ac- cents in the Greek language, because it taketh in only those words that are ambiguous in their sense and quan- tity ; which are but few. Though the apices, which were used by the Latins, were distinct from accents, yet still these, when sense and quantity are connected with them, come within the same reason, and so ought to be subject to the same rule, i. e. that they ought to be used but in doubtful cases. This is the only circumstance that can make the use of them proper and necessary, f " Longis syl- labis omnibus apponere apicem ineptissimum est, quia plurimae, natura ipsa verbi quod scribitur, patent. Sed interim necessariura, cum eadem litem alium atque alium iutellectum, prout correpta, vel producta est, facit ; ut malus, utrum arborem significet, an homi- nem non bonum, apice distinguitur. PaTlis aliud priore syllaba longa, aliud sequenti significat ; et, cum eadem litera nominativo casu brevis, ablativo longa est, utrum sequamur, plerumque hac nota monendi sumus." If the placing of different accents upon the same parts, or of the same accent upon different parts of the same words, when they carry different senses, should be allowed to be ever so proper and useful to distinguish these different senses, yet no argument can be drawn from hence for the use of accents in words, which do not carry such different senses; much less for the * Do OrlfatognpliM. t Quinctil. lib. i. c. 7. 014 A DISSERTATION AGAINST forming of a system of accents to run through the whole body of a language. For the words which carry such different senses, are very few in comparison with the whole vocabulary of the Greek language, which is a very copious one. But accents are placed upon all words — ■ they are placed where they are not wanted ; — where they can be of no manner of use ; — and where, if they are observed in pronouncing, they destroy all that harmony which ariseth from a just quantity, and upon which the beauty and power of oratory and poetry do, in a great measure, depend. Upon the whole — on the one hand the advantages of accents are but small ; but, on the other, they are attended with many and great disadvantages. 1. They introduce unnecessary difficulties into a lan- guage, which hath sufficient ones of itself. 2. They are placed by rules, which are often arbi- trary, and contrary one to another. 3. They destroy all that harmony for which the Greek language is so justly esteemed. 4. They encourage laziness. It is an easy matter to see an accent marked over a syllable, and to place the stress of the voice there : but it is not so easy a matter to know the quantity of syllables, and give to every part of a word its clue proportion of time. We are hereby led and accustomed to trust to our eyes, and not to our ears. Prosody originally was tovoq <£wvf?c irpbg ov qSo/juv. But now it is a quite different thing. From the an- cient musical use of accents therefore no argument can be drawn to support the modern practice and use of ac- cents. For though we know but little of the musical or tonical pronunciation of the ancients, yet thus much we know, that it was perfectly agreeable to the nature and quantity of syllables. But the modern use of accents is not agreeable to the nature and quantity of syllables. Neither hath it any music in it : unless irregular sounds can be so called. It must therefore be, as it is in truth, a third thing, distinct from the use of accents among GREEK ACCENTS. 315 the ancient Greeks, and from the nature and quantity of syllables; and consequently cannot be supported by either. This conclusion seemeth necessary ; and unless we make such a distinction, we must run into in- explicable difficulties. * " Qui porro usus accentuum fuerit in vocali pronuntiatione, et qua, ratione syllaba- rum quantitatem, et accentuum inflexionem veteres con- ciliaverint, nondum ita perspicue explanatum est." This indeed is a thing, which can never be explained, so long as we confound the modern use of accents with that which was made of them by the ancient Greeks. Accents are of less use in the Greek language to lead us to the knowledge of quantity than in any other lan- guage; because it affords more helps or criteria to this purpose, which are distinct from accents, and arise from the very constitution of that language. For ' besides the different characters, which the Greek lan- guage hath for e long and e short, and for o long and o short, it hath twelve diphthongs ; which are all long. By which means an infinite number of syllables are known to be long by the writing and natural sound of them, previously to any use that may be made of ac- cents. Tones, or accents, are, and cannot but be used in all languages, t " Ut nulla vox sine vocali, ita sine accentu nulla est." Where a language is not founded in a na- tural quantity of syllables, the placing of accents may be allowed to be arbitrary. But not so where the very nature of a language establisheth a difference be- tween syllables, and m?keth some long and others short. In this case the use of accents cannot be arbi- trary, but must correspond with the natural length or shortness of the syllables, which compose the words of that language. Otherwise a perpetual discord will arise. t MoDtfauc. Palaeogr. Grace, p. 236. t Diomedes, lib. ii. 316 A DISSERTATION AGAINST This maketh a great difference between the ancient Greek and the modern languages. In these the pro- nunciation doth not depend upon a natural quantity, and therefore a greater liberty may be allowed in the placing of accents. But in the Greek language the pronunciation essentially depends upon a natural quan- tity, and therefore all use of accents that is contrary to quantity must be injurious to pronunciation. Men are led to accent their words, partly by the constitution of their language, and partly by their own natural temper. One of a volatile temper will love short syllables, and will not like to be stopped either by quantity or accent; so that in pronouncing a word of three syllables he will run on, and place the accent upon the last syllable, because he can run no farther. On the contrary, one of a phlegmatic temper will love long syllables, and will be pleased with the majesty of quantity and accent: so that in pronouncing a word of three syllables, he will naturally lay some stress as soon as he can, and fix upon the first for his accent. We see something of this even in the ancient, though not the most ancient Greek language, the dialects of which consisted not only in the permutation, addi- tion, and subtraction of letters, but also in the placing of accents. The # Dorians put a circumflex upon the last syllable of all their first futures ; whereas the common language put it only upon those that end in Xw, juw, vw, pw. The -j-yEolians are said to have been jdapwTiKoi, i. e. they placed their accents as soon as they could. So TroTafxoQ and KaXog had an acute upon the first sylla- ble, which necessarily brought a grave upon the last; whereas the common dialect put an acute upon the last ; as Trora/xoc, Ka\6g. So in auaiv % they put the ac- cent upon the first; whereas a circumflex was commonly * Mag, Etymol. in Voce Kvfut. * Mag. Etymol. in Voce asie-iv. t Mag. Etymol. ibid. GREEK ACCENTS. 317 put upon the penultimate dumv. And so in * upaio for 6pto the future of opw : where a a is inserted that it might not have the form of the futures of those conjugations, which have the penultimate short, and a circumflex upon the last. And in this, as in many other particulars, the Latins followed the ^Eolians ; and, in- deed, it is very evident that the Latin tongue was formed upon the ^Eolic dialect of the Greek language. But this seemeth to relate only to what was practised by the common people, and in common conversation ; for those that wrote in any one dialect, never departed from quantity, any more than those that wrote in any other dialect. The modern Greeks have carried the barbarity of accents much farther. They sometimes place the accent, and even a circumflex, upon the fourth from the last : whereas the ancient Greeks never placed it higher than the third from the last, nor the circumflex beyond the penultimate, f " Loci accentuum sunt qua- tuor, ultima, penultima, antepenultima, et prseantepc- nultima. Praeantepenultima acutum agnoscit et cir- cumflexum. Acutum quidem in iis, quorum penultima est in la, ut avajKaXXiaaig exultatio, ivvKTiaaev IIOX facta est ; quasi ia unicam efficiat syllabam, et in Trprmapot,v- rovoic, quibus additur particula ve, ut kojuete Kafiinve fa- citis : circumflexum autem in iis, quorum penultima cir- cumflectitur, et iis additur articulus cum particula vt, ut tlSarove vidi illud." As some parts of Greece were under the domi- , nion of the Venetians, it is probable that the mo- dern Greeks learned this method of accentuation from the Italians, who sometimes place the accent upon the fourth from the last ; as seguitano, visitano, desiderano, considerano. J " Ante tertiam quidem, nulla, quod sci- am, Lingua praeter Etruscam, Tonum collocat. In his enim verbis, seguitano, visitano, seminano, desiderano, * Mag. Etjmol. in Voce esis-iv. Vulg. c. 2. t Sim. Portii Grain. Ling. Gncc. $ Cania. Hellenism. Ed. 4to. p. 98. 318 A DISSERTATION AGAINST considerano, in quarta a fine est acutus. In compositis etiam in quinta et sexta, portandosenela, desideranovici, seminanovici. Quidam vir doctissimus in octava quo- que id observavit, seminanovicisene, edificanovicisene." We have some instances of this in our own language ; as dormitory, repository, preparatory, authoritatively, demonstratively. But this hurts the ear ; for, in judging of accents, the ear cannot go farther back than the third syllable. And when the accent is placed higher, we find, in fact, that all the subsequent syllables are pronounced as rapidly as if they were but two. Analogy, and the reason of things, require that all words of the same form, at least where there cannot be any difference in the sense, should be accented in the same manner. But this is not observed in the modern doc- trine of Greek accents ; and the most probable reason that can be given for this variation, seemeth to be the different manner of accenting the same words, i. e. words of the same form, or of the same number of syl- lables, by different people, who spoke different mo- ther- tongues. And when a foreign manner of ac- centing was once introduced into the Greek language, the maimer of one people prevailed in some words, and the manner of another people prevailed in other words, though both were of the same form, and capable of be- ing accented in the same manner. In all cases, when the nature of a language admitteth of quantity, this must be the natural and best rule for the pronouncing of it; and all use of accents that in- terfereth with quantity, must, in proportion, interfere with pronunciation. And this is the case of the Greek language, but not so of the modern ones ; especially of those which sprang from the Teutonic and Esclavonian. For these, consisting of a greater proportion of consonants, must of necessity have a greater num- ber of long syllables. And the great disproportion be- tween long and short syllables made it impossible to think of establishing quantity for a foundation of har- mony in pronunciation. Hence it became necessary to GREEK ACCENTS. 319 lay aside the consideration of quantity, and to have re- course to accents to form some harmony, such as it is : so that I am apt to think that the present use of accents was introduced into the Greek language, when conquest and commerce, and other methods of intercourse, brought foreigners into Greece ; for then each was naturally led to pronounce Greek according to the accents which pre- vailed in his mother-tongue. For instance : he whose mother- tongue abounded in anapaests (as the French, which hath no trisyllable that maketh a dactyl) would naturally have placed the accent upon the last syllable, and made rcnrtivog an oxytone, though the penultimate is long by nature. And he whose mother- tongue abounded in dactyls (as the English, which hath no trisyllable that maketh an anapaest), would naturally have placed the accent upon the antepenultimate, and pronounced rvipaaSai with the accent upon the first, though the last is long by nature, and the penultimate by position. And if you were to give to a Frenchman and to an Englishman, who knew nothing of the Greek accents, two Greek words to pronounce, one consisting of three long syllables, and the other of three short ones, in both cases the Frenchman would certainly place the accent upon the last, and make both words ana- paests ; and the Englishman would certainly place the accent upon the first, and make both words dactyls. The reason why some words are accented differently, when there is no difference in the sense, could not be because the laws of accents originally allowed such words to have different accents ; for accents were not originally placed according to the laws of prosody, but the laws of prosody were formed according to an use and custom, which was already established. In the same manner that languages in general were not originally formed according to grammar ; but grammar was formed according to the use and custom which prevailed in lan- guages, and had already fixed the general nature of them. But the true reason of this variation must be, that the Greeks, by conversing with foreigners, who 320 A DISSERTATION AGAINST spoke different languages, and differed one from another, in placing their accents, learned of them their respective- ways of accenting; and some Greeks placed their ac- cent one way, and other Greeks placed it in the same word another way. This maketh it highly probable, that the present doctrine of Greek accents is owing to the different ways of accenting, which were practised in other languages. This account of the modern, arbitrary, and irrational placing of Greek accents seemeth agreeable to fact. The original use of accents among the ancient Greeks was entirely musical. The grammarians of the school of Alexandria were the first who applied them to an- other use, which was to distinguish quantity ; and as long as accents were applied to this purpose, no alteration could be thereby caused in the pronuncia- tion of the Greek language. On the contrary, such an use of accents was intended to be, and really was in it- self, a good security for the preservation of its genu- ine pronunciation. But in process of time, and when foreigners intermixed with the Grecians, their way of accenting crept into the Greek language, and so the pre- sent manner of placing accents was introduced. It will be proper to consider this more particularly. The present system of accents was not formed at once. As there was a progress in the corrupt pronun- ciation of the Greek language, so was there a progress in the doctrine of accents. The accents that were first used were agreeable to quantity. This is evident from Dionysius Hali- carnasseus. *'H fxlv yapTrtZ,!] \l%ig ovdevbg ovts bvofiarog ovn prifiaTog /36povg tyovaa cvvapug, kcu tj tiov avXXafiiov ttXoki) 7ravroc)aTTcog ayjqpaTi- Z>opivr). By which we see that accents, in the sense in which they are now understood, had no part in this af- fair, and that they could not possibly be considered any farther than they were agreeable to the nature of letters and syllables, i. e. to quantity. This truth may also be made evident from fact. The remains of antiquity, which we have upon this subject, are indeed very scanty ; but yet, such as they are, they evidently prove this to have been the case. All poly- syllables ending in oiog were originally accented with a circumflex upon the penultimate ; but the modern Athenians accented them with an acute upon the antepenultimate. This we learn from the f great etymologist, who blameth the alteration at the same time that he acquainteth us with it: tci §ia tov oiog bvopara vwtp cvo crvXXafiag, utravTa irpoTrtpicnraTcii. otov, iravrdiog, aXXoiog, tTtpoiog' oi c5e ptTciytviaTtpoi rcov ^Attimov to ye- Xolog kcu bpolog Trpoirapo^vvovcriv' ovk ev. The word rpo- Traiov, and all words of the same form, were originally ac- cented with a circumflex upon the penultimate ; but by a later rule they are to be accented with an acute upon the antepenultimate. J Wxtv KTTjrtKOV ovc^irepov, ciirb ^jjAukou -yE- yovbg, rpiTrtv curb riXovg t^ei rrjv b^tlav' olov, KecpaXi'i, ke- cfraXaiov' yvvi'i, yvvcuov' bOtv kcu Tpo7n'j, rpoiraiov' oi Se iraXcuoV AttikoI Trpompicnrcocnv. Suidas saith the same thing, and so doth the scholiast upon Aristophanes, who farther * Sect. 12, 13. i Mag. Etjniol. in voce Tp^Vaiov. t In voce yikfioq. 322 A DISSERTATION AGAINST addeth, that the ancient manner of placing the accent is preferable to the modern, as being more agreeable to analogy. * Ktu olpat kclt avaXoyiav tovto fiaWov napa £0Ecr3 , eu, wg airb tov rpirrj to rprrcuov, kcX curb tov ovpa to ovpcuov. When the ancient pronunciation of the Greek lan- guage began to be corrupted, the grammarians found it necessary to introduce the use of accents, to pre- serve, as much as possible, that ancient pronunciation. If therefore we can discover how those first gram- - - . marians placed accents, and if it should appear that they placed them according to quantity, this will be a farther proof of what I have here advanced. As f Homer was the first Greek book that was read in the schools of the ancients, it is reasonable to think that this was the first that was accented ; and it appears from several instances, that those accents were placed ac- cording to quantity. 'Eprj/xoc is accented by the moderns with an acute upon the antepenultimate ; but it was ac- cented in Homer with a circumflex upon the penulti- mate : % wapa Totg 'AttikoTc TrpoTrapo%vvzraC irapa Si t<£ iroiryrij 7rpo7rep«77rara{. II. K. V. 520. 'Q,g i'Se xwpov eprifiov, o0' taracrav wneeg "nnroi. This is confirmed by Eustathius, who saith ex- pressly, that 'Eprj/xoc was accented after this manner, not only in this, but in all other places in Homer: §7rpo- 7T£pi(T7rarai Si icai IvTavSa to lpr\fxog, Ka3"a koi aXXa^ov, koS" ojuoiorrjra tov IroTfiog. And so the word is accented in Bishop More's manuscript. 'O/xoiog is accented by the moderns with an acute upon the antepenultimate. But it was accented in Homer with a circumflex upon the * In Plut. v. 453. Edit. Tib. Hem- L. I. c. 17. For which reason Palladas sterhusii. calleth the Iliad agp T^afxixanwi;. t Plin. Epp. L. II. Ep. 14. Optime Antholog. L. I. c. 17. institutum est ut ab Homero atque Vir- % M. Etymol. in voce "Ejn^uof. gilio lectio inciperet. Quinctil. Instit. § Edit. Rom. fol. 822. 1. v. GREEK ACCENTS. 323 penultimate. So * Porphyry : ru cm tov olog inravra 7roo~ Trepicnriofiev. hepolog' yzXotog' aXXoXog' Bia tovto tcai Ofu)pog rij avaXoyia ^p^aafievog "f" tog alei Sebg, acnv arriKijv. Alb Ylpwciavog tyr}(nv oti to Trap* 'Ofifipto Iprifiov (cat trolfiov, ol vtwrepoi arriKol avaXoytvg tpamv tprifiov koi %toi- fxov. Herodian and Eustathius agreed as to the accentu- ation of these words in Homer : but Eustathius differed from Herodian as to the analogy of the ancient and modern accentuation of them. To Se bfioiov oti ava- Xoytvg 7rpo7repi(T7raTai, ical ov Trapa tvttov Kara to ttoq- Trapo^vTOvovpeimv bfioiov 7roXXa^ow SrjXoirrat. wrnrcp teal to bfiolog tv tb aXXoig icai iv 'OoWa-ffa. 6 TravTiog avaXoywTtpov tov bfiotog. fol. 569. 1. xvii. r O St bfiolog, avaXoywg Trpo- TrtpicnraTai Ik tov bfiog. Kara to, TravTog iravTolog. uXXog oX- AoTo£. KaX Ta bfioia. to uevtoi ofioiog vtrrepov ol clttlkoX irapu)- £wav. fol. 1817. 1. xv. I shall only observe farther, that Porphyry, in the abovementioned place, addeth, that Tpo7ratov was marked with a circumflex upon the penulti- mate in the copies of Thucydides : ttoXiv vfizlg fiev dvaXo- ywg Tpoiraiov Xtyofitv. tog ' 7TO- * Guild. Bail, tie Accentilnis Grxcornui. GREEK ACCENTS. 325 rspov vfuv, to "AvSpeg 'Afyvmoi, n'lcrZioTog At^xtvijc, V &vog tivai AXe^avSpov So/at ; — cticoveig a Xiyovm, i. e. I say that you were the fxiaSuTog of Philip, and that you are now the higQutoq of Alexander. All that are present will say the same thing. If you disbelieve me, ask them ; yea, rather, I will ask them for you. Do 121 you believe, O Athenians ! that ^Eschines is the ju( kpwT§v 6 p{]TU)fj ifiapfiapiiTEv e'&wirricac, utadu-ov Xeyu>y 00 Eim £7T£\a/3£ro rig avrov, ihg ciopSovfitvog, kcu ejjoi] vera) itia " rova uiaQwrog' elra n)v Cwpdwaiv arzoKpiaiv real fitfiuiuaiv £ipT}K£V. But such an artifice was too low and mean for Demos- thenes to have recourse to. And, besides, as the suc- cess of it was very uncertain, one cannot think he would in prudence have trusted to it. If any artifice was practised, it is more natural to conclude, that Demos- thenes had previously secured some persons to make the answer which he expected. And this agreeth with the solution which Ulpian giveth to this affair, who far- ther telleth us, that, according to the opinion of others, it was his friend Menander that answered ni, dopvfioV EKlVtjffEV. "ilflVVE £e (Cat TOV , \(7K\r\Tnov i Trpoirapotyvwv'A.oKXiiiriov, /ecu -rrapE^EiicvvEv avrov 6p§wg Xeyovra' elvat ydp rbv Qeov ?j7riov. kcu ett\ rovry voXXaKLg edopvpi'idi]- i. e. Demosthenes appearing again in the public assem- blies, and having said some things that were new and unusual, was found fault with, insomuch that he was ri- diculed by Antiphanes and Timocles in their comedies by these expressions : — I call the earth to witness, I call the springs to witness, I call the rivers to witness, I call the waters to witness. He was also wont to call iEs- culapius to witness, laying an extraordinary stress upon the antepenultimate of 'AaicXiririoQ, and he insisted that he spoke truly, for that iEsculapius was rjTriog, a mild, benign, and beneficent God. And upon this ac- count he was often disturbed. But this doth not come up to what is pretended ; nor can it be made to come up to it, but by overstraining and perverting the text. And the patrons of the present system of accents are so sensible of this, that Baillius, in quoting the passage, hath put an acute upon the penultimate of ' AaKXriiriov (contrary to the common way of accenting this word, which putteth an acute upon the last), wfxwe St nal tov \A(7ieX»}7rtov ; and, in his translation of it, hath, in order to make out his own sense, inserted words, to which there is nothing at all in the original that answereth : " Nee * Ed. Par. 1624. t.ii. p. 845. GREEK ACCENTS. 327 'Ao-K-XijTrtov acuta penultima more Attico, sed acuta an- tepenultima ' Aotoiit(v hr\ %u§wpov apovpav' " Longe aliter veteres ; sic nempe illi accentus digere- bant. 'HiXtoc S' dvopovae \nrwv TTtptKaXXtd \ifivr\v "Ovpavov ig ttoXv^uXkov, iv dOavarotai (paclmj Kai 6vt]rol(TL fiporoiGiv £7rt Zticwpov apovpav' " Vera esse quae affirmo libenter agnoscet is, qui vete- rum grammaticorum, Dionysii Thracis, Apollonii Alex- andrini, iElii Dionysii Halicarnassensis, Aristarchi ju- nioris, et aliorum, quas supersunt, scripta et fragmenta evolvat." But this lieth open to great uncertainties. There is nothing extant of Aristophanes of Byzantium : he is quoted but once by Apollonius, and that not to any purpose that cometh up to the present point. Apollo- nius doth not, in his Syntax, say any thing either 1 ™ from himself or from the elder Aristarchus, whom he often quoteth, that proveth what Vossius hath ad- vanced. There is reason to doubt whether the Tt'xvrj * Odvss. r. v. i,&c. 332 A DISSERTATION AGAINST ypafifiaTucrj, which is ascribed to Dionysius Thrax, and is still extant, be really the work of that Dionysius, who was the scholar of Aristarchus, or of some other Diony- sius. The only printed copy that we have of this Tixyn jpanfiaTiKri was published by # Fabricius, from a manu- script in the Holstein library ; and this contains nothing upon the present subject. There is nothing of Aristar- chus junior published, that I know of; nor of iElius Dionysius Halicarnassensis, excepting a tract, n^pl then, of course, the rules for placing ac- cents must have been multiplied in proportion as the corrupt pronunciation increased : but as it doth not appear when the alteration began, this matter must still remain undetermined. It is not to be thought that the grammarians formed at once a perfect system of accents which was universally agreed to and received : their first business was to bring into some consistency, and reduce under some rules, a pronunciation which had been corrupted at dif- ferent times, and in different ways ; which could not be * Bib.Grajc.lib. v. c. 7,§ IS. GREEK ACCENTS. 333 done but by many rules, and more exceptions ; and then they endeavoured, upon their own authority, to form or fix a distinctive pronunciation of some words in which yet they greatly differed one from another. One case, in which the grammarians accented j^-. differently the same word, was to distinguish its ac- tive from its passive sense : as yeXoiog,* the etymo- logist telleth us, with an acute upon the antepenul- timate, signifieth one who is a subject of ridicule; but with a circumflex upon the penultimate, signifieth a joker, ytXoiog XiysTcti, b yiXwTog a^iog' ytXolog oe 6 yeXojTOTToiog. Ammonius saith the same thing : and so doth f Eustathius : tov Se TpiavXXufiov (scil. ytXoiog) Ttvlg bt,vvovai ti)v irpwTriv ovXXafiijv, log iir\m tuiv iraXaLiov ^Attikwv elvat, irpoTrt- pKTTrav to. toiclvtcl. bpolov. etoTjuov. ytXolov. But Suidas, T. Magister, and Phavorinus, say quite the contrary: ^ ,~ ytXotog 6 KaTayiXavTog. yiXoiog Se 6 ytXfOTOiroivg. | Philoponus hath observed, that there was a third man- ner of accenting this word, by putting an acute upon the last, E^Et oe TTupaurifitiuxTeig TOiavTag kol b (f>tX67rovog. ev ate kol oti yeXolog filv b KaTayiXaaTog Trpoirepi(nr(i)fjiiv(og, yeXoibg Se b^vTovwg b ytXuToiroiog. And a § manuscript lexicon in the Coislian library exhibiteth the same : ytXolog p:lv 6 KarayiXaaTog Trpo-irtpKJiriofiivwg' yeXoibg oe, b^vTovwg, b ye- XioTOTroiog : which is manifestly copied from Eustathius. Another case, in which the grammarians accented dif- ferently the same word, was to distinguish its proper from its figurative sense ; as aypoiKog, Ij Ammonius telleth us, with a circumflex upon the penultimate, signifieth one , .« who dwelleth in the country ; but with an acute upon the antepenultimate, signifieth an ill-bred man. WypoiKog kol" Ay potKog Sia(j)ipu. TrpoTTtpicnrojfxivhjg filv, b Iv aypM Ka- * In voce yi\otoq. § Montfauc. Cat. Bib. Coisl. p. 470. t II. B. fol. 205. 1. 44. || In voce ' hygnx.v;. t Eustath. II. M. fol. 906. 1. 50. 334 A DISSERTATION AGAINST toikwv. trpoTrapo^vTovwg St, 6 analog tovq rpoTrovg. And yet Ptolemaeus Asealonita, whom Ammonius had pe- rused, for he quoteth him under the word rpareg, saith quite the contrary :* ''AypoiKog fiapvrovov, 6 Iv aypotg dia- Tpif5d)v' aypolicog & 7rpoTr£pi there cannot be any good reason to make an exception for this single word.f " Discrimen est inter grammaticos circa hoc discrimen ; et profecto haud scio an ita stricte et superstitiose observetur haec differ- entia apud auctores. Quamobrem dispungerem penitus hanc notam StatcpiTiKrjv inter aypoltcog et aypoticog, turn quia de ea non convenit inter grammaticos ; turn quia non memini earn ab auctoribus ubique observatam ; turn quia tarn cognatae et finitimae sunt hae significationes, ut non opus sit eas accentu distingui ; turn denique quia ca> tera omnia composita in oinog suntproparoxytona. fxirot- KOg, airoiKOQ, (toXoikoq TrapoLKog,<$>tpioiK.og," &C. I would not, however, have it concluded from hence, that I approve Ijr of the placing an acute upon the antepenultimate of these words. I rather think, and am persuaded, that aypoiKog, and ayopaiog, concerning the accentuation of which there is much the same variation among the grammarians, and all words of the same form, had ori- ginally, as they ought to have, a circumflex upon the penultimate, and that it was the moderns, the p.eTayevia- repoi 'Arrticoi, who accented the antepenultimate with an acute. It is evident, therefore, that the present system of ac- cents is not founded on the genuine pronunciation of the Greek language, which was agreeable to quantity, but on a corrupt pronunciation, which began and increased in latter ages. Those grammarians, from whom we •Fabricii Bibl.Grsec. lib. iv. e.33. t Jac. Duport. Prelect, in Theo- §• 5. phrast. Char. iv. p. 273. GREEK ACCENTS. 335 have received this system, were really modern in ^ ... respect of the pure and genuine pronunciation of the Greek language. The rules which they formed had but little regard to quantity ; and were, in many cases, contrary one to another. And, therefore, it is no wonder that this system is not, even now, uniform and consist- ent, and that there are many variations in the placing of accents, both in accented manuscripts and printed books ; which would not have been the case, if gram- marians had placed accents as they were placed when the Greek language was in its purity. There are undoubtedly some difficulties to be met with on the subject of accents, both in the Greek and Latin languages. But these may, perhaps, be removed by considering that in all languages, the pronuncia- tion of some words is founded only upon custom, which is above all the laws of grammar. * " Quod Graeci, quod Barbari hodie in sua quisque lingua ; cur non Romani habuerint, et quaedam pronunciarint ad Morem potius, quam ad Normam? Ad suavitatem, quam ad quantitatem ? Ego censeam : etsi adfirmare aut illustrare id mihi fas paucis argumentis vel exem- plis. Quomodo enim penetrem aut oculos adjiciam in tenebras illius M\'\ ? Omnia silentio et oblivione obru- ta : et scimus in ea parte hactenus, quatenus scire nos grammatici voluerunt. Quibus tamen ipsis expressa quaedam contra suam legem, prassertim earn, quas te- nores ligat ad modulum syllabas et mensuram." There are several instances of this in Quinctilian, Priscian, Festus, Gellius, and Charisius. And we have the same reason to say of the pronunciation of the an- cient Greek language, that + Sanctius had to say of that of the Latin — that there were some things in the use of accents among the ancient Romans, qui nostras aures omnino fugiunt. In living languages there is a necessity of complying with custom : but in dead languages this reason seemeth to cease. If, therefore, the patrons of the * Lipsias de reel. Pronuut. L. L. c. 21. t Minerva, I. iv. o. 14. art. 5. 336 A DISSERTATION, &C. modern doctrine of accents, in pronouncing the ancient Greek language, think they can reconcile their doctrine with a due observation of quantity, they are free to re- tain it : but I must sincerely confess, that I do not see , 4f v how they can. On the contrary, we plainly see, that, in fact, they do not; and that in verse they do not so much as pretend to it : so that, in this respect, they necessarily run into the great absurdity of making- two languages out of one. And, therefore, if we would ob- serve uniformity, and keep to what we can safely rely on, we must not admit of any use of accents in the pro- nunciation of the ancient Greek language, but what is consistent with quantity ; and if we have lost the nicer part of the ancient pronunciation, we have the more reason to adhere to that essential part which still sub- sisted. A SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST PRONOUNCING THE GREEK LANGUAGE ACCORDING TO ACCENTS. IN ANSWER TO MR. FOSTER'S ESSAY ON THE DIFFERENT NATURE OF ACCENT AND QUANTITY. Accentaura Graecorum omnis hodie ratio prapostera est atque perver$a. Ric. Bentleii Ep. ad Millium, p. 82. PREFACE. I have, in the following Dissertation, endeavoured to keep to one point, which, indeed, is the main foundation of the present controversy : and have passed over some things upon which Mr. Foster has enlarged, because I am but little, or not at all, concerned in them. As to the assistance which may be borrowed from music to explain the doctrine of accents, I have de- clared my sentiments in the body of the Dissertation. And as to those Greeks who, upon the downfall of . IV the Grecian empire, fled into the west, and there taught their language, I am under no obligation to say any thing about their characters, because I have never impeached them. But the censure which Mr. Foster has been pleased to pass upon the University of Oxford, for allowing some Greek books to be printed without ac- cents at their press, requires to have some notice taken of it, because it is equally groundless and unprece- dented. The Hebrew Bible was, but few years ago, printed at Oxford without vowels, and without causing any out- cry ; and yet there was more room for censure in this case, because it is well known that many look upon the Hebrew vowels to be as sacred a part as any other of the Hebrew text. Politian,* many years ago, printed some Sibylline verses, and an elegy of Callima- chus, without accents, because he found them so in his * Miscellan. p. 58. 80. z2 340 PREFACE. manuscripts ; and the* Greek New Testament was printed at London, in the year 1729, without accents ; and all this was done without any censure. Mr. Foster therefore must entertain an uncommon fondness for his own opinions, otherwise one cannot conceive that he would have broke out with So much asperity against the University of Oxford on this occasion. The University, in allowing some Greek books to be printed at their press without accents, have done no more than what had been done before by others without censure ; and in this they really did less than they had done in al- lowing the Hebrew Bible to be printed at their press without vowels. The truth is, that the printing of books with or without accents is no determination of the con- troversy about accents on either side, much less is the imprimatur of the vice-chancellor to Greek books, with or without accents, a declaration of the University for or against accents. Mr. Foster has carried his anger against the Uni- vii versity of Oxford still farther, by invidiously re- minding them of a certain f decree of convocation, which was passed in a time when party principles had unhap- pily got the better of cool judgment, and which the pre- sent members of that University do, it is to be presumed, wish had never been made. Nor has Mr. Foster at all mitigated his resentment by his telling the University, with an appearance of deference, though only ironical, that % they may if they please annul half the letters in every alphabet, and he shall not be the person to call in question their authority ; when, in the very same ... breath, he loudly calls upon the editors of two or three Greek books without accents, under the vice- * Dr. Twells published three se- this circumstance. In this he shewed veral pieces against this edition of the his judgment and temper, and gave an New Testament, in which he set forth example worthy of being taken notice all the faults he found in it; but he of and followed by those who are fond was so far from blaming the editor for of making mountains of mole-hills, publishing the Greek text without ac- t Essay, p. 204. cents, that he never once mentioned* £ Ibid. PREFACE. 341 chancellor's imprimatur, to step forth from behind their shield qfacademice auctoritas, and fight with him in this cause. Alas ! what modest author or editor will ven- ture to offer any thing to the public, if, for so harmless a thing as the printing of a Greek book without accents, he must be charged with unfaithfulness, and with giving up, and, by a kind of breach of trust, destroying what he should look on as a sacred deposit in his hands? By these expressions, which are not intended by any means to be understood hyperbolically, it appears that Mr. Foster considers the printing of Greek books with- out accents as a crime not at all inferior to sacri- . lege. But, in the name of plain common sense, where is the unfaithfulness ? where is the breach of trust? where is the destroying a sacred deposit by such a practice ? If any unfaithfulness, any breach of trust, any destroying a sacred deposit does, in respect to ac- cents, attend the printing of Greek books, there is much more reason to lay these crimes in charge to those that print them with accents. The oldest and best Greek ma- nuscripts that we have are without accents ; and if the edi- tors of Greek books from such manuscripts had printed them as they found them, they would have printed them without accents. If they had done this, they could not possibly be charged with unfaithfulness, breach of trust, and destroying a sacred deposit. The plain query then here is — whether they have not justly in- curred these charges by putting into their editions, from manuscripts that are more recent, and not so good, ac- cents which are not in the oldest and best manuscripts ? Did not Dr. Grabe print at Oxford, under the vice-chan- cellor's imprimatur, the Septuagint translation of the Old Testament with accents, though the Alexandrian manuscript, from which he printed it, and which his edi- tion was intended to represent, has them not ? Mr. Fos- ter might, and with more justice too, have in this case laid a charge of unfaithfulness, breach of trust, and destroying a sacred deposit; but then he would have 342 PREFACE. made two charges which would have contradicted and destroyed each other. If the arguments which Mr. Foster has offered are so strong, so cogent, and so unanswerable, as he takes them to be, he had reason to expect they would operate by their own force. This was the only proper conduct for him to observe on this occasion : for an adversary is always brought over more effectually and more easily by conviction, than by being loaded with opprobrious language. An author of great judgment and temper, whose sen- timents on the subject of accents partly agree with • • those of Mr. Foster, was so sensible of the many difficulties and objections to which this proposed method of pronunciation was liable, that he almost placed it amongst the aSvvara, and has ingenuously al- lowed those that differ from him, either to print Greek books without accents, or to print them with accents, but to pay no regard to them. * '* Ut libere dicam quod sentio, vel tonos prorsus sublatos esse velim tantisper dum depravata ilia pronuntiatio tonorum pro temporibus emendetur (quum praesertim veteres constet istos apices in scribendo non usurpasse) vel null am eorum rationem ... haberi." Here then is another man whom, if he xiii were alive, Mr. Foster might also have called upon to slep forth and light with him for having unluckily, though very honestly, said a thing which Mr. Foster dis- approves of. As I have not the honour of being a member of the University of Oxford, and have not published any Greek author without accents, I may, upon these accounts, be thought more impartial ; and for this reason I have al- lowed myself the liberty of saying something in vindica- tion of that learned body, that the world may not be im- posed upon by such an outcry, and think that the Univer- sity of Oxford has licensed the printing of some very * Sylloge Scriptor. Havercauip. P. that T. Beza was the author of this I. p. 179. It appears by a note, p. 352, piece. PREFACE. 343 wicked books. But I desire the reader will judge _^_ by the reasons which I have set forth. The University of Oxford, and the editors under their licence, undoubtedly had good reasons for what they have done ; and they are free, if they please, though I do not apprehend they will think themselves obliged, to account for their conduct in this respect. Mr. Foster also was free to offer his reasons to the public : but it would have been more to his credit if he had kept within the bounds of decency. No reader will think that he has shewn any Attic urbanity in concluding his book with so much acrimony; nor will he be induced to en- tertain a favourable opinion of the Greek language, by having before him an unlucky proof, that a know- ledge of that and good manners do not always go together. There is another thing which it concerns the reader to be informed of, but which I have not mentioned in the Dissertation, that I might keep as strictly as possible to the point I had in view. The thing is this : Mr. Foster has all along produced Professor Cheke, and made him appear as an advocate on his side. And yet I do not find that that learned professor ever intended to intro- duce such a method of pronunciation as Mr. Foster suggests. He has not said so ; neither can such an in- ference be justly made from any thing which he has said on this subject. Indeed the dispute between Bishop Gardiner and Professor Cheke, was of a quite differ- ent nature : it had for its object the pronunciation XV1 of the Greek vowels, diphthongs, and consonants only. The edict of the bishop, as chancellor, mentions only vowels, diphthongs, and consonants ; but saith not one word of accents. The pronunciation which Professor Cheke practised and taught, is set forth by him in his first letter to the bishop ; in which he mentions only vowels, diphthongs, and consonants : and this exposi- tion he there * saith is forma totius ret. This pronun- * Syll. Script, de L. Gr. P. ii. p. 284. 344 PREFACE. ciation he had learned from his predecessor, Professor Smith, who wrote three books in vindication of it, which .. were addressed by him to Bishop Gardiner. And in the second book he sets forth the several parti- culars, in which their pronunciation consisted : and yet in none of these is there any mention of the nature and power of accents. Nay, what is more, * Mr. Foster himself acknowledges, that accents had no share in this dispute : so that I cannot see upon what good founda- tion Mr. Foster could possibly produce Professor Cheke for an advocate in his cause. Professor Cheke speaks of his pronunciation of Greek accents in a transient, general manner ; and without any explanation. And as, in this case, both sides appeal to antiquity, those ... that make all acuted syllables long, as well as those that do not, it is impossible to form an argument in favour of either side, from such general assertions and appeals, unless particulars are set forth ; which Professor Cheke has not, either professedly or occa- sionally, done. But Mr. Foster thought that the name and authority of Professor Cheke would give him credit. Wishing, therefore, to have him appear an advocate on his side, he has, by a too hasty inference, made him so ; and, with a good degree of assurance, given this to his readers for a f certain fact. But how precarious the draw- ing of inferences in such a manner is, will plainly appear by another case. Velastus J asserts, that the accen- tual pronunciation of the Greek language, now used in the offices of the Greek church, is the same that has been used from all antiquity. Now, if Velastus had gone no farther, Mr. Foster might, with equal justice, have produced him for an advocate on his side : but he would have been greatly mistaken. For Velastus ex- plains himself, and saith, that they entirely neglected quantity, pronounced all acuted syllables long, and made short syllables that are naturally long. * Introduction to Essay. t De Lilt. Greecar. Pronunt. Rom. t Essay, p. 199. 1731. SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST PRONOUNCING THE GREEK LANGUAGE ACCORDING TO ACCENTS. Some years ago I published a Dissertation against pronouncing the Greek Language according to Accents. In the preface to which I declared, that by the Greek language the reader was to understand the aucient Greek language, and by accents, those which are commonly used in writing and pronouncing that language. And - at the * beginning of the Dissertation itself, I also declared, that my design was not to write against all use of accents (for some accents are, and must be, used in all languages), but to shew, or endeavour to shew, that the modern way of placing accents in the ancient Greek language is wrong; because it is, — 1. Arbitrary and uncertain. — 2. Contrary to analogy, reason, and quantity. — And, 3. Contradictory to itself. This has excited Mr. Foster to compose, and lately to publish, an Essay on the different Nature of Accent and Quantity. And I cannot but be glad that so inge- * Page 281. 346 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST nious a writer has taken this subject into his considera- tion. For the end which we both have in view is, I suppose, the same, viz. To discover and establish the genuine pronunciation of a most excellent lan- guage. But as there is great reason to apprehend that so much success is not to be hoped for, yet still the re- moving of a vicious pronunciation would be a good step towards it. And this was the immediate design of my Dissertation. This disquisition, the reader will observe, consists of two parts. The first relates to the place of accents; and the second to the power of them. Mr. Foster has be- stowed but few strictures on the many particulars which 1 had mentioned under the first part, and has insisted chiefly upon the nature and power of accents, or rather of the acute accent. And this indeed is the main point 4 to be considered in the present disquisition. For if the nature and power of the acute accent be once settled, there will be less reason to dispute concerning the place of accents. I shall therefore confine myself to this point. As to the other part of this disquisition, I shall only beg leave to lay before the reader a passage from Scaliger, which will not only enable him to form a judgment upon the subject in general, but by which he will also see that the opinion concerning the impropriety of the Greek accents is not an opinion, that was, among other whimsical ones, started, as Mr. Foster * asserts, about ninety years ago, by the younger Vossius. And I shall do this with no 5 small satisfaction to myself, as I find that some of my thoughts on this subject fall in with those of that great man, whose very excellent book, Be Camis Ling. Latina, I had not read, when I published my first Dissertation. The passage has some length; but the goodness of it will make ample amends to the reader for his trouble. f " Quum Greeci tarn in ultima syllaba singularum se- * Introduction. | De Causis L. L. c. 58. GREEK ACCENTS. 347 paratarumque vocum, quam in altera, ac tertia a fine sede acutum imponere consuevissent; in consequentia, sive contextu orationis, quos accentus in fine ponebant, acutos omisere: proque eis graves substituere: idque eo egere consilio, propterea quod acutus accentus vide- tur tollere syllabam ita, ut sequens syllaba prematur : in quatanquam fini suo quiescat vox. Quum igitur nihil haberent, quod sequeretur, nihil quoque me- tuere : at cum esset vox, quae subiret, cavere ne tan- quam una fieret cum praecedente. Id quod etiam in encliticis evenire videretur. Igitur acuunt roue, et wept, et tov ; quas, cum contexuere, gravibus insigniunt, tovq rrtpi tov aSeov. Nos vero hanc eandem animadvertentes rationem, qua acutus accentus tollit vocem in syllabam, quam acuit ita, ut sequens prematur, in fine vocis non ponimus, ne expectemus aliam syllabam subeuntem, in qua vox conquiescat : id quod Latini suis libris omnes testati sunt, nullam apud nos supremam syllabam acui. Acutus enim positus, aut exigit alias consequentes syl- labas, aut non. Si exigit, igitur, non est ponendus in fine vocum separatarum : si non exigit, ergo in consequentia quoque poni potuit. Sed falsi Graeci sunt, cum putarent gravem accentum nihil ad vocem perti- nere, sed ad syllabas tantum, unde etiam syllabicum vocavere. Iccirco adducti sunt ut crederent, turpe esse edere dictionem, quae nullo accentu insigniretur : quasi quum jura quoque absurdum consent hominem intesta- tum mori. Id autem eveniebat, nisi acutum in fine sal- tern reposuissent, cum dictio in syllabis praecedentibus neque ilium haberet, neque circumflexum. Sed ea ratio, aut perspicienda fuit etiam in consequentia, ubi gravem collocassent; aut ne in primis quidem vocibus admit- tenda. Apud nos igitur aut in penultima, aut in tertia a fine sedem ei statuere. Occupare autem alias, initio propiores, Graeci sibi licere noluerunt: quos etiam prisci Latini secuti easdem posteris, imitatione potius, quam consilio ducti, leges prasscripsere. Nam quamo- brera non liceat mihi vocem tollere in quarta a fine, nulla ratio musica potuit persuadere: possunt enhu 348 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST eodem tenorc tam in voce, quam in tibia, aut fidibus de- duci multae vel breves, vel longae. Quod si iccirco noluere, quia duabus syllabis sequentibus imminere acuta syllaba videatur, in quibus tractus vocis non ira- moretur : quod tieret si essent plures ; videamus quam non recte servarint haec. Est eadem ratio tam apud Graecos, quam nobis, sed diversus modus. Nam utrique negant ante tria finalia tempora singula, id est, ante tres breves syllabas, acui posse syllabam. Quare si duae postrema3 sint longae, quoniam solvi possunt in quatuor breves, non potuit in prascedenti ulla syllaba acutus collocari. Ratio haec una communis. At mo- dus diversus sic. Graeci, si ultima longa sit, et penul- tima brevis, ultimae longitudinem, ex qua fieri duae breves possent, observarunt : at si penultima longa sit, et ultima brevis, miserae hujus penultimae, tanquam ibi nulla esset, nullam rationem habuere. Latini contra ultimae longitudinem noncurarunt: penultimae jus suum attributum retinuere. Ergo jam deprehendimus accen- tuum horum cantillationem ridiculam, non natura, sed usu quodam gesticulatorio constare. Videamus vero, quod et supra tetigimus, quam ipsa sibi suis non constet legibus. Principio Graeci diphthongos ali- quot, quas producebant in pronunciando, quod attinebat ad accentuum sedes, pro brevibus habuere, ut Tirvrrrai. Praeterea Latini eadem ratione ultimas omnesneglexerc. Postremo antepenultimas omnes Graeci longas, nullo detracto tempore, acuto accentui postposuere. Quare si una ex his vel in line, vel in proxima fini sede, solva- tur in duo tempora, sane in quarto a fine tempore acu- tus ille graeculus, quern ab ea sede exulare jubent, in- venietur. Quare sapienter a posteris factum est, qui praeterquam in quibusdam partibus orationis, ut in ex- clamationibus, indignationibus, interrogationibus, nul- lum hujus putidi servitii jugum ferre voluerint. Nam si ante acutum in eadem voce plurimae syllabi gravi pronunciantur, KaKo^ap/iaKtvTpig, quare post ilium totidcm non possint ? Quod si respoudeanl, in- clinari nequire tanlum numcrum : quare, ubi nulla est GREEK ACCENTS. 349 quae inclinetur, hunc eundem ipsum statuere I ut in prae- senti exemplo, nulla syllaba secuta." — Indeed both the Greek and Latin grammarians have said many things on the subject of accents that have no solidity : and it is with good reason that Scaliger has passed a severe though just judgment upon their doctrine in this parti- cular : " Omnino haec omnia ad ostentationem literato- riam sunt invecta." c. 04. I shall now proceed to the point I proposed. And the first thing I shall do will be to consider some pas- sages out of Dionysius Halicarnassensis, which Mr. Foster thinks I have greatly mistaken or misre- _ presented. I. The passage which ought to be considered in the first place, is indeed of great weight in the present dis- quisition. And * Mr. Foster seems very angry against it, not only upon account of its appearing in the body of my Dissertation, but also for its assurance in looking him in the face even from the title-page. I shall set the passage down, and then make some observations upon it. •f C H juh' yap Tre^i) Xi^tr ovSzvbg ovre vvofiarog ovre pv,}xa- rog fiia&Tcu rovg xpovovr, ovct fxerariurtcnv' aXX o'lag irapu- Arj^e nj tyixrei rag tn)W.apag, rag te fiaicpug not rag [3pa)^dag, roiavrag . t Dion. Hal. it. 2m/&. s. 11. 050 'SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST *declared that I produced them to prove, that the accents that were first used were agreeable to quantity, and that they could not be considered but as they were agreeable to quantity. This declaration is very plain : and, so far as it goes, is, I think, agreeable even to Mr. Foster's general sen- timents. And I cannot but observe here, that Mr. Foster, having in his thoughts what had been asserted by some other authors, against whom he was writing at the same time, has, not only in this place, but through- out his Essay, ascribed to me consequences, which fol- low, or seem to him to follow, from their assertions, but which I am not at all concerned to vindicate. And as to the present charge, I ought to make this farther obser- vation — that it does not and cannot follow from any thing that has been said by me or others upon this subject. For we all allow the use of accents as necessary : but what accents, and where they are to be placed, are other points. 2. Mr. Foster's next charge against me concerning this passage is, that I have mistaken the sense of it, by not attending to the context. Let us see whether this be really so. The position with which Dionysius sets out is, that musicians made words submit to their musical measures, and not their musical measures to words. r H Se dpyaviKi) re Kai toSiicrj fiovaa rag \££,ug rolg /xiXemv vttotcittuv a^iol, kol ov ra jUt'Xrj raig \££,t/^>jc e, kui irptTrov. Sore kui etti ravTrjg ?/ ciKor/ f£pve?at pev rolg peXEcrir, ayerat t$e rolg pvSpolg, daTrd^ETCLi ce rdg pErajwXdg, ttoSeT. 3' etti TrdvTOiv to oikeI- ov. »/ Ce liaXXayrj /card to paXXov cat i\ttov. So that in the passage now under consideration, by IlOSfll and flOIQI, Dionysius must have meant the same thing, that he expresses by paXXov and farm at the conclusion of the paragraph. And indeed these expressions are so much the same in sen^e, that some have thought that the latter might, for this reason, be left out of the text. All this receives a full confirmation from section 25, in which Dionysius sheweth how prose compositions may be made to resemble poetry, viz. by having poetical ornaments, but yet not so many as poetry ; and even by industriously concealing them : so that, without appear- ing too much, they may yet be perceived and felt. Dionysius hath, in other places, used the word I10212I 2a 354 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST in the same sense in which I understand it here. So 9 sect. 17. ovk fyovreg ^ ibrtiv II02QI, but not being able to say how much. And sect. 18. a\X opwg aH,i6v iaTiv loeiv 1102121 dievijvo^v b Troirirfjg tov icrTov, how much, or by how many degrees, the poet has ex- celled the sophist. What hath been here said will, I trust, not only justify me from the charge of having mistaken the sense of this passage of Dionysius, but also enable the reader to judge of the sense that Mr. Foster has put upon it. He understands Dionysius to mean, that * oratorical or common discourse differs from music, not in the quality, but number only of sounds ; i. e. that the former takes in the compass only of four or five notes, but that music takes in the compass of twelve, fourteen, or more. But if Dionysius had meant this, after he had said rv\aTT£v te /cat trvyypatyiiov, to. ply avTot te KaTaaKiva^ovaiv ovo/xara, avpirXiKOVTtg JVitt)- <$tuog aXXi)Xoig to. ypdfj.pa.Ta' kcu Tag iXoTe A yov- mv. Still without any mention of the TrpoaioSiai. And the Kopog in sect. 11. is said to arise from the not adapt- ing every thing in general to the subject. Bapvg ucv 6 xopog, arjdlg §£ to ptj vtroKtipivoig appoTTOv. In the many passages which Dionysius produceth ^ out of ancient authors, and which he blameth for their stiffness, asperity, and want of harmony, he GREEK ACCENTS. 357 never mentions this iroiKiXia irpom^iwv. And yet, if by TTOLKikia irpotjtySiwv, he meant the system of accents which we now have ; and if these take off, or lessen that stiffness, asperity, and want of harmony, which he censures, he would certainly, one would think, have taken notice of them in these instances : and indeed he ought, injustice to those authors, to have done it. For we find the same TroiiaXia TrpoaySiojv, according to the present system, in Hegesias that we do in Demosthenes ; and the same in * Pindar's dithyrambic, that we do in Homer. Besides all this, there is, I apprehend, a fault in the common reading of this passage. Instead of KAEII- « 4 .TOYSAI, I think we should read KAEITTOYSI, and refer it to pvSpioi, axV ara an( * ™guq' for otherwise there is no verb to answer to these three nominative cases. With this reading, iroiKiXia will not be restrained to raring, but will take in pvSpiol, axn^ctra, and rdaug. And what seemeth to confirm this reading is, that, in a few lines after, the word TroiKikia is twice used in this comprehensive sense. Whereas, if Dionysius had in the above passage referred iroiKiXia to rdaug only, one would of course expect that in these two places he would have said voiKiXia rdaewv. But, instead of this, he makes the want of iroaaXla, for which he censureth the followers of Isocrates, to consist in quite different things : irepl rag p.zrapoXag, kcu rrjv TroiKiXiav, ov irdvv tvrvyjvuaiv' aXX' qr tan Trap avrolg ug TrtpioSov icvuXog, 6p.oudi)g aytifxartov rd^ig, o"i»jU7rXoK}j ^wi'ijtvrwv 17 avrr). And when he saith, that no writers ever made use of irom\taig tvpowrlpatg, than. Herodotus, Plato, and Demosthenes, the word evpowri- paig cannot but. be thought a very improper epithet to TToiKiXlaig rdatiov. Though this passage, when duly considered, falls greatly short of what Mr. Foster would have it say, yet is it produced by him as parallel to a passage in Quinc- tilian, which he f enlarges upon, with a design of making *" Dion. sect. 22. t Eb*ay, p. 151, 5cc 358 SECOND DISSSERTATION AGAINST these two passages communicate light to each other. But the passage in Quinctilian, when rightly considered, o/» will be found to answer his purpose as little as that of Dionysius. " * Accentus quoque cum rigore quodam, turn simili- tudine ipsa minus suaves habemus ; quia ultima syllaba nee acuta unquam excitatur, nee flexa circumducitur, sed in gravem, vel duas graves cadit semper. Itaque tanto est seririo Graecus Latino jucundior, ut nostri Poetae, quoties dulce carmen esse voluerunt, illorum id nominibus exornent." This passage hath considerable difficulties. It would not be an easy matter to say what Quinctilian meant by a similitudo of accents, if he had proceeded no farther. But he hath explained himself by saying, that the Greeks placed the acute and circumflex upon the last syllable, ow which the Latins never did, and that upon this ac- count the Latin accents were not so sweet as the Greek. One cannot indeed refuse to Quinctilian the privilege of being his own interpreter. But then, as the Latins had the same number of accents with the Greeks, it cannot easily be conceived how a difference, arising from the mere placing of accents as to one syllable only, could cause a difference in the sweetness of them ; and such a difference too as would, in this respect, give a considerable advantage and superiority to the Greek language : unless it can be proved that the placing of accents on final syllables is more harmonious than the placing them on penultimates and antepenultimates. oo But what is more material, — if this point be accurately considered, no such difference between the Latin and Greek accents will be found as Quincti- lian suggests. For the circumflex containeth an acute and a grave : therefore, when it is placed upon the last syllable of a Greek word, and resolved into its constitu- ent parts, the pronunciation of this word will end in a grave. And though an accent be placed upon the last * Instil. !. xii. c. 10. GREEK ACCENTS. 359 syllable of a Greek word, yet this is to take place only when the word is pronounced separately. For in discourse the final acute is always turned into, and pronounced as, a grave. Where then is the real difference, in this re- spect, between the Latin and Greek accentuation ? What foundation does this afford to blame the Latin man- ^q ner, as less harmonious and diversified than the Greek ? Quinctilian appears still more prejudiced in favour of the Greeks, by what he says at the close of this pas- sage. For what Latin poets have, in order to make their compositions more harmonious, made use of Greek words, merely because they were accented upon the last syllable ? This prejudice was not peculiar to Quinctilian : — the Romans in general were fond of every thing that was Grecian. And in this they were not always led by reason, but were sometimes misled by admiration : as Quinctilian himself acknowledged!. " Sed res tota magis Graecos decet, nobis minus succedit; nee id fieri natura puto, sed alienis favemus ; ideoque, cum Kvpravx^va .^ mirati sumus, incurvicervicum vix a risu defendi- mus." Lib. i. c. 5. May not therefore what Quinctilian hath said, in commendation of the Greek final accent, with justice be considered as an instance of that general prepossession which the Romans entertained for the Greek language, and which, he acknowledgeth, was not always founded in nature and reason? Quinctilian certainly was a man of great judgment ; but yet he was not infallible. He hath mistaken the sense of some authors whom he hath cpaoted : he hath committed some errors in points of grammar ; and even in his endeavours to make out, in other respects, the superior sweetness of the Greek language above the Latin ; as may be seen in our learned Gataker's 41 Diatrib. de N. Instrument! Stylo, c. 2. In reality, therefore, there is nothing in this passage of Quinctilian, or in that of Dionysius, that can make out 360 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST the iroiKiXia, which Mr. Foster intended, or * supply him with a full and satisfactory answer to some objections brought against the modern accentual marks: for, notwith- standing this pretended disparity, and consequent sweet- ness, the pronunciation of all words in awtTrdq, or con- struction, in the Greek language, whose last syllable is marked with a circumflex, or an acute (when separate) doth in reality end in a grave. And so the harmony is, in both cases, the same. - ' Having considered the above passages of Diony- sius as far as seemed necessary, I shall now pro- ceed to the main point, viz. the consideration of the nature, power, and force of the acute accent. That the elevation and depression of sounds are dis- tinct from the continuance of them, is a point which nobody will deny; but yet what may be expressed by mere sounds, cannot equally be expressed in the pro- nunciation of words and syllables. On this is founded the difference between vocal utterance and singing. When words are set to music, then they are sung, and the modulation is strictly speaking, fxovmicn. But when words are only uttered, then the modulation is only said to be musical ; a modulation which bears some rela- tion and resemblance to music, as all sounds do. For this reason, speaking is called p.ovaiKr\ rig iTnh)v{y wg jap TOV VX ov r ^£ ivpvBfiiaq Iktuvovgci te kcu (rvariXXovaa /| vine or'| ^7rX?7»'| Let us now make some observations. I. The several consonants that are joined in the same syllable with the vowels o and rj, are so many additions that make themselves sensible to the ear. They are called * Trp6aQx]Kai aKovoral, and aiaS'rjrcu'. And so po is longer than o, rpo longer than po, orpo longer than rpo, Xrj longer than ??,7rXri longer than Xj], S7rXrj longer than 7rX?) ; and or is longer than arpo, 27rXrjv longer than 27rXr?, and 2<£r)£ longer than 27rX>jy. II. A consonant joined with a vowel, but following it in the same syllable, makes that vowel longer than any number of consonants do that are placed before it. The reason of this is, that the vowel being the most es- sential part of the syllable, the voice always hastens to seize it; and in order to do this, it slurs over all the conso- nants that are placed before it ; so that the voice suffers little or no delay. But the case of the consonant that follows is not the same ; it cannot be slurred over, but must be pronounced full and distinct : otherwise it would run into, and be confounded with, the fol- lowing syllable. By this mean the voice is delayed more in the latter, than in the former part of the sylla- ble ; and or is longc than arpo, and rjv longer than SttXtj. For this reason, a short vowel can be followed but by one consonant in the same syllable, though it may be preceded by more. The Rhythmki allowed half a time to a consonant, when it followed a vowel; olov r^v we, 01 ypapp.a.TiKoi \iyov, non poterit non corripi : sin a conso- nante \vw-u>, earn simul ac pronunciaris, ea erit oris fi- guratio, ut ante sequentem vocalem altera w (Xuw) ne- cessario sit efferenda. Similis est ratio prosoediaca verborum awop, Sawt^w, Stwa, oXoWoe, aliorumque haud paucorum." Miscel. p. 165, 6. III. Though these several differences are sensible to an attentive ear, yet, as they are too nice for common use, grammarians have made but one general division of syllables into short and long. And when they say, that a long syllable has twice the time of a short syllable, this must be understood in a general sense, and in relation principally to the vowels that are in them; as they are long or short, either by nature or position. As (o has twice the time of o, and rj twice the time of e; and o and e, when they are followed by two mutes, are reckoned equal to w and rj. But, in a strict sense, there are several degrees of length in each of the orders of short and long syllables, according to the several sensi- ble additions that are made to vowels. This is evi- dent from the above paradigm, and the first observation. And hence it follows, that though w has twice the time of o, yet it has not twice the time of arpo, because this has the sensible additions of three consonants : nor has utph) twice the time of arpo, because though w has twice the time of o, yet arpw has not twice as many, but only the same sensible additions that arpo has. Upon these principles it was that the Rhythmici said that the first syllable of a dactyl, though long, was shorter than a perfect syllable ; but as they were not able to GREEK ACCENTS. 3G5 say how much, they called it "AX070V. * 01 jxivroi pvO- fiiKol tovtov tov Trodbg t»jv juatcpeiv (ipaj^ynpav dvai (j>ctGi rr)g reXdag' ovk t^ovTt g §e tt7rav ttogm, koXovgiv avrr\v "AXoyov. By a perfect syllable, I suppose, was meant a long syl- lable, that had all the sensible additions which a long- syllable could have. IV. In general, every sensible addition that is made r ^ to the latter part of a syllable must cause a more sen- sible delay in the pronunciation of it, and make it propor- tionably longer than any addition that is made in the former part of it. And this seems to me to be the case of the acute accent, for the pronunciation of a syllable depends upon the body of the syllable sounded ; now this body is made up, not only by the letters in the syl- lable, but also by the stress that is added to it, or by the delay that is caused by the acute accent: and every such delay is a fipaSvrrig tiqtov xpovov. The ancient Greek grammarians did not think that the acute accent was a mere elevation of the voice : they -^ ascribed to it a power of lengthening syllables, and making short syllables long ; they did not say that this accent was pronounced long or short, according to the length or shortness of the syllables with which it was joined, for then the accent would have been said to be pronounced long, because the syllable with which it was joined was long ; but, on the contrary, they said that a short syllable became long because it was joined with an acute accent; they must, therefore, have ascribed to this accent a power of making short syllables long. And it is observable that they never ascribed to the grave accent any power as to quantity: and yet, if this accent be the reverse of the acute (as grammarians re- present it), it would, one would think, follow, that r ~ a grave would have been presumed to have a power of making a long syllable short, as the acute was thought to have of making a short syllable long. But this has never been suggested ; and I cannot assign any reason * Dion. sect. 17. 366 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST for this, but that it was thought there was a peculiar power in the acute accent, which, by the stress it laid upon a short syllable, did in all cases make it longer, and in some cases long; for in all the ways of making a long syllable short which grammarians mention, they never say that this was done by virtue of the grave ac- cent. The Metrici did not allow themselves so great a lati- tude in the time of syllables as the Rhythmici, and yet ^g they gave a greater length to a short syllable, when it had an acute, than it did to the same syllable when it had not that accent. So the scholiast upon xlephasstion. *'Joteov oti wapa. toIq fitrgiKOiq 17 o£urovou- Htvit) (TvXXafii) jue'iZwv tern Trig fiapvvopivriQ, olov 1) \og i\og. jiveTai yap fipaSvrriQ Tig tov yjpovov Sia Trig otieiag. The same scholiast says there are several ways by which a short syllable may be made long; and the se- cond way which he mentions is by the acute, t Acute- pog ot rpoirog tojv ti)v j3pa\iuav ug fiaicpav avafepovTiov, 6 $ia rTjg ot,uag. avTn ovv ■>) o^ela Ittiku/luvy) tiv\ tCov (5pa)(i(vv i) fipayyvofilvuv ^>i\p6vwv, jujjkwh' wg Itti tov, 59 i TfZi; $' Vp'fynrav Wii iSovaioXov oiv. toot) 6 TeXevralog irovg Trvppiyioq fxlv virapyti' eireiSi) Si rrjv 6t,dav £%ei liTLKUfxivriv £7rt to o, avTi TpoTTi]g TrapuXriitTai, Trig o^tiag prjicvvova^g to o, koi ovk aicaipiog' Soku yap 17 6%,ua avaTHvoplvy Trj ts (jxovrj, nal avry rr} %£cru koI SiaTVTrwaei tov "^apanrripog &WTr)g Tr)v fipayuav avaKaXuaBai tig iTtpavTa&v. 7) ovv ol^ua Toiavrriv i\u (pvmv ical Svvapiv, tog «?) povov lin- KUfiivri liravk) jipa^dag, pn.Kvveiv avrfjv, dXXa icai 7rpoK£ifiivt], koI ptTaicHpivr}, SvvacrSai tjj fipa^da -\povov yapiuaOai. The reader will be pleased to observe here, that what I call the stress of the acute, the scholiast calls Simg kcu SiaTvirwaig tov ^apaKrrjpoc kavTijg. Now the Sicrug were P. 78. f P. 77. t n./*', ver. 208. GREEK ACCENTS. SG7 pauses, or stops, that caused a delay in pronouncing. * " Lectioni posituras accedere, vel distinctiones ^q oportet, quas Grasci Seaug vocant, quae inter legen- dum dant copiam spiritual reficiendi, ne continuatione deficiat." So that, according to this scholiast, the acute caused a delay in pronouncing as well as the stops. These posit urce are also called Oiaeig by fDo- natus. Eustathius delivers the same doctrine in his comment upon the following^ verse of Homer : XayaporriQ eotiv, wg tov AioXou avri paicpag lyovTog Tr\v T7apa\{)yovtv, aXXa icat to npb avrrjg, Kai to ptT avTr)v. — The place, to which Eustathius refers, is, I suppose, Odyss. r. ver. 230. v. iii. fol. 1464, 5. And it ought to be observed, that what Eustathius and the scholiast say concerning the power of the acute may, for aught that appears to the contrary, extend to remote antiquity : for they do not mention this as a Lbing that was advanced only by some, and denied by others, but as a general, received principle ; and Eustathius's words, in the place last re- fered to, are, ol tovoi, povaxTig ovreg airr] \rj pciTa, wg (j>awvi) here is the same as (pwvii eyjpapp.arog, Gaza, Lascaris, Qwrj IvapQpog, JDionys. Halicar., tySoyyog tvapBpog, lyy pafifxaTOQ, §Pollux ; and that it signifieth not a mere sound, but the enunciation, or vocal utter- ... ance, of a word or syllable ; when, therefore, it is said that a tone or acute accent makes the enun- ciation, or vocal utterance, of a word or syllable, zvpvTt- pav, this cannot signify b^vrcpav, less fiapvrtpav, and much less fipaxvrspav. What then can it signify but fiaKpoTtpav ? — zvpvg in general signifieth extension every way. But sometimes it signifieth extension only in breadth, in contradistinction to height: || Ti[A.@ov X' oh [j.d'ka. woXXov iyai wovlWflai avmya, 'AXX' I'STlEiXEtt T010V" EWElTct 5e JMtl TOV AyOLloi EvfvV 6' l-^nXov t£ TiSw^EVai. If I have committed any fault here, it must be in my un- derstanding Dionysius Thrax in the same sense in which the scholiast upon Hephaestion, and Eustathius would * Dissert, p. 304. rnv yivio-iv In tovtuv 'Ka.jj.Bdm t&gciTov, t Essay, p. 142, 143. xai tw haXua-tv eij -raura wojsirai tsXju- £ 'Ap^ai //.h ovv £is-i ri?f av&paJTr/vtic -rai'av. it. 2vv9. sect. 14. and so Vox in xal Eva'jflpou v>j?, al ^ojxeti ^e^ofxivat Quinctilian, Instit. 1. l. c. 5. and D»o- Jiai'fEtnv, o; KaXoE^EV a-ra^iia. M.a.1 y^d/j,- med. 1. ii. col. 425. /auto.' yga./j,/j,a.Ta (a.iv, o'ti yfa/j.f/.dti; ticj § Lib. ii. c. iv. s. 114. trrifxalvfrat' erroi^iTa ii, on fciv>t || II. V. ver. 245, &c. GREEK ACCENTS. 369 have understood him. Dionysius was giving a gram- matical definition ; and, accordingly, I understood ^ zvpvTtpav to mean the same thing here as paKporepav ; and for the same reasons, and upon the same authori- ties, I still understand it in the same sense, and think it very expressive of the idea intended to be conveyed. As to * Mr. Foster's saying, that eupurrje relates to a measure of the voice, totally distinct from the height and length of it, though joined with them both, and re- ferring to his first chapter, and to Scaliger, for a full ex- planation of this, I do not apprehend, that what is there said by Mr. Foster can be applied to the present case. For what Mr. Foster there advances, and would support by the authority of Scaliger, is the emphasis : whereas, by the afflatio vocis in latitudine, Scaliger means the breathings in general, and not what is peculiarly called the emphasis. For this regards but one particu- lar syllable, or word, or part of a sentence, whereas the afflatio vocis in latitudine of Scaliger regards every syllable, and makes part of their body : and it is the vocal utterance of this body which he f calls quantity. Besides, the emphasis is not ranked by the grammarians among the irpoa^iai, but by the rhetoricians among the figures of speech. To give a farther support to this tvpvrrig or emphasis, Mr. Foster produces a passage from the 20th chapter of Aristotle's Poetics ; where he is treating of the powers and letters of speech ; and says, ravra St dia^ipet G^paoi Ti. TOV OTO/JLaTOQ, KOI TOTTOIQ, KOLl Sa/> ttjv (ipa^tiav elg fxaKpdp avayW €TnKtifiivr\ fikp, wg kirl tov, + "Ewe o ravff wpfxaive Kara, (ppeva, icat Kara %fiuy, ■7rpoK£(j>akov ydp ovrog tov arlypv, to fiev e h apyrj ov [XETpeirai' to Se wg 6 avTt crTrovhlov irapaXafifidvETai, Tijg hvrepag crvWafiTjg to o fiovov e\ov(rr]g, ko.1 /jli) E7ri(j)EpofiEV(i}v £vo ffv(J.(j>aiSpa>/xoc. Item quia QlXnnrog dicitur accentu in prima, eodem modo mediam corripit. Et nunquam aliter invenies apud Plautum, quia mediam in nomine Philippus corripuerit. Quod mirum est in positione. Sed quaerenti causam accentum semper praetexet." The reader will do me the justice to observe, that I do not produce this to justify such a practice, but to shew that the ancients did not think that the acute Greek accent was a mere elevation of the voice. Though I think it proves a great deal more. For how can it be conceived that Latin writers could lay such a stress upon acuted Greek syllables, as made the short syllable, with which it was joined, long, and the following long syllable short, unless the Greeks of their times did so? But whether these were faults in a language, that could support itself upon its own natural quantity, is another thing. However, it is not improbable that our strong acute accent took its rise from that practice. And the use of it, with such a power, was confirmed from the consideration of the nature of modern languages, which, without such an accent, are not capable of affording any tolerable har- mony. I take this to be generally true as to most, if not all, modern languages. For when this acute accent is placed indifferently on all syllables, whether they be naturally short or long, and the short syllables are then pronounced long, this can proceed from nothing, but the power and force of the acute accent. But, without launch- ing out into unnecessary discussions, I keep, in the present argument, to the single point of our own acute accent ; which is the accent we use in pronouncing the Greek language. Though I cannot but observe here, that Mr. Foster is mistaken when he says, that this prac- tice is entirely our own, owing to the nature of our Eng- lish pronunciation, p. 139. for foreigners do the same. Voss. de Art. Gram. lib. ii. c. 10. GREEK ACCENTS. 373 This Mr. Foster calls an abuse. But when one speaks of an abuse, this must refer to a standard, which is fixed and allowed. For nothing can be reckoned wrong, but what departs from what is allowed to be right. But where is this standard ? has it ever been fixed ? has Mr. Foster discovered it? One ought to think he has. For he, all along, speaks upon a supposition, that an acute accent may be sounded in such a manner, as will not make the short syllable, upon which it is laid, appear long to the ear. This then must be deemed the standard accent : and in reference to this it is that our accent, upon account of its carrying a greater stress, is an abuse. I will not carry this so far as to say, that Mr. Foster would have us alter our accent in the pro- nunciation of our own language. But then I must say, that he would have us pronounce our own language by one accent, and the Greek language by another. If he does not mean this he means nothing. And if he means this he saith nothing against those, who are not for pronouncing the Greek language according to ac- cent. For all of them by this mean the present modern acute accent, which carrieth such a stress, as makes the syllable, upon which it is laid, sound long to the ear : and it is by this sound that the ear judges of quantity. To form a just notion of the true state of the debate between us, who are against pronouncing the Greek language according to accents, and those who are for it, it will be necessary to consider in what we agree, and in what we disagree : — Both sides allow the use of accents in the pronunciation of the Greek language : both sides allow that the elevation and depression of the voice are, in their nature, distinct from the continuance of such »« elevation and depression, i. e. from quantity : both sides allow that each accent, considered of itself, is ca- pable of two modifications in point of time, and may be varied to the compass of four or five notes : and both sides allow, that, in pronouncing the Greek language, accents are not to interfere with and spoil quantity. But we differ in this : that ivc assert, that so far as the argument from 374 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST accent goes, our acute accent carrieth such a stress with it, as makes every syllable over which it is placed sound long to the ear, and so spoils the quantity. And Mr. Foster asserts that the acute accent ought, when it is placed over a short syllable, to carry with it but half of the stress or time which it carries with it when it is *.g placed over a long one, and that by this the quan- tity would be preserved. Now upon this state of the debate, which is the only true one, it is very obvious to observe, that by the acute accent we mean that ac- cent which we moderns use in pronouncing our own lan- guage, and which doth in all cases sound the syllable over which it is placed long, and that Mr. Foster means an accent which is not in use with us. In relation, therefore, to the accent which we mean, and which we all use, I really cannot see that there is any difference between us and Mr. Foster, if he abides by the princi- ples which he hath laid down, and the concessions q« which he hath made. For he # alloweth that the ac- cent which we use does make all syllables sound long to the ear, and f that if the voice is retarded in some syllables, by what cause soever that delay be occa- sioned, there is truly and formally long quantity. But this is the very thing we contend for ; and from which we strongly conclude, that therefore the Greek language ought not to be pronounced according to accents, mean- ing our acute accent. As for those accents which Mr. Foster mentions, and which are to be lengthened or shortened, we have nothing to do with them in the pre- sent debate ; they are quite another thing ; whatever gj becomes of them, our position is proved upon this principle, which we both admit, viz. that our acute accent maketh all syllables long, and that this spoils the Greek quantity. * I allow the fact, Essay, p. 139. — quantity in English versification as the and p. 25. he confirmeth this by aquo- same. To which maybe added Dr. tation from Mr. Johnson, who, in his Ward's First Essay upon the English prosody, prefixed to his dictionary, Language, p. 30. considers the acute tone and long t Essay, p. 16. GREEK ACCENTS. 375 Mr. Foster, in his Introduction, sets out with an ap- pearance of accuracy in giving four or five senses in which the word accent is sometimes used, and this he doth with a very good design, viz. to guard against ambiguity: but the reader, I believe, will not think that in the body of his book he has so carefully guarded against ambiguity as he had professed to do ; for ambiguity and confusion do not arise from hence, that a word bears different senses, but from urging against one sense of a word ar- guments drawn from another sense of it: let the g^ reader therefore judge whether Mr. Foster hath not done this. Our arguments are drawn from the nature, power, and effect of accents, taken in one sense ; and against this Mr. Foster produceth arguments drawn from the nature, power, and effect of accents taken in another sense. To give the reader a thorough insight into this affair, it will be proper to consider the accent whjch Mr. Foster recommendeth, and would substitute in the place of ours. The accent of Mr. Foster is to be high, quick to the sense, sharp, instantaneous, and* even when it is joined with a long syllable, though the duration of the sound be long, the power and effect of the acute is short and q« quick to the sense, occasioned by a high note succeed- ing a low one, or rising above the grave tone of voice ; the perception ofivhich transition is sudden and instan- taneous, before the continuance of the note is determined one way or the other for long or short ; and this Mr. Foster saith he clearly perceives, and more clearly than he can perhaps express ; but men of common under- standings will not, 1 am apt to think, clearly perceive what an accent this is, and much less will they be able to make any use of it in speaking. To make out the former part of his description of the acute accent, Mr. Foster hath subjoined a long note to * Essay, p. 144, a, 6. 376 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST q. shew that b%vq, in its consequential, figurative sense, signifieth sometimes quick and hasty: but he might have spared himself the trouble of proving what nobody doth or will deny. It will also be readily allowed, that bl,vg, in its peculiar, musical sense, is used for a high tone without any consideration of length, but then we must remember, what I mentioned before, that vocal ut- terance is not singing ; and because words, borrowed from music, are used to express the tones of the voice in speaking, we are not therefore to conclude that they are to be taken in their original strict sense when they are used in this way; for every thing that is musical is not music, as every thing that is poetical is not poetry. When Mr. Foster saith, that thougk the duration of the sound of the accent, when joined with a long syllable, be q~ long, the power and effect of it is short, to me, and I am apt to think, to every reader, this is the same as if he had said, that though the sound of it be long, yet the sound of it is short : for I take it that the sound of the accent is the same with the power and effect of it ; or, however, that they are inseparable. A vowel that is followed by two half vowels, as in contemnit, the in- stance produced by Mr. Foster, is not, indeed, in strict- ness, so long as if it were followed by two mute conso- nants ; but still, if it be in the order of long syllables, the acute accent that is over it, or joined with it, cannot have both a long and a short sound, but must necessa- rily be sounded long throughout the whole body of the syllable. op What makes Mr. Foster's description of his ac- cent the less intelligible is, that he * alloweth it to have one measure of time ; for upon this one cannot avoid asking, how an accent, that hath one measure of time, can, on the one hand, be quick, short, and instanta- neous 1 and, on the other hand, how the duration of the * Essaj, p. 174. GREEK ACCENTS. 377 sound of it can be long ? For it should seem that, in the former case, it would not have one time ; and, in the latter, that it would have two times. And besides all this — if this acute, of one measure of time, be placed over a long syllable, as it will then reach and operate over but one half, and the first half of it, what is to be- come of the remaining half? Is it to have no accent? g~ Yes, it must certainly have some accent, but this cannot be another acute ; it must then be a grave, but an acute and grave on along syllable are a circumflex. If in any other instance 1 have mistaken the meaning of Mr. Foster, I ought to produce some excuse of my own. But in the present case I do not apprehend there is any need of my doing this ; for I cannot but think that my inability to comprehend his meaning, if I do not comprehend it, is sufficiently excused by his confession of his inability to express it. I have confessed, and do again confess, that there are many difficulties on both sides of this subject, more o fi than I am able to remove, even to my own satisfac- tion : but I think it much better ingenuously to acknow- ledge this, than, with a profession of removing difficulties, to suggestwhat I cannot clearly express. I restrain myself therefore to the main points which I have all along had in view, viz. that the ear is the proper judge of sounds ; that the acute accent, which we use, makes all sylla- bles with which it is joined sound long to the ear; and, therefore, that the Greek language ought not to be pro- nounced according to it; because by this every short syllable that has an acute accent will sound long. Those that have read Mr. Foster's Essay must, with- out my pointing to particular places, have ob- o q served that he has dropped several unhandsome ex- pressions, and entertaineth a contemptuous opinion of the understandings and hearts of those from whom he differs on this subject. Such practices are indeed very common in the world, even among those who really are scholars : Mr. Cheke, whose learning Mr. Foster justly commends, was guilty of this, and Bishop Gardiner 378 SECOND DISSERTATION AGAINST smartly reproached him for his having applied the in- decent word debacchari to him ; notwithstanding he de- clared, in almost the same breath, that in all his expres- sions towards the bishop he would keep within the bounds of the strictest modesty, and avoid every thing 90 that might give offence. * "Tuorum verborum obli- tus, interim debacchari, verbum parum honoriflcum, mihi adscribis : interim, sed paulo post, ita ais : Ego vero me intra modesties, fines continebo, neque unquam ita loquar ut dominationi turn verbo displicuisse videar. Non satis Graece hoc : cavisset enim Grascus suum menda- cium oblivione prodere, ne tanquam sorex suo indicio periret." But because such practices are common, they are not therefore less blameable : the gentleman ought always to get the better of the mere scholar; if he does not, he hurts himself more than his adversaries : and in the present case, the reader will not fail to pass this 91 just judgment upon Mr. Foster— that of all men he had most reason to avoid such a conduct, as f he hath professed, that, till lately, he was himself in the same way of thinking with those from whom he now differs, and then, no doubt, he entertained as good an opinion of his own understanding and heart as it is to be supposed he now doth. Mr. Foster^ maketh excuses for his having concerned himself in this subject, but he needed not to have done this, as his inclination leads him to, and his profession engages him in, the study of the learned languages, in which every degree of accuracy deserveth commendation. For my part, instead of making excuses for writing on a subject of this nature, I might, with a good grace now, and with a much better hereafter, make excuses for my want of leisure. The subject is not trivial or trifling. § Men of learning and judgment know how to set a pro- * Syll. Script, de L. G. P. vol. ii. myself let the reader peruse the f6llow- P- 448. ing passage of QuiDctilian : " Quo mi- t Introduction. nus suntferendi, qui hauc artem, ut te- + Ihid. nuem acjejunam, cavillantur, quae nisi $ In justification of Mr. Foster and oratori futuro fundamenta fideliter je- GREEK ACCENTS. 379 per value upon grammatical disquisitions, because they know the important effects of them ; they are the found- ation of all good compositions. The author of Hermes has acquired great reputation by that performance ; qn nor will I (though I should, upon a due considera- tion of the main point in debate, be still thought really to differ from Mr. Foster) refuse to give him his due praise. By his performance on the present subject he has shewn himself to be a man of genius and learning ; and if he has written with the same disposition that I write, there is, at least there ought to be, no difference between us but what appears upon paper. The main point which I had in view, was to shew Q A that the ancient Greek language cannot be pro- nounced according to accents, i. e. according to that acute accent which we use, without spoiling the quan- tity ; and I have pursued it in such a manner, as, I trust, will enable the reader to judge for himself of what hath been, or may be, said on this subject. To pursue it any farther would be to descend to mere altercation, a method by no means conducive to the dis- covery of truth, or to the information of the reader. I have before me this judicious observation of Quinc- tilian :* " Non obstant has discipline per illas eun- q * tibus, sed circa illas hasrentibus." Of which I shall now make a prudent use by putting an end to this Disser- tation, and taking my leave of the subject. cent, quidquidsuperslruxeris corruet ; tibus apparebit multa rerum subtilitas, necessaria pueris, jncunda senibus, quae non modo acuere ingenia puerilia, dulcis secretorum comes, et quae vel sed exercere altissimam quoque erudi- solaomni studiorum genere plis habet tionemac scientiampossit." lib. i.e. 4. operis quani ostentationis. Ne quis And we learn from Macrobius, that Ct- jgitur tamquam parva fastidiat gram- cero himself, after he had pleaded in matices elementa ; non quia magna? sit the forum, frequeutly went to the operae consonantes a vocalibus discer- school of Antonius Gnipho. Saturn. 1. nere, ipsasque eas in semivocalium iii. c. 12. munerum, mutarumque partiri ; sed * Instit. 1. i. c. 7. quia interiora velut sacri hujus adeun- INDEX TO THE ESSAY, &c. A. Accent, on what founded, p. 3. ety- mology of the word how misapplied, ib. accent how closely connected with quantity, 5. 7. how necessary, 6. af- fects the harmony of verse, ST. 151. 159. seq. accent of the Romans, 41, 42. seq. the rules of it, 43. marks of Roman accent misapplied in inscrip- tions, 60, seq. 211, 212. accent of the Greeks, 79, seq. its use and importance, 86 — 88. Greek accent added a grace to the Roman verse, 151. Greek accent different from the Roman, 152, seq. 170. irregularity of the Greek accent, 171, seq. variation of it at different times, 176, seq. and of the Roman, 177. its reference in Greek and Latin to the quantity of following syllables, 179. Acute, how it affects the sense, 9. coincidence of it with the long quanti- ty in English, 25. it does not lengthen, as well as elevate, 140, seq. the nature of it, 144, seq. proved to be consistent with a short time, 181. the final Greek acute defended, 186. JEoVic dialect, peculiarity of its tones, 44, seq. like the Doric, 49. infu- sion of it in the Roman language, 50, seq. its softness and want of aspiration, 51, 52. Alphabets, ancient as well as modern, defective and redundant, 22. Alexander Aphrodisiensis, his defi- nition of npar»Ji'*, 3. 98. Analogy not always to be expected in a language, 168, seq. Ammonius, on xd-rayixa., 17. on the accent of several words, 109. 'Anifxi aYiTi;, when applied to the voice, their sense, 5. Aristoxenus, his remark on accent, 5,7. Aristophanes of Byzantium, intro- ducer of accentual marks, 101. vindi- cation of his character, 103, seq. au- thor of the marks of punctuation, 104. Apollonius Alex. Dyscolus, followed byPriscianand Lascaris, 4. his remark on the jEolic tones, 46. on the want of aspiration among the iEolians, 51. on the MoVic digamma, used by Alcaeus, Sappho, Alcman, 64. how he denomi- nates the acute tone, 82. on the accent of compound adjectives, 86. on the ac- cent of prououus, 186. 188. Aristotle, his distinction of accent, quantity, and spirit, 11. on the neces- sity of regarding accent, where metre is concerned, 38. on o£u and B*£v, 81. on the rhythm of prose, 87. some pas- sages of his relating to accent, 97 — 99. his account of the acute, 147. Aldus, his observation on the differ- ent dialects of the Italian language, 40. 382 INDEX. Ancients, the nicety of their ear, 88. Anapaestic measure, peculiarity of it, 167. Apex, the Roman mark of quantity ; difference between that and accentual marks, 60. seq. "Aja-t? and ©E«-if, 81. accentual and metrical, different, ibid. 82. 162. seq. Aspiration, what it is, 10. in many Greek syllables formerly, where it now has no mark, 39. final, in the Roman, Syrian, and Egyptian languages, ibid, why in some Roman words of Greek derivation, and not in others, 52. seq. Attics, who are the old, and later, 178. Augment, in verbs, the rejection of it iEolic as well as Ionic, and from thence Roman, 56, 57. Atonies, the doctrine of them vindi- cated, 173, seq. Athenasus, his remark on the Mo- lism of the Roman tones, 58. on the eccent of certain words, 109. 186, 187. B. B, Roman and Greek letter, its affi- nity with V, 70, 71. Bentley (Dr.) his remark on the minor Ionic measure, 32. his applica- tion of the digamma, 72, 73. his ex- planation of a passage in Horace con- firmed by a Greek epigram found since his time, 73. his remarks on the Latin accent, 155, seq. whether his account of the metrical arsis in Roman poets is right, 164, seq. BXo^, expressive of the dropping of water, 19. Bowyer (Mr.) his opinion of r be- ing applied for the digamma, 75. C. Callistratus, after Simonides settled the present Greek alphabet, 21. Callimachus, bis scholiast, on two initial consonants, 23. Csesura, of the Greeks and Romans, 36, seq. The same not required in English verse, 37. Caninius, his remarks conformable to those of antiquity, 47. Capella, (Martianus) his names of accents, 81. on the gravity and acute- ness of sound, 84, 183. Charisius, on the quantity of us Jjssi's, 19. Castorion Solensis, particular mea- sure of his poem, 37. Cassiodorus, on the JEo\. digamma in Latin, 65, Calabria, remains of the Greek lan- guage there in the time of Petrarch, 120. Charax, his remark on the accent of some words, 110. Cheke, (Sir John) on ascertaining the pronunciation of letters from the sonnds of beasts, 19. on the method of considering ancient pronunciation in general, 40. says, that accent and quan- tity were both observed by his friends in pronouncing Greek, 199, 200. holds the Greek accents inviolate, 203. Charlemagne, answered Greek am- bassadors in their own language, 137. Chrysoloras, (Emanuel) at London on an embassy in the reign of Richard the Second, 122. Choriambic foot, in English metre, el. Ceporinus, (Jacob) on the metrical power of initial Latin and Greek con- sonants, 24. Cicero, his remark on accent, 6, 7. his division of sounds, 7. on the quan- tity of inclytus, 18. the want of aspi- ration among the old Latins, 53. his writings depreciated by some of the Greeks, and why, 123, seq. his charac- ter ill-treated at first by the Romans, 124. his remarks on the Greek nation, 124, 125. his description of the acute sound, 148. Comnena (Anna, the Byzantine princess), style of her history, 133. Consonants, the power of two initial ones among the Greeks and Romans, 23, seq. vowels short before two or three in Greek, 24, 25. They do not necessarily retard the voice, 25. Corinthas,on vowels long by nature. INDEX. 383 and position, 1 9. on the jEolians having no dual number, 45. Cratinus, his account of the power of the long E, 19. Cretic measure in our language, 35. D. Draco, Stratoniceus, on dissyllable barytone verbs, 17. Dual number, none in the iEolic or Roman language, 45. Dactyl foot, the use of it in English metre, 29. Dactylic measure excluded from our language, 34. Dawes (Mr.) on two initial conso- nants, and initial ? , 23. his application of the digamma to Homer's metre, 54. his mistake concerning the arsis, 166. Despauterius, on confounding ac- cent with quantity, 62. &iaa-rr)[jt.st defined, from the musical writers, 182, 183, seq. Digamma (., 66. account of it by Terentianus Maurus, Mart. Capella, Quinctilian, 67. Feet, metrical, in our common dis- course and prose compositions, 6. Fuimus, the first syllable of it long in Ennius, 54. Fundanius, the pronunciation of that word by a Greek laughed at by Cice- ro, 51. G. Gaudentius, his clear account of ac- cent and quantity, 14. Garcillasso, de la Vega, on the Peru- vian accent, 159. 384 INDEX. r, the mistaken application of it in- stead of digamma, 74, 75. in Homer's rivro Fevto, &c. Gellius, (Aulus) his remarks on the quantity of particular long syllables, 18. on the summits tonus of Nigi- dius, 81. Grammarians, Latin ones after Quinc- tilian, on the subject of accent, 58. Grammarians, Greek, who wrote on accent, a list of them, 93. 96. Greeks, modern grammarians, their observations agreeable to those of an- tiquity, 4. a short vindication of the learned Greek exiles, 120, seq. they duly distinguish between accent and quantity, 121. Greek (ancient language) introduc- tion of it into Italy, 48, seq. The ex- tent of it, 126, seq. its ascendancy over the Roman, 127, seq. though publicly discouraged, 128. appearance of it in the British language, 129. why used by the first publishers of the gospel, 130. duration of it shewn, ibid. seq. alterations in it, 131. it borrowed seve- ral words from the Latin, 132. tolera- ble purity of it in verv late writers, ibid, why it subsisted long after the Roman, 133. whether Alexander's Asiatic expedition could affect it, 135. seq. Greeks, accurate iu the use of their pronouns, 175. Greece (modern) the liturgies of St. Basil and Chrysostom used in the churches there, 120. Graevius (Job. Georg.) copies of the errors of Is. Vossius, 161. G. (Dr.) mistakes a passage in Dionys. Halic. 2. his error concern- ing the inconsistency of accent and quantity, 7. concerning the quantity of the northern languages, 15. his strange supposition concerning the jEolic ac- cent, 47. his mistaken notion concern- ing the nature of the acute, 139, seq. concerning the accents of words end- ing oiKoj, 160. his arguments drawn from the irregularity of Greek accents answered, 168, seq. his mistake about atonies and enclitics, 173, seq. about the later Attics, 178. about the falling times in the accentual thesis of Gr and Lat. 187. 190. Grave sound, how it affects the sense, 9. H. Hannibal wrote in Greek, 126. Herodian, son of Apollonius, his iTfoo-aSia, 4. on the want of aspiration among the jEolians, 51. his account of Homer's rivro, 75. how he denomi- nates the acute tone, 81. on the accent of participles of praeterit pass. 171. on the accent of qatrl, 186. Hare (Bp.) on the nature of the acute, 148. Hermogenes, on the accent of 8»/txo- aia. determining the sense of it, 98. Herodius, his distich on petty gram- marians, 46. Henninius, his error concerning the quantity of modem languages, 28. concerning the Greek accent, 159, seq. Hemsterhuis, the propriety of his censure on Lucian concerning Hanni- bal's ignorance of Greek, 126. Homer's language ^Eolic in many respects, 55, seq. objections to par- ticular passages of his answered by the help of accent, 99. seq. his miurus verse, 141. Ho-op, the Greek call on shipboard, 19. Huetius, on the old marks of punc- tuation, 104. Iambic feet, common in discourse, 34. "iSov the second aorist, for eFj&ov, 75. Juba, a Greek writer, 127. Johuson (Mr. Samuel) his remark on the English acute, 25. Ionic (minor) foot, in English me- tre, 31. among the Greeks and Ro- mans, 32. Irish, an account of their pronun- ciation, 39. Irregularity of language in general considered, 168, seq. Italian language, the accent of it, 15.5. INDEX. -385 Lasearis, his definition of ITgoa-wSia, 3. his remarks agreeable to the rules of antiquity, 4. Lasearis (John, or Jauus), his epi- taph on himself, 117. Languages, the northern ones have quantity as well as the Greek and Ro- man, 14, seq. we must not in all cases argue from one to another, 189. Latins (ancient) want of aspiration in their language, and why, 52, seq. abbreviations among them, as among the old Greeks, 56. Lipsius, recommends the use of the Roman apex, 44. on the want of aspi- ration among the old Latins, 52. on the abbreviations among the old Latins and Greeks, 56. on the accentual marks mis- applied in some Latin inscriptions, 61. his emendation of a line of Afsanius and Pacuvius, 71. on the nature o£ the acute, 147. Leo X. his regard for literature, 118. his Greek academy, ibid. AoyasiSJjf poetry, what it was, 112. Longinus, on long and short times, 23. Lucillius, on the long and short Ro- man I. 20. Lyric Greek poems, many destroyed in the later ages, on account of their impurity, 138. M. Marks, of accent and quantity, an- cient like the modern, 3, 4. the mis- application of them in modern edi- tions of Latin authors, 44. Marks of accent not nsed nor want- ed by the ancient Greeks, 99, seq. why more wanted, when u^ed, than marks of quantity, 101, seq. when, and by whom introduced, 102, seq. proof of their appearance in very old copies, before Christ, 108, seq. their misapplication, 113. their present po- sition conformable to the accounts of the old tones, 176, seq. their use in the case of homonymous words consi- dered, 180, seq. their three places in Greek, different from the Latin, de- fended, 185. 190. The present marks not to be suppressed, 198, seq. may be properly applied by an English voice, 199. Macrobius, on the different accent of the Greek infinitives, 59. on acute sounds, 148. Metre, founded in quantity alone, 36. Roman and Greek metre alike, but modulation difl'erent, 158. Michaelis, his remark on expressing the Greek accent distinct from quan- tity, 200. Melancthon,his remark on the Greek and Latin marks of accent, 60. on confounding accent with quantity, 62. Mceris Atticista, on the second a of ayogi^a, 17. on the accent of cer- tain words, 109. Markland (Mr.) his opinion of the Greek accents, 206. Monlfaucon, on the time when ac- centual marks were most used, 111. Monks, of the dark ages, their lite- rary merit, 136, seq. Morhoff, his brief account of the learned Greek exiles, 121. Muretus, a piece of criticism of his considered, 192. Music, how it differs from discourse, 2. 182. Musical composers, how they per- verted right accent and quantity in set- ting words to music, according to Dio- nysius, 82, seq. Musurus (Marcus of Crete), his fa- mous elegy, 118. his care of several Greek editions, 116. Dedication of Aldus to him, ibid. N. Natural, what properly called so in speech, 28. Nigidius, on the accent of Valeri, 81. Norris (Cardinal) confounds the Ro- man apex with the accentual mark, 61. C. '0%vTn;, account of it from Aristoxe- nus, 5. .the senses of o£v(, 144, seq. 386 INDEX. Olympiodorus, Lis remark on the solemnity of the Roman tones, 153. Oratorical accent different from sylla- bic, 12, 13. Orthography, old Roman, of vow- els, 20. Otho II. Emperor, owed his escape from the enemy to his knowledge of Greek, 137. Ov diphthong short among the .iEo- lians, 50. in Homer, ibid. Xlfoa-te&la, its old Greek definition given imperfectly, 3. Palatium derived, according to Eus- tathius and Dionys. Hal. from Ua.XKa.M- tiov, named after Pallas the son of Evander, 48, 49. Perizonius, on the accent of the an- cients, 41. Petrarch learnt Greek from a Cala- briau monk, 120. Philelphus, his remark on the jEo- lism of Homer, 56. on the state of the Greek language before the taking of Constantinople, 116. Philodemus, his epigram to which Horace alludes, 73. Pierson (John), his remark on the variation of accent and spirit in the old Greek, and in his own language, 40. Pilatus (Leontius), Gr. master of Boccace, 120. Plato, on the accent of certain words, 80. his remarks on the nice attention of the Greeks to their language, 89. Pliny, on the introduction of the Greek language into Italy, 49. Plutarch, his distinction between ac- cent and quantity, 8. A passage of his concerning the accent of ' ' Ao-xX-nia- og, 90, seq. of 'Eefxov, 92. on the nature of acute sounds, 147. Perrault injudiciously ridicules a pas- sage in Homer, 155. Oocvij iiaa-rrj/xartKn, and irun^fi;, their difference, 184, seq. Pope (Mr.) his mistake, in ridiculing Dr. Bentley, 72. Porphyry, a MS. sentence of his on accent misapplied by Dr. G., 1 12. Priscian, his account of accent, quan- tity, and spirit, 10. His remark on the final aspiration of the Syrian and Egyp- tian languages, 39. on the iEolism of the Roman language, 50, seq. on the digamma in the perfect tenses, 54. on arsis and thesis, 82. on the Roman and Greek pronouns, 175. Pronunciation, of all languages, how established, 26, seq. Prose, the rhythm of it, 86—88. Psellus (Michael), his versus jwli- tici, 113. Qdoyyot;, the meaning of it, 9. Quantity, on what founded, 4. how necessary, 6. the different degrees of long and longer, short and shorter times, 17, seq. the authority of quan- tity, on what founded, 26, seq. alone, not a sufficient foundation of much har- mony, 28. ancient quantity not ob- served by the enemies of accents, 191, $eq. Quinctilian, on the want of aspira- tion among the old Latins, 52. ou the tone-pipe of Gracchus, 182. on the Roman and Greek accent, 151. R. Rhodiginus, Ca;l. his account of the formation and duration of sounds, 9. Rhythm more complex, than metre, 36. may be bad, where metre is good, ibid, but not in English, 37. the reason of this, 38. 'Pv9fA.6s, poetical, Scaliger's account of it, ibid, its enlarged sense, 205. Roman language, derived from the iEolic, 44, seq. whether it has a dual number, 45. Romans unwilling to ac- knowledge the Greek origin of their language, 57. did not use accentual marks, 59. the sameness and uniformity of the Roman accent, 151. its difference from the Greek, 152, seq. the supposed majesty of it, 153. Rules, relating to language, follow- ing it, not directing it, 26. Rutgersius gives a ridiculous de- scription of some strolling Greeks, 120. INDEX. 387 s. • S, Roman consonant, sometimes sub- stituted for the Greek aspirate, 54. Scaliger (Jul.) his division of the modes of sound, 10. on the long penul- timates of genitives of pronouns, 21. on the name of grave and acute, 41. on the sound of the digamma, 69. on the arsis and thesis, 81. on the Roman ac- cent, 156. on the arbitrary form of lan- guage, 169. remarks on his manner of considering the old tones, 189. Salmasius, his remark on monosylla- bles, 56. on the affinity between the Roman B and consonant V, 71. his ac- count of the acute tone, 148. Sarpedonius follows the errors of Is. Vossius, 160. Sense, of hearing as well as seeing, corrected by judgment, 194. Scioppius Gasp, his remark on mo- dern pronunciation, 195. Scots, in their pronunciation sepa- rate the acute tone from the long time, 25. an account of their pronunciation, 38. Scholiast, on Hephsestion, his re- mark on the different degrees of long quantity, 17. his mistake concerning the power of the acute, 141. Schol. on Euripides, concerning the old Greek orthography, 21. Schol. on Theocrit. concerning the iEolic accent, 46. Schol. on Homer, concerning the accent of ay-a^ry, 109. Sextus Empiricus, on the number of Greek voweis, 21. Seneca, the difference of the Greek and Roman language characterized by him, 153. Sergius, his description of the di- gamma, 38. Servius, on the Greek settlements in Italy, 49. on the digamma in the per- fect tenses, 54. on words with the Greek accent in Latin verse, 151. on the ac- cent of some penultimates in Latin, 187. IiyaXoei; in Homer well explained by Dr. Taylor, 71. Sounds, on the division of them into high and low, accent is founded, 3. on their different length, quantity, 4. Sophocles, two passages in his QZdip. Col. corrected, 77. Smith (Mr. Thomas), on the restora- tion of anoient pronunciation, 196. Spirit, aspiration, and emphasis, dis- tinguished from accent and quantity, 9. seq. Stephens (Hen.) his account of gra- vity and acuteness of sound, 5. on the Greek marks of accent, 180. Stephanus (de Urbibus) on the Mo- lic accent, 46. Taylor (Dr.) on the different pow- ers of vowels, 20. on the (ntyy.a.X of Herodian's Catholic prosody, from the Anthologia, 95. on the accentuated Herculaneum inscription, 210, seq. Terentianus (Maurus) on an initial S joined with another consonant, 23. on the minor Ionic measure in Horace, 32. on the digamma, 51. 68. on the miurus verse in Gr. and Lat. 141. on the accent of ZuKgarw, 144. on the metrical arsis and thesis, 163. TeiW, the prosodical sense of it and its derivatives, 80, 81. To'ttoj, the meaning of the word when applied to the voice, 14. Triclinius (Demetrius) his observa- tion on the marks of accent, 110. Trochee foot, the use and force of it in English verse, 30. Trypho, on the accent of certain words, 108. Tzetzes, his remark on the aspira- tion of the Attics, 39. Tzetzes (John), his versus Politici and their metre, 112, seq. his know- ledge of true quantity, 114. Tyrannio, his treatise on the Roman language, with what view written, 58. U. V, the Roman letter, the use and power of it, 65, acq, like the Greek ov, Ivn^lisli 00 and w, French mi, li'*. 388 INDEX. Ulpian, his remark on the artful mistake of Demos, in pronouncing the word /jug-duTo;, 91. Vanderhardt (Herman), his treatise, and opinion concerning the Greek ac- centual marks, 13. Varro, on the quantity of the first syllable in pluit, luit, 54. unwilling to accept a Greek etymology, 57. on the want of analogy in language, 170. Verses found often in prose, 86. Verwey adopts the errors of Is. Vossius, 161. Victorinus, on the quantity of in compounded, 18. Victorinus (Marius) on the subdi- vision of times, 22. on the metrical arsis and thesis, 163. Victorius (Peter) on the traces of Greek in the Tuscan language, 48. on the particular sense of 8oo< in Homer 146. Virgil, his propriety in translating Homer's Sa S ua-reya.^v, 5. his prejudice in favour of the Latin origination of bis own language, 57. a conjectural emendation of a passage in Mn. v. 76. his sense of uda vox, 185. Vossius (Isaac) what ages of Gre- cism he allows to be pure, 46. his hy- pothesis concerning the Greek accents erroneous, 149, seq. Vossius (Gerard) on the misapplica- tion of accentual marks in some Latin inscriptions, 61. Vowels, doubtful ones, their nature and different powers, 20, seq. Roman long ones formerly expressed by two characters, ibid, long, though coming immediately before other vowels, 24. short before more than one or two con- sonants, ibid. 28. a greater number of them make a language more harmo- nious, 28. Vulgar pronunciation, in what the corruption of it chiefly consists, 47. W. Welch, an account of their pronun- ciation, 39. Women, Greek and Roman, retain best the purity of their language, 116. fir 3- Printed by J. F. DOVE, St. John's Square. ^udnvso^ ^aim&v r ^Aavaan-# ^Aavaan-# ^t-UBRARYQc ^UIBRAHYfl/v 3 ^tONIVtKi/A ^lOSANGElfj^ C5 ^"N— k r ^AINflJV^ %ojnvjjo^ wtiommti^ ^mwww ^.OFCAUFO^ ^OFCAUFOfyv ^WEUNIVERS/^. ^lOSANCflfj^ 3 Uj ^Jiwsm^ ^/maim^ .^ AMMNIVER% «$UIBRARY#. ^lUBRARYtf/ fve^t &/~>r->t iiif^ Siir'- { 3 ff r# %toam$ 1 c £ ( 1 ? is i iH| r H V MMfny„?.'.,?,^' ,orn ' a ' L °s Angeles ^AHYHaiHfc'l i in em itl UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY A A 000154 228 W ^QmWiW '%®m*S& %HAIM3\^ 8 IFOff^ ^Aavaan-^ S. Q — f ft w % ^10*ANCEI% n^ *QmM$& ^E-UBRARY^ S3 ^OF-CALIFOfy* 2: ^Aavaani^ ^HIBRAIMK y ^A«vaan# S «NIVER% ^ONAUFO^ s 5JrtEUNIVER5/4 ^ ^ ^FCAIIFOR^ f # ^Aavnan-.# v \WEUNlVER% . MAI UNIVERS/A ^mmm^ i ^clOSANCnfJ^ CO, ^bainm^ %a3AIN(l-3^ ^■UBRARYOf. s ^OJITVDJO^ ^. ^10SANCEI% ^0FCAUF(% #AHyaan-# ^EUBRARYQc. <$UIBRARY0/. 'AS *& ^VVEUNIVER^ J